PROJECT TABLE OF CONTENTS 01010 PROJECT GENERAL

LA MIRADA LIBRARY PROJECT TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC-1

PROJECT TABLE OF CONTENTS

DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01010 PROJECT GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01040 CONTRACTOR COORDINATION WITH ARTIST 01055 STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION 01200 COORDINATION AND MEETINGS 01250 CONTRACTOR’S REQUEST FOR INFORMATION 01310 PROJECT SCHEDULE 01320 CONSTRUCTION INDOOR AIR QUALITY 01322 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 01330 CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT 01340 SUBMITTALS 01370 SCHEDULE OF VALUES 01400 QUALITY CONTROL 01500 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01510 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT 01537 TREE PROTECTION 01600 TRANSPORT, HANDLING, AND STORAGE 01700 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01710 CLEANING 01720 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01750 PROJECT ADDED STOCK 01800 CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION DEBRIS RECYCLING FOR LOS ANGELES COUNTY

PROJECTS 01810 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS DIVISION 02 - SITE WORK 02050 DEMOLITION 02080 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS, ASBESTOS AND LEAD ABATEMENT DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE 03100 CONCRETE FORMWORK 03106 UNDERSLAB VAPOR BARRIER 03200 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03310 CONCRETE TESTING AND INSPECTION 03345 CONCRETE AGENTS AND FINISHES 03600 DRYPACK AND EPOXY ADHESIVES 03700 DRYPACK AND MECHANICAL ANCHORS DIVISION 04 – MASONRY 04232 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS (CMU) DIVISION 05 - METALS 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL


05410 COLD FORMED METAL STUD SYSTEM 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS DIVISION 06 - WOODS & PLASTIC 06117 MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY 06400 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK DIVISION 07 - THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION 07200 THERMAL AND ACOUSTICAL INSULATION 07217 RIGID INSULATION 07299 ACOUSTICAL PADS 07500 WATER RESISTIVE AIR BARRIER 07550 MODIFIED BITUMEN MEMBRANE ROOFING 07600 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07607 SELF ADHERING FLASHING 07840 FIRE STOPS AND SMOKE SEALS 07900 SEALANTS AND CAULKING DIVISION 08 - DOORS & WINDOWS 08110 METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08305 ACCESS PANELS 08335 MOTORIZED OVERHEAD GRILLES 08412 ALUMINUM STOREFRONT AND WINDOW SYSTEM 08625 TUBULAR DAYLIGHTING DEVICE 08710 FINISH HARDWARE 08720 AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOORS 08750 SLIDING ALUMINUM FRAMED SYSTEM 08760 SLIDING STOREFRONTS 08800 GLAZING 08817 ANTI GRAFFITI GLASS PROTECTION FILM DIVISION 09 - FINISHES 09100 METAL SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES 09200 LATH AND PLASTER 09252 CEMENTITIOUS BACKER BOARDS 09260 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09264 GLASS FIBER SURFACED GYPSUM WALL SHEATHING 09300 TILE 09500 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09550 WOOD CEILINGS 09651 LINOLEUM TILE FLOORING 09653 RUBBER BASE 09676 TOPICAL MOISTURE DETERRENT FOR SLABS 09677 VAPOR EMISSION AND ALKALINITY TESTING FOR ADHERED FLOORING 09680 CARPETING 09860 ANTI-GRAFFITI COATING SYSTEM 09900 ARCHITECTURAL PAINTING 09902 CLEAR CONCRETE FLOOR SEALER


DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 10170 SOLID PHENOLIC PLASTIC TOILET PARTITIONS 10265 ALUMINUM CORNER GUARDS 10520 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS, AND ACCESSORIES 10600 RECYCLED PLASTIC WALL GUARD 10800 TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES 10816 UNDER SINK PLUMBING COVER - FABRIC TYPE DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT 11052 BOOK DETECTION SYSTEM 11132 MOTORIZED FRONT PROJECTION SCREENS 11452 APPLIANCES DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS 12527 WINDOW SHADES DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL 15010 BASIC REQUIREMENTS 15047 IDENTIFICATION 15050 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15240 VIBRATION ISOLATION & SEISMIC CONTROLS 15250 MECHANICAL INSULATION 15410 PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEM 15440 PLUMBING FIXTURES 15782 PACKAGED SPLIT AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM 15850 AIR HANDLING 15890 DUCTWORK 15895 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 15990 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 15992 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC SYSTEMS 15995 PROJECT COMPLETION DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL 16050 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16110 CONDUIT 16112 SURFACE RACEWAYS 16120 WIRE AND CABLE 16130 BOXES 16180 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT 16190 SUPPORTING DEVICES 16195 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16440 DISCONNECT SWITCHES 16441 DISCONNECT SWITCHES INSTALLATION 16450 SECONDARY GROUNDING 16470 PANELBOARDS 16471 PANELBOARDS INSTALLATION


16480 MOTOR CONTROL 16485 CONTACTORS 16511 LIGHTING FIXTURES 16512 LIGHTING FIXTURES INSTALLATION 16520 EMERGENCY CENTRAL LIGHTING INVERTER 16540 OCCUPANCY SENSOR LIGHTING CONTROLS 16590 NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS 16733 CLOCK AND PROGRAM SYSTEMS 16800 GENERAL TECHNOLOGY REQUIREMENTS 16810 TECHNOLOGY EQUIPMENT 16820 PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 16830 CABLE TRAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 16840 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR COMMUNICATIONS PATHWAYS AND CABLING 16850 COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS 16860 COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING 16860 COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 16870 PUBLIC ADDRESS AND MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEMS 16900 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 16910 ACCESS CONTROL 16920 INTRUSION DETECTION 16930 VIDEO SURVEILLANCE

LA MIRADA LIBRARY CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS (CMU) 04232-1

SECTION 04232

CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS (CMU) PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Principal work in this Section:

1. Provide concrete masonry units (CMU), complete, in accordance with Contract Documents.

2. Scope but not limited to the following: ungrouted infill into existing CMU walls

B. Related work in other Sections:

1. none

1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES

A. Requirements for fire-rating, reinforcing and lateral support conditions are to be regulated in compliance with CBC as well as other codes where more stringent and the details are not necessarily fully defined on Drawings.

B. Whenever a fire-rating is indicated for a wall (4-hour, 3-hour, etc.) use masonry units in

that wall complying with the requirements established by the American Insurance Association and other governing authorities as herein before specified and listed by U.L. Fire Resistance Directory.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Quality Assurance: Prepare and execute Quality Assurance program including material reports, sampling and detailed shop drawings which provide no opportunity to complete unsatisfactory concrete work. Perform retesting or evaluation by Quality control personnel due to deficient work, and similar work at no additional cost.

B. Quality Control: Concrete masonry work may be subject to detailed evaluation and tests

in shop and field. Evaluations and testing undertaken is strictly for random evaluation. Extent, duration and amount of testing or evaluation is entirely at discretion of the Owner’s Representative. Use of testing services, or execution of testing or evaluation service shall in no way relieve Contractor's sole responsibility to furnish materials and construction in full compliance with Contract Documents.

C. Use adequate numbers of skilled craft persons who are thoroughly trained and

experience in the necessary crafts and who are complete familiar with specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the Work of this Section.

D. Testing Agency: The Owner will engage a Testing Agency to perform masonry quality

control, testing and inspection. Provide the Owner’s Testing Agency with the following:

1. Incidental labor required to facilitate testing.


2 Minimum one day's advance notice of masonry work and when concrete is to be placed.

3 Materials, samples and access to materials as required for testing. 4. Reimbursement of costs for testing and inspection resulting as consequence of

the following:

a. Work not in compliance with Contract Documents b. Testing to verify adequacy of work done, without prior notice, without

proper supervision, or contrary to standard construction practice. E. Certifications: Furnish a certificate signed by the unit masonry manufacturer, executed

in triplicate, stating that masonry units have been properly and thoroughly cured at the plant before shipment, and that they conform to the requirements of this specification. Include the name of the Contractor, the project location, and the quantity and date or dates of shipment or delivery to which the certificate applies.

1.4 STANDARDS

A. The applicable provisions of the following standard publications shall apply throughout the masonry work; in addition to UBC.

1. American Insurance Association (A.I.A), "Fire Resistance Ratings" and U.L. Fire

Resistance Directory. 2. American National Standard Institute (ANSI): "A41.1, Building Code

Requirements for Masonry.

"A41.2, Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Masonry." 3. "TEK" Information Series, Published by the National Concrete Masonry

Association (NCMA).

B. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for installation of each type of unit masonry product, unless otherwise indicated or specified.

1.5 TESTING

A. Contractor is responsible for expense of testing or inspection resulting as a consequence of the following:

1. Work not evidencing compliance with this Specification. 2. Testing to verify the adequacy of work done without prior notice, improper

supervision, or contrary to standard construction practice. 1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Product data: Within 40 calendar days after the Contractor has received the "Notice to Proceed" submit the following:

1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section.


2. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the specified requirements.

3. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures which, when approved by

the Owner’s Representative will become the basis for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work.

B. Product Data:

1. Each product required by this Section.

C. Samples for exposed unpainted CMU work:

1. Each type of masonry unit.

D. Certificates: Submit copies of manufacturer's certification that the following comply with

the requirements specified:

E. Test Reports: Submit certified Test Reports showing compliance of the following items:

1. Portland Cements. 2. Hydrated Lime. 3. Mortar Aggregates. 4. Grout Aggregates. 5. Grout Admixtures. 6. Concrete Masonry Units (all types specified). 7. Reinforcing Bars. 8. Mortar Mix Design and Strength Tests. Prior to production, prepare one set of

three cubes tested at 7 days and two sets of three cubes tested at 28 days. At least seven day results shall be available prior to production work.

9. Grout Mix Design and Strength Tests. Prior to production, prepare two sets of

one cylinder tested at 7 days and two sets of two cylinders tested at 28 days. At least seven day results shall be available prior to production work.

10. Prism Tests for Combined CMU Wall, Mortar and Grout. Five prism tests for

each combination shall be prepared prior to construction with two tested at seven days prior to production work and three tested at 28 days.

F. Sample Panel: Demonstrate laying, grouting, tooling shape, etc. to Owner’s

Representative’s satisfaction on the initial start-up.

G. Testing During Production.

1. Mortar tests: Prepare test samples for testing at seven days and two tests at 28 days for each days work but not less than one seven day test per truck. Coordinate testing by County's Testing Agency.


2. Prism tests: Prepare one test sample per 5,000 sq. ft. of wall but not less than 3 tests. Coordinate testing by County’s Testing Agency.

2. Grout tests: County’s Testing Agency will sample and test each day's work. One

seven day and two 28 day tests, but not less than one seven day test per truck.

H. Product Data for Credit MR 4 Recycled Content: Provide documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and pre consumer/ post industrial recycled content.

1.7 PRE-INSTALLATION COORDINATION

A. Pre-Installation Conference: Prior to start of each major type of masonry work, and at Contractor's direction, meet at site and review installation procedures and coordination with other work.

B. Coordination with Inserts: Coordinate installation of inserts and dowels for anchoring

masonry work. Coordinate all anchorage of all miscellaneous iron clip angles for masonry partitions, as well as renovation of existing garage screen walls, etc.

C. Examine all parts of supporting structure and conditions under which masonry work is to

be installed. Do not proceed with installation of masonry work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in an acceptable manner.

D. Coordination with Finish Work: Coordinate all reinforcing, ties, etc. for finish masonry

veneers, as well as all frames. 1.8 PRODUCT HANDLING

A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground using pallets, platform or other supports. Protect steel members and package materials from corrosion and deterioration.

B. Do not store materials on structure in a manager that might cause distortion, damage or

overloading members or supporting structure. Repair or replace damaged materials or structure as directed at Contractor's sole expense.

C. Do not change brands or sources of supply for masonry materials during course of work. D. Deliver masonry materials, other than bulk materials, to project site in manufacturer's

unopened containers, bundles, pallets or other standard packaging devices; fully identified with name, type, grade, color and size.

E. Protect all masonry material during shipment, storage and construction; against wetting

and soilage or intermixture with earth or other types of materials. F. Do not use metal reinforcing or ties having loose rust or other coatings, that will reduce or

destroy bond. G. Outside storage of masonry units and reinforcement shall be on plank platforms,

preferably in high, dry locations. 1.9 PROTECTION

A. Employ procedures which protect masonry work from collapse, deterioration, discoloration or damage during construction and until acceptance of the work.


B. Normal weathering of exposed work during construction is permitted, provided other

activities and conditions do not interfere and result in an unacceptable condition.

1.10 WARRANTY:

A. Comply with provisions of the GENERAL CONDITIONS of these Specifications which shall include a 12-month warranty period which covers parts and labor; effective date of the warranty being the date of acceptance by the County.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

A. Provide the products upon which design is based, or provide equal products of another manufacturer approved in advance by the County.

B. Portland Cement for Mortar: Comply with ASTM C150, Type I or II, low alkali, non-

staining, without air-entrainment, natural color and obtained from a single source. C. Hydrated Lime for Mortar: ASTM C207, Type S. D. Mortar Aggregates: Clean, sharp masonry sand conforming to ASTM C144, except for

joints less than 1/4" use aggregate graded with 100% passing the No. 16 sieve. E. Portland Cement for Grout: Comply with ASTM C150, Type I or II, low alkali, obtained

from a single source. F. Fly Ash for Grout: Comply with requirements of Division 3. G. Grout Aggregates: ASTM C404. Modify coarse aggregate grading requirements so that

not more than 5% passes a No. 8 sieve, and 100% passes a 3/8" sieve. H. Grout Admixture: Sika Corporation grout Aid Type 11 or equal. Use for all grout. I. Water: Potable and fresh, free of ingredients harmful to mortar or grout.

2.2 MORTAR MIXES

A. Unit Masonry Mortar: ASTM C270, except limited to the mix materials herein before specified and following cement/lime ratios by volume; wherein sand (in damp condition) equals 2-1/4 to 3 times the volume of cement.

1. Type M: Not more than 1/4 part lime per part Portland cement. Mortar cube

strength at 28 days not less than 2,500 psi minimum. Provide higher strength mortar where indicated on drawings.

B. Mortar mix shall be designed by a testing laboratory. Mortar strength shall meet or

exceed specified strength of masonry unit. Color shall match existing as closely as possible.

2.3 GROUT MIXES

A. Grout for bond beams and to fill cores of walls shall conform to ASTM C476, and be

designed by a testing laboratory. Grout strength shall equal or exceed strength of concrete masonry unit.


B. Grout: Measured by volume, one part Portland cement and fly ash, up to 3 parts damp

loose sand, and 1 to 2 parts pea gravel; exact proportions as required for 28 day cure strength of 2,000 psi minimum. Provide higher strength grout where indicated on drawings. Include grout admixture in accordance with its manufacturer's recommendations.

C. Grout Mix shall be designed by the Contractor’s Testing Laboratory.

2.4 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS (CMU), GENERAL

A. Provide CMU units as indicated, complying with type classifications, weights, grades and cure requirements as hereinafter specified and the following general requirements: 1. Do not use units which have chips, cracks, voids, streaks, iron spots or other

substances which might stain finishes where faces or ends will be exposed. 2. Obtain units from one manufacturer, cured by one process and of uniform texture

and color, to match existing units as closely as possible, for each continuous area and visually related areas. Units shall be fabricated using aggregate from single lots and single sources to the extent possible. If aggregate from more than one lot is utilized, the Owner reserves the right to select units for color consistency.

3. Face Dimensions: Manufacturer's standard, nominal 16 inches long x 4 inches

high (15-5/8 inches x 3-5/8 inches actual), unless otherwise indicated. (For thickness of wall, see Drawings).

4. Provide special shapes wherever indicated and wherever required to build bond

courses, corners, lintels, jambs, caps and for other uses where necessary to provide a complete installation in accordance with the highest standard of workmanship. Provide open end units typically where vertical reinforcing occurs in fully grouted walls.

2.5 MEDIUM-WEIGHT HOLLOW (CMU)

A. General: ASTM C90 (load-bearing), using concrete aggregates complying with ASTM C33, dry net concrete weight of not less than 115 lb. per cu. ft. or greater than 125 lb. per cu. ft., Type 1. Units shall be steam cured and not less than 28 days old when delivered to the job site with maximum drying shrinkage of 0.06% from the saturated to oven-dry condition. Provide minimum block unit strength per structural drawings Provide higher strength block where indicated on drawings.

2.6 CURE, MOISTURE CONTROL & SHRINKAGE

A. Cure units by autoclave treatment at a minimum temperature of 350 deg. F. and at a minimum pressure of 123 psi. Limit moisture absorption to 25% of saturation at time of delivery and until time of installation.

2.7 FINISHES (CMU)

A. Refer to Drawings 2.8 REINFORCEMENT

A. Provide reinforcement dowels from supporting structure.


B. Reinforcing Bars: Steel reinforcing bars, complying with ASTM A615, Grade 60, size as

indicated or specified herein, free from mill scale and excess or loose rust deposits.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Examine the areas and conditions under which Work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until detrimental conditions are corrected. Start of installation operations shall imply Contractor's acceptance of job conditions.

B. Thickness: Build masonry construction to full thickness indicated, except for single wythe

masonry walls which may be built to actual thickness of masonry units using units of nominal thickness indicated.

C. Chases: No chases, embedded conduits, etc. D. Construction Openings: No temporary openings, etc. E. Construction Joints: Step back unfinished work for joining with new work; toothing will

not be permitted. Before new work is started, clean exposed surfaces of set masonry and remove loose masonry units and mortar prior to laying fresh masonry.

F. Cutting Masonry Units: Use motor driven saw designed to cut masonry units with clean

sharp corners. Cut units as required to provide pattern indicated and to fit adjoining work neatly. Use full units without cutting wherever possible. Avoid the use of less than half size unit at corners, jambs and wherever possible at other locations. So not use chipped or broken units for exposed work.

G. Mix mortar and grout as fluid as possible for placing without component segregation by

placing 1/2 the required amount of sand and water in a power operated mixer, then add cement, lime for mortars, and the remainder of sand and water.

H. Discard mortar or grout which has not been used within one hour after being mixed, or

that has began to set. 3.2 LAYING MASONRY WALLS & PARTITIONS

A. Mortar Types, General: Except as otherwise indicated or specified, use Type “M” mortar for masonry work.

1. Use Type "M" mortar minimum and with special structural requirements where

indicated.

B. Bond: Use running bond for all single-width masonry walls unless otherwise indicated. C. Laying Procedures for C.M.U. Walls

1. Shove masonry units into place with a full bed of mortar in both horizontal and

vertical joints. 2. Lay-up walls plumb and true with courses level and accurately spaced and

coordinated with other work. Variations from plumb, true or level of more than 1/8" in 8"-0" (1/800) in any direction are unacceptable.


3. For non-load bearing walls, anchor at over head locations using continuous

angles or angle supports spaced not over 4 feet on center. 4. Maintain uniform joint widths except for minor variations to maintain bond

alignment. 5. Cut joints flush for masonry walls which are concealed or to be covered with

other materials, unless otherwise indicated. 6. Tool exposed wall joints slightly concave, unless otherwise indicated. 7. Provide horizontal and vertical reinforcement in all masonry wallsper structural

drawings.

a. At all openings of more than 2'-0" width provide No. 4 minimum reinforcement immediately below the sill. Extend the reinforcing a minimum of 2'-0" beyond the opening.

b. Provide lintels over wall openings c. Provide No. 4 vertical reinforcing in cells adjacent to each edge of

openings. Provide 2 bars each edge for openings greater than 2'-0" high.

d. Provide vertical masonry dowels from supporting slab and structure

above.

D. Grouting:

1. Use fine grout for filling spaces less than 4" or larger in both horizontal directions. 2. Use coarse grout for filling spaces 4" or larger in both horizontal directions. 3. Use low-lift grouting techniques subject to the following requirements.

a. Place vertical reinforcing before grouting. Place before or after laying

masonry units, as required by job conditions. Support vertical reinforcing at intervals indicated. Where individual bars are place after laying masonry, place wire loops extending into cells as masonry is laid and loosen before mortar sets. After insertion of reinforcing bar, pull loops and bar to proper position and tie free ends.

b. Prior to grouting, clean and inspect grout spaces and close cleanout

holes. Remove dust, dirt, mortar droppings, loose pieces of masonry and other foreign materials from grout spaces. Clean reinforcing and adjust to proper positioning as required. Clean top surface of structural members supporting masonry to ensure bond. After final cleaning and inspection, close cleanout holes and brace closures as required to resist group pressures.

c. Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has

attained sufficient strength to resist displacement of masonry units and breaking of mortar bond. Install shores and bracing if required, before starting grouting operations.


d. Limit grout placement to sections which can be completed in one working day with not more than one hour interruptions of pouring operation. Place in lifts with a maximum height per structural drawings. Allow not less than 30 minutes, or more than one hour between lifts of a given placement. Rod or vibrate each grout lift during placing operation.

e. When more than one placement is required to complete a given section

of masonry, extend reinforcing beyond masonry as required for splicing. Place grout to within 1-1/2" of top course of first pour. After grouted masonry is cured, lay masonry units and place reinforcing for second placement section before grouting.

f. Extend vertical reinforcing above elevation of maximum placement

height as required to allow for splicing. g. Lay CMU to maximum placement height. h. Place grout using container with spout or chute.

3.3 REPAIR, POINTING & CLEANING

A. Replace masonry units which are chipped, broken, stained or do not match adjoining units as intended, or as damaged otherwise, provide new units promptly to match adjoining units, pointing up mortar or grout joints to eliminate evidence of replacement. Replace unacceptable work with concrete, concrete grout, etc. as necessary to maintain specified strengths.

B. Cleaning: During the completion of masonry installation and tooling of joints, enlarge any

voids or holes and completely fill with mortar. Point up all joints at corners, openings and adjoining work to provide a uniform, neat appearance, properly prepared for application of sealant compounds and other work to follow.

C. Efflorescence: remove any visible efflorescence at exposed surfaces to the satisfaction of

the Owner’s Representative. Acceptable methods include mechanical means (e.g., wire brush, light grinding. Light sandblasting), chemical means, and fluid means, including power washing.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Cover tops of masonry walls exposed to weather with strong waterproof membrane well secured in place.

3.5 CLEAN-UP

A. Remove all excess materials, equipment, rubbish and debris from the job-site. All areas in the library structure used by the Contractor to be left in a clean and safe conditions.

3.6 WATER REPELLENT APPLICATION

A. Cleaning shall be complete and accepted by the Architect, and wall surfaces shall be thoroughly dry.

B. Apply water repellent in strict accordance with Section 07190 and the water repellent manufacturer's instructions.


-- End of Section --

LA MIRADA LIBRARY ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06400-1

SECTION 06400

ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. Fabrication and installation of architectural casework including shelving, end panels, drawers, doors, countertops, wall cabinets, hardware and cabinet accessory equipment indicated on the Contract Drawings and hereinafter specified.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Sealants and Caulking Section B. Back Priming and Painting Section

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. All submittals shall conform to the provisions of the SUBMITTALS Section of DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings of all custom casework indicating materials and

hardware, details of construction, dimensions, methods of fastening and erection details. Shop Drawings shall bear a W.I. certified compliance label indicating that Drawings fully meet the requirement of the W.I. Custom grade. Shop Drawings shall indicate all grounds, backing, blocking, sleepers and other items required for the installation of casework, which are to be provided and installed as part of the structure.

C. Manufactured Product Information: Submit manufacturers cut sheets and installation requirements.

D. Samples: Submit 2" x 3" plastic laminate chips bearing the manufacturer's name, color,

pattern or texture designations.

E. Manufacturer's Recommended Installation Procedures: Such submitted procedures approved by the Owner will become the basis for Owner's inspection and acceptance or rejection of actual installation procedures used on the work of this Section.


A. Workmanship: All work of this Section to be constructed, assembled and installed by

skilled crafts persons skilled in finish carpentry in compliance with W.I. construction types and grades hereinafter specified and detailed on the Contract Documents. All such work to be accurately fabricated, assembled, joined and expertly finished in accordance with measurements taken on the job-site.

B. Defective Work: All casework, shelving and countertops not true to line, not in

satisfactory operating condition, improperly installed, damaged or marred will not be accepted. Remedy, remove or replace defective work as directed by the County Engineer subject to his approval at no cost to the Owner.

C. Standards: All applicable Sections of the "Manual of Millwork" and current supplements

published by the Woodwork Institute (W.I.), formerly the Woodwork Institute of California,


for the construction types and grades hereinafter specified or shown on the Contract Drawings. All modifications to such standards shown on the Contract Drawings and approved Shop Drawings or specified shall govern.

D. Qualifications of Manufacturer: Product shall be produced by manufacturers regularly

engaged in the manufacture of similar items and with a history of successful production acceptable to the Owner.

E. Qualifications of Installers: Use adequate numbers of skilled workers who are thoroughly

trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.

F. Certification: Before delivery to the job-site, Manufacturer shall issue a W.I. Certified

Compliance Certificate indicating that casework to be furnished for this project will fully meet all specified requirements of W.I. grades.

1. All laminated plastic countertops shall bear the W.I. Certified Compliance Label

indicating the tops meet the requirements of the W.I. Custom grade.

G. Inspection: To assure quality as specified, the Owner may inspect Work in the process of the manufacturer or the finished casework prior to delivery and installation to assure quality of Work.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Delivery: Cabinets, countertops, and materials shall be delivered to the job-site in undamaged condition in crates or suitable packaging bearing the manufacturer’s label and model number. All cabinets and countertops delivered to the job-site for installation shall be properly identified as to where they are to be located within the structure.

B. Storage: All cabinets and countertops shall be stored where directed by the Owner, in

fully covered, well ventilated area(s) and protected from extreme changes in temperature and humidity before installation.

C. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect Work of this Section before, during and

after installation and protect the installed Work and materials of other trades. D. Replacements: In the event of damage, Contractor or Manufacturer shall immediately

make necessary repairs or replacement to the approval of the Owner at no added cost to the Owner.

1.7 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Verification of Job Conditions:

A. Prior to fabrication, take necessary field measurements to assure proper dimensions for the Work of this Section and report to the Owner any discrepancies between the Contract Drawings and the Specifications and/or job conditions and await for further instructions from the Owner.

B. Coordination and Cooperation: Required of Work operations of this Section with other

trades, including mechanical and electrical work to be incorporated into cabinets and installation without delaying work progress.

C. Guarantee: Provide a written guarantee which in addition to the warranty requirements of

the Contract Documents, shall include the removal and replacement of all cabinet doors that develop a warp or wind of 1/8" or more.


PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

A. Wood-Based Materials Certified Wood Product Resources:

1. All wood-based materials must be Forest Stewardship Council (FSC) certified. 2. Scientific Certification Systems (SCS):

a. http://www.scscertified.com/forestry/forest_certclients.html

3. SmartWood Certification Program (SW):

a. Visit http://www.smartwood.org, select the “SmartWood Certified

Products” link, then under “FSC” select “Search for Products.” 4. Forest Certification Resource Center:

a. Visit http://www.certifiedwood.org/, under “Search For” select “Certified

Forest Products.” 5. EcoTimber: 1611 Fourth Street, San Rafael CA, 415.258.8454. 6. EarthSource Forest Products: 1618 28th Street, Oakland CA, 866.549.9663.

B. Composite wood or agrifiber products shall NOT contain any added Urea Formaldehyde

binders or adhesives. These products include, but are not limited to, Plywood, Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF), Oriented Strand Board (OSB), Wheat Boards, Strawboards, Doors and Doors Cores, Laminated Wood Products.

C. Laminating Adhesives used to apply any composite wood-based product to any material

substrate shall NOT contain any Urea Formaldehyde. 2.2 MATERIALS

A. General: In compliance with Sections of the W.I. Manual applicable to the construction types and grades and modifications hereinafter specified and noted on the Contract Drawings.

B. Materials for Concealed Portions of Cabinets: Operational as per Section 14 of the W.I.

Manual. C. Laminated Plastic Clad Cabinets, Shelves, Doors and Countertops: High pressure

thermo setting plastic laminate conforming to N.E.M.A., LD 3 - Latest Edition of the W.I. Manual.

1. Colors and Patterns: As selected by the Owner from manufacturer's standard

color and pattern palette or as noted on the Contract Drawings.

2. Laminate Thicknesses: For surfaces other than countertops minimum .028-inch; for cabinet liners minimum thickness as noted in W.I. Manual; for shelves, countertops and splashes minimum 0.050-inch.


3. Core Material: Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF) complying with ANSI A208.2-1994 and shall be as manufactured by Sierra Pine Ltd, or equal, with no added formaldehyde, and recycled or rapidly renewable material content.

4. Laminating Adhesive: Type II Adhesive, water-resistant, rigid type of

caseinalkaline formula containing no formaldehyde content and conforming to PS 51-71. Field applied adhesive shall not exceed VOC limits of SCAQMD Rule No. 1168.

5. Edge Banding: "T" type extruded tenite-butyrate, 1/16" minimum thickness with

serrated leg 3/8" length.

6. Total Thickness of Cabinets and Countertop Components: 3/4-inch or 1-inch or as otherwise detailed on the Drawings and as noted in the W.I. Manual.

D. Conventional Cabinets - Wood (other than Laminated Plastic Clad):

1. Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF) shall comply with ANSI A208.2-1994, shall

meet sustainable Requirement No. 2 as listed above, and shall be as manufactured by Sierra Pine Ltd, or equal, with no added formaldehyde, and recycled or rapidly renewable material content:

a. Medex: An MDF panel with no added formaldehyde, designed for

moisture sensitive applications. In lieu of Medex, Wheat Sheet by Ecoproducts (or equal) may be provided.

b. Medite II: An MDF panel with no added formaldehyde, specified for

interior use.

2. Edge Banding: Same species of wood as adjacent exposed wood surfaces.

E. In lieu of plywood, fiberboard, or particleboard, wheatboard may be provided. Subject to compliance with specified requirements, wheatboard shall be the product of one of the following manufacturers (or equal): 1. Phoenix Biocomposites, "boifiber wheat". 2. Ecoproducts, "Wheat Sheet". 3. Primeboard, Inc., "Primeboard".

F. Casework Hardware: Provide and install all rough and finish hardware as necessary for

complete installation, but not limited to the following:

1. Concealed hinges by Amerock 180 degrees, No. CM-1727-14 or approved equal.

2. Cabinet Door Pulls by Stanley No. 4477 or approved equal.

3. Cabinet Door Locks, pin tumbler type by National Lock or approved equal.

4. Magnetic Catches by Stanley Epco No. 592 or Lawrence SC1364-AL or approved equal.

5. Shelf Standards and Brackets, K & V No. 255x256 or Stanley No. 798x799, steel

zinc plated or approved equal.


6. Miscellaneous hardware including, but not limited to the following: Spikes, bolts, screws, lags, shields, straps, angles, cleats and other related items for fabrication and installation.

7. Drawer Guides; KV1300, KV1330, Krona-Flex 1336, HDI 2800, Grant 336 or

equal for all drawers except file drawers which shall have KV1460, Grant 329, Accuride 3008, 3009, 4025, 4037; Waterloo 2950, HDI 2910, full extension drawer guides or approved equal.

2.3 VOC CONTENT OF INTERIOR SEALANTS, SEALANT PRIMERS AND ADHESIVES

A. Provide sealants, sealant primers and adhesives for use inside the weatherproofing system that comply with the VOC content limits of South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rule 1168, Adhesive and Sealant Applications, for rules in effect on the date of application in the building. Regardless of the products listed in this section it is the contractor’s responsibility to use products which comply with the following requirements:

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL FABRICATION

A. General:

1. Work of this Section shall be fabricated in strict accordance with designs on the

Contract Drawings and approved Shop Drawings, conforming to construction requirements for W.I. Custom Grade, flush overlay construction.

2. Cabinet units and countertops shall be shop fabricated as complete sections of

adequate size to permit easy handling, access to installation areas for assembly or required for setting in place and installing of closing pieces or components.

3. Make holes or cutouts necessary for incorporation of mechanical and/or electrical

work into the cabinet units and countertop as detailed or specified.

B. Plastic Covered Cabinets:

1. Shop fabricate as complete units of adequate size to permit easy handling, access to installation areas for assembly or required setting in place and installing of countertops and closing pieces.

2. Cabinet interiors to be covered with colored melamine liner material. Melamine

liner shall conform to NEMA LD3 requirements.

3. Shelves to be 3/4" thick Medite, or equal ply-wood for spans up to 35-inches and for spans up to 45-inches shall be 1-inch thick and covered with laminated plastic on both sides and exposed edges plastic on both sides and exposed edges plastic edgebanded.

4. Cabinet hardware hereinbefore specified in this Section shall be installed by the

Cabinet manufacturer in accordance with approved Shop Drawings and shall be adjustable to 1” center. Hinges to be routed into door edges. Doors over 40” high to receive 3 hinges secured in place with Type “A” Phillips head sheet metal screws.

5. Drawers: Sides, back and sub-fronts shall be of dovetail construction made of

½” thick Medite. Drawer bottom shall be 3/8” thick tempered hardboard, plowed


into sides, front and back, glue-blocked and nailed. Fronts shall be ¾” thick plastic laminate construction, fully edgebanded with plastic “T” banding or plastic laminate. Bonding joints shall occur at center of bottom edge of panel.

6. Doors: Overlay type with flush exposed surfaces, fully edgebanded with plastic

“T” banding or plastic laminate. Joints in banding shall occur at center of bottom edge. Doors of base and/or wall cabinet units within any group of adjacent units shall be in alignment.

7. Wall Cabinets: Exposed bottom of such cabinets shall have laminate finish or

finish of wood cabinets.

C. Laminated Plastic Covered Countertops: Colors per Finish Schedule.

1. Fabricate to type and sizes indicated on the Contract Drawings with 4- or 6-inch high back and side splashes as measured from the exposed counter surface and no drip leading edge. Rolled edges shall rise 1/8-inch above the counter surface.

2. Core material for counters and back splash shall be 3/4-inch MDF, Type I,

Medite, or equal.

3. Make holes and/or cutouts as necessary for mechanical and/or electrical work to be incorporated into the countertop as detailed or specified. Provide 3" grommets at every 3' of counter surface, unless otherwise noted.

4. Make joints with screw clip fasteners on not less than 8-inch centers. A water

resisting mastic or glue shall be applied in the joints. Joints shall not occur at sink cutouts.

5. Metal sink moldings shall be stainless steel "Hudee", "Kintrim T-Type" or

"Chromedge Sink-Lok" complete with bolts and lugs or as otherwise detailed on the Contract Drawings.

6. Cover countertop and splashes with solid core colored laminated plastic as

selected by the Owner.

7. Side and back splashes shall rest on the top, be set in mastic and be secured to the top with screws on 8-inch centers. Edges of splashes shall be self-edged and scribed to the walls.

8. Application of plastic laminate to countertop shall be in accordance with

published specifications and recommended practices of the plastic laminate manufacturer.

9. Mastic: Metal trim shall have a thorough application of an approved mastic in voids

between metal, MDF and sink. Counter cut-out edges shall be waterproofed to prevent delamination of MDF. Metal trim shall be applied over the finished plastic surfaces without kerfing, routing, or "letting-in" of moldings or trim.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: All in strict accordance with the approved Shop Drawings, Contract Drawings and referenced W.I. Standards. Cabinets and countertops shall be installed by the manufacturer or by an experienced person under the supervision of the manufacturer.


B. Preparations: All grounds, backing, blocking, furring and other anchorages required for cabinet and countertop installation which become an integral part of a floor, wall or partition shall be in place ready to receive the cabinets and countertops. Start of installation of Work of this Section shall imply Contractor's (manufacturer's acceptance of job conditions).

C. Inspection: Manufacturer or Installer of cabinets and countertops shall examine the

areas and conditions under which Work of this Section will be installed.

1. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper installation of cabinets and countertops.

2. Do not proceed until detrimental conditions have been corrected at no added

cost to the Owner.

3. Start of installation of cabinets and countertop shall imply Contractor's acceptance of job conditions.

D. Cabinet Installation:

1. All cabinet units delivered to the job-site shall bear the W.I. grade stamp verifying

compliance with the specified W.I. Type II construction grade B.

2. Cabinets: Set all base and wall cabinets level and plumb and secure to walls. All screws shall have finish washers.

3. End Panels and Fillers: Furnish to match exposed surfaces and accurately

scribe to walls and neatly and securely fit to cabinets.

4. Matching Lacquered Wood Molds: Fasten to cabinets when required for scribing purposes and at top of cabinets as indicated.

5. Completion: Upon completion of the installation, cabinets including drawers and

shelves shall be cleaned. Doors and drawers shall operate easily and freely.

6. Install all hardware items in accordance with approved Shop Drawings.

7. Scribe plastic laminated cabinets directly to wall. Do not use scribe moldings or fillers.

E. Laminated Plastic Countertop Installation:

1. Secure countertop to base cabinets in level and aligned position with minimum

four No. 10 x 1-1/4" round head wood screws per base cabinet. Provide additional screws at the front and back of each cabinet on both sides of countertop joints.

2. Countertop Joints: Make flush and hairline by cutting back each joint edge to 85

degrees and secure together using adequate number of "trite joint" fasteners or approved equal at 3-inch centers.

3. Join countertop surfaces to adjacent vertical wall or other surfaces and fabricate

edges to conform to manufacturer's recommendations or as otherwise detailed.

4. Where no back or side splashes are on countertops accurately scribe countertop edges to wall surfaces and caulk.


3.3 COMPLIANCE

A. Performance of Work: The Owner reserves the right to request and pay for an inspection by a W.I. representative to determine that Work of this Section has been performed in accordance with the specified standards.

B. Non-Conforming Work: If the W.I. representative determines that Work of this Section

does not comply, Contractor shall immediately remove non-conforming items and replace it with complying items at no added cost to the Owner and reimburse the Owner for the cost of the inspection(s).

3.4 CLEAN-UP

A. Visually inspect each installed cabinet unit, including shelves, drawers and countertops and thoroughly clean all surfaces using cleaning materials recommended by the manufacturer of the finish being cleaned and carefully adjust all operating components for optimum operation of drawers and doors.

B. Remove all excess materials, equipment, rubbish and debris from the job-site. All areas

in the structure used by the Contractor to be left in a clean, acceptable and safe condition.

-- End of Section --

LA MIRADA LIBRARY DOOR HARDWARE 08710 -1

SECTION 08710

DOOR HARDWARE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Door hardware, including electric hardware. 2. Storefront and entrance door hardware. 3. Power supplies for electric hardware. 4. Remote button release hardware. 5. Door position switches.

B. Related Divisions:

1. Division 06 – door hardware installation 2. Division 07 – sealant at exterior thresholds 3. Division 08 – metal doors and frames, interior aluminum frames, wood

doors, integrated security systems, specialty doors, storefront and glazed curtainwall systems.

4. Division 10 – operable partitions 5. Division 21 – fire and life safety systems 6. Division 28 – security access systems

C. Specific Omissions: Hardware for the following is specified or indicated elsewhere.

1. Windows. 2. Cabinets, including open wall shelving and locks. 3. Signs, except where scheduled. 4. Toilet accessories, including grab bars. 5. Installation. 6. Rough hardware. 7. Conduit, junction boxes & wiring. 8. Folding partitions, except cylinders where detailed. 9. Sliding aluminum doors, except cylinders where detailed. 10. Access doors and panels, except cylinders where detailed. 11. Corner Guards. 12. Welded steel gates and supports.

1.2 REFERENCES: A. Use date of standard in effect as of Bid date.

1. American National Standards Institute

a) ANSI 156.18 – Materials and Finishes. b) ICC/ANSI A117.1 - 1998 – Specifications for making buildings and

facilities usable by physically handicapped people. [omit for CA work – not applicable]

2. BHMA – Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association 3. 2014 California Building Code


a) Chapter 11B – Accessibility To Public Buildings, Public Accommodations, Commercial Buildings and Public Housing

4. DHI – Door and Hardware Institute 5. NFPA – National Fire Protection Association

a) NFPA 80 2013 Edition – Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives.

b) NFPA 105 – Smoke and Draft Control Door Assemblies c) NFPA 252 – Fire Tests of Door Assemblies

6. UL – Underwriters Laboratories

a) UL10C – Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. b) UL 305 – Panic Hardware

7. WHI – Warnock Hersey Incorporated State of California Building Code 8. Local applicable codes 9. SDI – Steel Door Institute 10. WI – Woodwork Institute 11. AWI – Architectural Woodwork Institute 12. NAAMM – National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers

B. Abbreviations

1. Manufacturers: see table at 2.1.A of this section 2. Finishes: see 2.7 of this section.

1.3 SUBMITTALS & SUBSTITUTIONS

A. SUBMITTALS: Submit six copies of schedule per D. Only submittals printed one sided will be accepted and reviewed. Organize vertically formatted schedule into “Hardware Sets” with index of doors and headings, indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Minimum 10pt font size. Include following information: 1. Type, style, function, size, quantity and finish of hardware items. 2. Use BHMA Finish codes per ANSI A156.18. 3. Name, part number and manufacturer of each item. 4. Fastenings and other pertinent information. 5. Location of hardware set coordinated with floor plans and door schedule. 6. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. 7. Mounting locations for hardware. 8. Door and frame sizes, materials and degrees of swing. 9. List of manufacturers used and their nearest representative with address

and phone number. 10. Catalog cuts. 11. Point-to-point wiring diagrams. 12. Manufacturer’s technical data and installation instructions for electronic

hardware.

B. Bid and submit manufacturer’s updated/improved item if scheduled item is discontinued.

C. Deviations: Highlight, encircle or otherwise identify deviations from “Schedule of Finish Hardware” on submittal with notations clearly designating those portions as deviating from this section.


D. If discrepancy between drawings and scheduled material in this section, bid the more expensive of the two choices, note the discrepancy in the submittal and request direction from Architect for resolution.

E. Substitutions per Division 1. Include product data and indicate benefit to the Project. Furnish operating samples on request.

F. Items listed with no substitute manufacturers have been requested by Owner to meet existing standard.

G. Furnish as-built/as-installed schedule with closeout documents, including keying schedule, riser and point-to-point wiring diagrams, manufacturers’ installation, adjustment and maintenance information, and supplier’s final inspection report.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Qualifications:

1. Hardware supplier: direct factory contract supplier who employs a certified architectural hardware consultant (AHC), available at reasonable times during course of work for project hardware consultation to Owner, Architect and Contractor.

a) Responsible for detailing, scheduling and ordering of finish hardware. Detailing implies that the submitted schedule of hardware is correct and complete for the intended function and performance of the openings.

B. Hardware: Free of defects, blemishes and excessive play. Obtain each kind of hardware (latch and locksets, exit devices, hinges and closers) from one manufacturer.

C. Exit Doors: Operable from inside with single motion without the use of a key or special knowledge or effort.

D. Fire-Rated Openings: NFPA 80 compliant. Hardware UL10C (positive pressure) compliant for given type/size opening and degree of label. Provide proper latching hardware, non-flaming door closers, approved-bearing hinges, and resilient seals. Coordinate with wood door section for required intumescent seals. Furnish openings complete.

E. Furnish hardware items required to complete the work in accordance with specified performance level and design intent, complying with manufacturers’ instructions and code requirements.

F. Pre-Installation Meetings: Initiate and conduct with supplier, installer and related trades, coordinate materials and techniques, and sequence complex hardware items and systems installation. Include manufacturers' representatives of locks, panic hardware and door closers in the meetings. Convene prior to commencement of related work.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: A. Delivery: coordinate delivery to appropriate locations (shop or field).

1. Permanent keys and cores: secured delivery direct to Owner’s representative.


B. Acceptance at Site: Items individually packaged in manufacturers’ original containers, complete with proper fasteners and related pieces. Clearly mark packages to indicate contents, locations in hardware schedule and door numbers.

C. Storage: Provide securely locked storage area for hardware, protect from moisture, sunlight, paint, chemicals, dust, excessive heat and cold, etc.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS AND COORDINATION: A. Where exact types of hardware specified are not adaptable to finished shape or

size of members requiring hardware, provide suitable types having as nearly as practical the same operation and quality as type specified, subject to Architect’s approval.

B. Coordination: Coordinate hardware with other work. Furnish hardware items of proper design for use on doors and frames of the thickness, profile, swing, security and similar requirements indicated, as necessary for proper installation and function, regardless of omissions or conflicts in the information on the Contract Documents. Furnish related trades with the following information: 1. Location of embedded and attached items to concrete. 2. Location of wall-mounted hardware, including wall stops. 3. Location of finish floor materials and floor-mounted hardware. 4. At masonry construction, coordinate with the anchoring and hollow metal

supplier prior to frame installation by placing a strip of insulation, wood, or foam, on the back of the hollow metal frame behind the rabbet section for continuous hinges, as well as at rim panic hardware strike locations, silencers, coordinators, and door closer arm locations. When the frame is grouted in place, the backing will allow drilling and tapping without dulling or breaking the installer’s bits.

5. Locations for conduit and raceways as needed for electrical, electronic and electro-pneumatic hardware items. Fire/life-safety system interfacing. Point-to-point wiring diagrams plus riser diagrams to related trades.

6. Coordinate: flush top rails of doors at outswinging exteriors, and throughout where adhesive-mounted seals occur.

7. Manufacturers’ templates to door and frame fabricators.

C. Check Shop Drawings for doors and entrances to confirm that adequate provisions will be made for proper hardware installation.

D. Environmental considerations: segregate unused recyclable paper and paper product packaging, uninstalled metals, and plastics, and have these sent to a recycling center.

1.

1.7 WARRANTY: A. Part of respective manufacturers’ regular terms of sale. Provide manufacturers’

written warranties.

B. Include factory order numbers with close-out documents warranty information:

C. Minimum warranties:


1. Locksets: Three years 2. Extra Heavy Duty Cylindrical Lock: Seven Years 3. Exit Devices: Three years mechanical

One year electrical 4. Closers: Thirty years mechanical

Two years electrical 5. Hinges: One year 6. Other Hardware Two years

1.8 COMMISSIONING: A. Conduct these tests prior to request for certificate of substantial completion:

1. With installer present, test door hardware operation with climate control system and stairwell pressurization system both at rest and while in full operation.

2. With installer, access control contractor and electrical contractor present, test electrical, electronic and electro-pneumatic hardware systems for satisfactory operation.

3. With installer and electrical contractor present, test hardware interfaced with fire/life-safety system for proper operation and release.


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS: A. Listed acceptable alternate manufacturers: these will be considered; submit for

review products with equivalent function and features of scheduled products.

ITEM: MANUFACTURER: ACCEPTABLE ALTERNATE:

Hinges (IVE) Ives Bommer

Continuous Hinges (IVE) Ives Select

Key System (SCH) Schlage Owner standard

Mechanical Locks (SCH) Schlage Owner standard

Exit Devices (VON) Von Duprin Owner standard

Closers (LCN) LCN Owner standard

Auto Flush Bolts (IVE) Ives DCI

Coordinators (IVE) Ives DCI

Silencers (IVE) Ives Rockwood, Trimco

Push & Pull Plates (IVE) Ives Rockwood, Trimco

Kickplates (IVE) Ives Rockwood, Trimco

Stops & Holders (IVE) Ives Rockwood, Trimco

Overhead Stops (GLY) Glynn-Johnson ABH

Thresholds (NGP) NGP Zero, Reese

Seals & Bottoms (NGP) NGP Zero, Reese

2.2 HINGING METHODS: A. Drawings typically depict doors at 90 degrees, doors will actually swing to

maximum allowable. Use wide-throw conventional or continuous hinges as needed up to 8 inches in width to allow door to stand parallel to wall for true 180-degree opening. Advise architect if 8-inch width is insufficient.

B. Conform to manufacturer’s published hinge selection standard for door dimensions, weight and frequency, and to hinge selection as scheduled. Where manufacturer’s standard exceeds the scheduled product, furnish the heavier of the two choices, notify Architect of deviation from scheduled hardware.

C. Conventional Hinges: Steel or stainless steel pins and approved bearings. Hinge open widths minimum, but of sufficient throw to permit maximum door swing.


1. Outswinging exterior doors: non-ferrous with non-removable (NRP) pins and security studs.

2. Non-ferrous material exteriors and at doors subject to corrosive atmospheric conditions.

D. Continuous Hinges: 1. Geared-type aluminum.

a) Use wide-throw units where needed for maximum degree of swing, advise architect if commonly available hinges are insufficient.

b) If units are used at storefront openings, color-coordinate hinge finish with storefront color. Custom anodizing and custom powdercoat finishes subject to Architect approval.

2.3 LOCKSETS, LATCHSETS, DEADBOLTS: A. Mortise Locksets and Latchsets: as scheduled.

1. Chassis: cold-rolled steel, handing field-changeable without disassembly. 2. Universal lock case – 10 functions in one case. 3. Floating mounting tabs automatically adjusts to fit a beveled door edge. 4. Latchbolts: 0.75 inch throw stainless steel anti-friction type. 5. Lever Trim: through-bolted, accessible design, cast lever or solid

extruded bar type levers as scheduled. Filled hollow tube design unacceptable.

a) Spindles: security design independent breakaway. Breakage of outside lever does not allow access to inside lever’s hubworks to gain wrongful entry.

b) Inside lever applied by screwless shank mounting – no exposed trim mount screws.

c) Levers rotate up or down for ease of use.

6. Furnish solid cylinder collars with wave springs. Wall of collar to cover rim of mortise cylinder.

7. Turnpieces: accessible offset turn-lever design not requiring pinching or twisting motions to operate.

8. Deadbolts: stainless steel 1-inch throw. 9. Electric operation: Manufacturer-installed continuous duty solenoid. 10. Strikes: 16 gage curved steel, bronze or brass with 1 inch deep box

construction, lips of sufficient length to clear trim and protect clothing. 11. Scheduled Lock Series and Design: Schlage L series, 12. Certifications:

a) ANSI A156.13, 1994, Grade 1 Operational, Grade 1 Security. b) ANSI/ASTM F476-84 Grade 31 UL Listed.

13. Accessibility: Require not more than 5 lb to retract the latchbolt or deadbolt, or both, per CBC 2013 11B-404.2.7 and 11B-309.4.

2.4 EXIT DEVICES / PANIC HARDWARE

A. General features: 1. Independent lab-tested 1,000,000 cycles.


2. Push-through push-pad design. No exposed push-pad fasteners, no exposed cavities when operated. Return stroke fluid dampeners and rubber bottoming dampeners, plus anti-rattle devices.

3. Deadlocking latchbolts, 0.75 inch projection. 4. End caps: impact-resistant, flush-mounted. No raised edges or lips to

catch carts or other equipment. 5. No exposed screws to show through glass doors. 6. Non-handed basic device design with center case interchangeable with

all functions, no extra parts required to effect change of function. 7. Releasable in normal operation with 15-pound maximum operating force

per UBC Standard 10-4, and with 32-pound maximum pressure under 250-pound load to the door.

8. Accessibility: Require not more than 5 lb to retract the latchbolt, per CBC 2013 11B-404.2.7 and 11B-309.4.

B. Specific features: 9. Lever Trim: breakaway type, forged brass or bronze escutcheon min. 0.130

inch thickness, compression spring drive, match lockset lever design. 10. Rod and latch guards with sloped full-width kickplates for doors fitted with

surface vertical rod devices with bottom latches. 11. Fire-Labeled Devices: UL label indicating “Fire Exit Hardware”. Vertical rod

devices less bottom rod (LBR) unless otherwise scheduled. 12. Electrically Operated Devices: Single manufacturer source for electric

latch retraction devices, electrically controlled trim, power transfers, power supplies, monitoring switches and controls.

2.6 CLOSERS

C. Surface Closers: 4040-XP

1. Full rack-and-pinion type cylinder with removable non-ferrous cover and cast iron body. Double heat-treated pinion shaft, single piece forged piston, chrome-silicon steel spring.

1. ISO 2000 certified. Units stamped with date-of-manufacture code. 2. Independent lab-tested 10,000,000 cycles. 3. Non-sized, non-handed, and adjustable. Place closer inside building,

stairs, and rooms. 4. Plates, brackets and special templating when needed for interface with

particular header, door and wall conditions and neighboring hardware. 5. Adjust doors to open with not more than 5.0-pounds pressure to open at

exterior doors and 5.0-pounds at interior doors. As allowed per 2013 California Building Code Section 11B-404.2.9, local authority may increase the allowable pressure for fire doors to achieve positive latching, but not to exceed 15-pounds.

a) Exception: exterior doors’ pressure-to-open may be increased to 8.5-pounds if: at a single location, and one of a bank of eight leafs or fraction of eight, and one leaf of this bank is fitted with a low- or high-energy operator.

6. Separate adjusting valves for closing speed, latching speed and backcheck, fourth valve for delayed action where scheduled.

7. Extra-duty arms (EDA) at exterior doors scheduled with parallel arm units. 8. Exterior door closers: tested to 100 hours of ASTM B117 salt spray test,

furnish data on request.


9. Exterior doors: seasonal adjustments not required for temperatures from 120 degrees F to -30 degrees F, furnish checking fluid data on request.

10. Non-flaming fluid, will not fuel door or floor covering fires. 11. Pressure Relief Valves (PRV) not permitted.

2.7 OTHER HARDWARE

A. Automatic Flush Bolts: Low operating force design.

B. Overhead Stops: Non-plastic mechanisms and finished metal end caps. Field-changeable hold-open, friction and stop-only functions.

C. Kick Plates: Four beveled edges, .050 inches minimum thickness, height and width as scheduled. Sheet-metal screws of bronze or stainless steel to match other hardware.

D. Door Stops: Provide stops to protect walls, casework or other hardware.

1. Unless otherwise noted in Hardware Sets, provide floor type with appropriate fasteners. Where floor type cannot be used, provide wall type. If neither can be used, provide overhead type.

2. Locate overhead stops for maximum possible opening. Consult with Owner for furniture locations. Minimum: 90deg stop / 95deg deadstop. Note degree of opening in submittal.

E. Automatic door bottoms: low operating force units. Doors with automatic door bottoms plus head and jamb seals cannot require more than two pounds operating force to open when closer is disconnected.

1. Include automatic type door bottoms, as opposed to fixed sweeps, at stairs and elevator lobbies to allow fine-tuning of pressurization systems.

F. Thresholds: As scheduled and per details. Comply with CBC 2013 11B-404.2.5. Substitute products: certify that the products equal or exceed specified material’s thickness. Proposed substitutions: submit for approval.

2. Saddle thresholds: 0.125 inches minimum thickness. 3. Exteriors: Seal perimeter to exclude water and vermin. Use sealant

complying with requirements in Division 7 "Thermal and Moisture Protection". Minimum 0.25 inch diameter fasteners and lead expansion shield anchors, or Red-Head #SFS-1420 (or approved equivalent) Flat Head Sleeve Anchors. National Guard Products’ “COMBO” or Pemko Manufacturing’s “FHSL”.

4. Fire-rated openings, 90-minutes or less duration: use thresholds to interrupt floor covering material under the door where that material has a critical radiant flux value less than 0.22 watts per square centimeter, per NFPA 253. Use threshold unit as scheduled. If none scheduled, include a 0.25in high 5in wide saddle in the bid, and request direction from Architect.

5. Fire-rated openings, 3-hour duration: Thresholds, where scheduled, to extend full jamb depth.

6. Acoustic openings: Set units in full bed of Division-7-compliant, leave no air space between threshold and substrate.

7. Plastic plugs with wood or sheet metal screws are not an acceptable substitute for specified fastening methods.


8. Fasteners: Generally, exposed screws to be Phillips or Robertson drive. Pinned TORX drive at high security areas. Flat head sleeve anchors (FHSL) may be slotted drive. Sheet metal and wood screws: full-thread. Sleeve nuts: full length to prevent door compression.

G. Through-bolts: Do not use. Coordinate with wood doors; ensure provision of proper blocking to support wood screws for mounting panic hardware and door closers. Coordinate with metal doors and frames; ensure provision of proper reinforcement to support machine screws for mounting panic hardware and door closers.

1. Exception: surface-mounted overhead stops, holders, and friction stays.

H. Silencers: Interior hollow metal frames, 3 for single doors, 4 for pairs of doors. Leave no unfilled/uncovered pre-punched silencer holes. Intent: door bears against silencers, seals make minimal contact with minimal compression – only enough to effect a seal.

2.8 FINISH: 1. Generally: BHMA 626 Satin Chromium Areas using BHMA 626: furnish

push-plates, pulls and protection plates of BHMA 630, Satin Stainless Steel, unless otherwise scheduled.

I. Door closers: factory powder coated to match other hardware, unless otherwise noted.

2.9 KEYING REQUIREMENTS: A. Key System: Schlage Everest Primus 29 high-security utility-patented keyway,

interchangeable core throughout. Utility patent protection to extend at least until 2029. Key blanks available only from factory-direct sources, not available from after-market keyblank manufacturers. For estimate use factory GMK charge. Initiate and conduct meeting(s) with Owner and Allegion representatives to determine system keyway(s), keybow styles, structure, stamping, degree of physical security and degree of geographic exclusivity. Furnish Owner’s written approval of the system; do not order keys or cylinders without written confirmation of actual requirements from the Owner. Contractor will install permanent cylinders/cores.

1. Factory-registered master key system. 2. Construction keying: furnish temporary keyed-alike cores. Remove at

substantial completion and install permanent cylinders/cores in Owner’s presence. Demonstrate that construction key no longer operates.

3. Temporary cylinders/cores remain supplier’s property. 4. Furnish 10 construction keys. 5. Furnish 2 construction control keys. 6. Key Cylinders: furnish 6-pin solid brass construction.

B. Cylinders/cores: keyed at factory of lock manufacturer where permanent records are maintained. Locksets and cylinders same manufacturer.

C. Permanent keys: use secured shipment direct from point of origination to Owner.

1. For estimate: 3 keys per change combination, 5 master keys per group, 5 grand-master keys, 3 control keys.

2. For estimate: VKC stamping plus “DO NOT DUPLICATE”.


D. Bitting List: use secured shipment direct from point of origination to Owner at completion.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 ACCEPTABLE INSTALLERS: A. Can read and understand manufacturers’ templates, suppliers’ hardware

schedule and printed installation instructions. Can readily distinguish drywall screws from manufacturers’ furnished fasteners. Available to meet with manufacturers’ representatives and related trades to discuss installation of hardware.

3.2 PREPARATION: A. Ensure that walls and frames are square and plumb before hardware installation.

Make corrections before commencing hardware installation. Installation denotes acceptance of wall/frame condition.

A. Locate hardware per SDI-100 and applicable building, fire, life-safety, accessibility, and security codes.

1. Notify Architect of code conflicts before ordering material. 1. Locate latching hardware between 34 inches to 44 inches above the

finished floor, per California Building Code, Section 1008.1.9.2 and 1133B.2.5.2.

2. Locate panic hardware between 36 inches to 44 inches above the finished floor.

3. Where new hardware is to be installed near existing doors/hardware scheduled to remain, match locations of existing hardware.

B. Overhead stops: before installing, determine proposed locations of furniture items, fixtures, and other items to be protected by the overhead stop's action.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install hardware per manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrate. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrate for proper installation and operation. Remove and reinstall or replace work deemed defective by Architect.

1. Gaskets: install jamb-applied gaskets before closers, overhead stops, rim strikes, etc; fasten hardware over and through these seals. Install sweeps across bottoms of doors before astragals, cope sweeps around bottom pivots, trim astragals to tops of sweeps.

2. When hardware is to be attached to existing metal surface and insufficient reinforcement exists, use RivNuts, NutSerts or similar anchoring device for screws.

3. Use manufacturers' fasteners furnished with hardware items, or submit Request for Substitution with Architect.

4. Replace fasteners damaged by power-driven tools.


B. Locate floor stops no more that 4 inches from walls and not within paths of travel. See paragraph 2.2 regarding hinge widths, door should be well clear of point of wall reveal. Point of door contact no closer to the hinge edge than half the door width. Where situation is questionable or difficult, contact Architect for direction.

C. Core concrete for exterior door stop anchors. Set anchors in approved non-shrink grout.

D. Locate overhead stops for minimum 90 degrees at rest and for maximum allowable degree of swing.

E. Drill pilot holes for fasteners in wood doors and/or frames.

F. Lubricate and adjust existing hardware scheduled to remain. Carefully remove and give to Owner items not scheduled for reuse.

3.4. ADJUSTING

A. Adjust and check for proper operation and function. Replace units, which cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly.

1. Hardware damaged by improper installation or adjustment methods: repair or replace to Owner’s satisfaction.

2. Adjust doors to fully latch with no more than 1 pound of pressure.

a) Door closer valves: turn valves clockwise until at bottom – do not force. Turn valves back out one and one-half turns and begin adjustment process from that point. Do not force valves beyond three full turns counterclockwise.

3. Adjust delayed-action closers on fire-rated doors to fully close from fully-opened position in no more than 10 seconds.

4. Adjust door closers per 1.9 this section.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION: A. Demonstrate mechanical hardware and electrical, electronic and pneumatic

hardware systems, including adjustment and maintenance procedures.

3.6 PROTECTION/CLEANING: A. Cover installed hardware, protect from paint, cleaning agents, weathering,

carts/barrows, etc. Remove covering materials and clean hardware just prior to substantial completion.

B. Clean adjacent wall, frame and door surfaces soiled from installation / reinstallation process.

3.7 SCHEDULE OF FINISH HARDWARE

A. See door schedule in drawings for hardware set assignments. HW SET: 04.1

3 EA HINGE 3CB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 630 IVE 1 EA PANIC HARDWARE AX-98-L-NL-17 626 VON 1 EA RIM CYLINDER 20-057-ICX 626 SCH 1 EA PRIMUS CORE 20-740 626 SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP HEDA 689 LCN


1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW 630 IVE 1 EA SECURITY FLOOR

STOP FS18S BLK IVE

1 SET SEALS 700SA CL NGP 1 EA DOOR BOTTOM 320N AL NGP 1 EA THRESHOLD PER DETAIL AL NGP 1 EA DOOR POSITION

SWITCH 679-05 HM SCE

INSTALL HEAD SEAL BEFORE CLOSER. HW SET: 04.2

1 EA CONTINUOUS HINGE 224HD TW8 628 IVE 1 EA EXIT DEVICE QEL-RX-98-NL/OP X L/OST 626 VON 1 EA PRIMUS CORE 20-740 626 SCH 1 EA OFFSET DOOR PULL 8190 10" CTOC 630 IVE 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP HEDA 689 LCN 1 EA THRESHOLD PER DETAIL AL NGP 1 EA POWER SUPPLY PS914 X 900-4RL FA SCE 1 EA DOOR POSITION


SEALS AND SWEEPS BY DOOR MANUFACTURER HW SET: 04.3

3 EA HINGE 3CB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 630 IVE 1 EA PANIC HARDWARE AX-98-L-NL-17 626 VON 1 EA ALARM KIT 98-ALK 628 VON 1 EA RIM CYLINDER 20-057-ICX 626 SCH 1 EA PRIMUS CORE 20-740 626 SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP HEDA 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW 630 IVE 1 EA SECURITY FLOOR

STOP FS18S BLK IVE

1 SET SEALS 700SA CL NGP 1 EA DOOR BOTTOM 320N AL NGP 1 EA THRESHOLD PER DETAIL AL NGP 1 EA DOOR POSITION


INSTALL HEAD SEAL BEFORE CLOSER. HW SET: 05.1

3 EA HINGE 3CB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 630 IVE


1 EA STOREROOM LOCK L9080T 17N 626 SCH 1 EA PRIMUS CORE 20-740 626 SCH 1 EA ELECTRIC STRIKE 6211 630 VON 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP HEDA 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW 630 IVE 1 EA SECURITY FLOOR

STOP FS18S BLK IVE

1 SET SEALS 700SA CL NGP 1 EA DOOR BOTTOM 320N AL NGP 1 EA THRESHOLD PER DETAIL AL NGP 1 EA VIEWER 60M132 - ULTRAVISION-A UHP 1 EA POWER SUPPLY PS902 SCE 1 EA DOOR POSITION


WHEN CREDENTIAL IS PRESENTED DOOR IS OPENABLE FROM THE OUTSIDE THEN RELOCKS AFTER ENTRY. FROM THE INSIDE, EGRESS IS ALWAYS FREE INSTALL HEAD SEAL BEFORE CLOSER. CARD READER/KEYPAD & WIRING PROVIDED IN SECURITY SECTION. DOOR BELL PROVIDED BY OTHERS. HW SET: 07

1 EA CONTINUOUS HINGE 224HD 628 IVE 1 EA CONTINUOUS HINGE 224HD TW8 628 IVE 1 EA PANIC HARDWARE AX-9847DT-996L-DT-LBL-17 626 VON 1 EA PANIC HARDWARE AX-9847L-E-996L-FSE-LBL-17 626 VON 1 EA RIM CYLINDER 20-057-ICX 626 SCH 1 EA PRIMUS CORE 20-740 626 SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP HEDA 689 LCN 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP SHCUSH 689 LCN 1 EA DOME STOP W/RISER FS436/438 AS REQ'D 626 IVE 1 SET DOOR SEALS PROVIDED BY DOOR MANUFACTURER 1 EA THRESHOLD PER DETAIL AL NGP 1 EA POWER SUPPLY PS902 SCE 2 EA DOOR POSITION


WHEN CREDENTIAL IS PRESENTED ACTIVE DOOR ONLY IS OPENABLE FROM THE OUTSIDE. IF SOFTWARE ALLOWS IT THE DOOR CAN BE TOGGLED TO STAY UNLOCKED FOR DESIGNATED TIME PERIODS. THE INACTIVE DOOR CAN BE MANUALLY DOGGED DOWN TO BECOME PUSH/PULL WHEN NEEDED. FROM INSIDE EGRESS IS ALWAYS FREE ON BOTH LEAVES HW SET: 08

3 EA HINGE 3CB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK L9080T 17N 626 SCH 1 EA PRIMUS CORE 20-740 626 SCH


1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP H 689 LCN 1 EA DOME STOP W/RISER FS436/438 AS REQ'D 626 IVE 1 EA THRESHOLD PER DETAIL AL NGP 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE

HW SET: 08.1

3 EA HINGE 3CB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK L9080T 17N 626 SCH 1 EA PRIMUS CORE 20-740 626 SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW 630 IVE 1 EA DOME STOP W/RISER FS436/438 AS REQ'D 626 IVE 1 SET SEALS 5050B BRN NGP 1 EA THRESHOLD PER DETAIL AL NGP

HW SET: 11

6 EA HINGE 3CB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 630 IVE 1 SET CONST LATCHING

BOLT FB51P 630 IVE

1 EA DUST PROOF STRIKE DP2 626 IVE 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK L9080T 17N 626 SCH 1 EA PRIMUS CORE 20-740 626 SCH 2 EA COORDINATOR COR X COMPLETE 628 IVE 1 EA ASTRAGAL 158NA CL NGP 2 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP H 689 LCN 2 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 1" LDW 630 IVE 2 EA DOME STOP W/RISER FS436/438 AS REQ'D 626 IVE 1 EA THRESHOLD PER DETAIL AL NGP 6 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE

HW SET: 13

3 EA HINGE 3CB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK L9070T 17N 626 SCH 1 EA PRIMUS CORE 20-740 626 SCH 1 EA ELECTRIC STRIKE 6211 630 VON 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP H 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW 630 IVE 1 EA MOP PLATE 8400 4" X 1" LDW 630 IVE 1 EA DOME STOP W/RISER FS436/438 AS REQ'D 626 IVE 1 SET SEALS 5050B BRN NGP 1 EA POWER SUPPLY PS902 SCE 1 EA BUTTON MINI BOX 660-PB SCE

DOOR ALWAYS LOCKED UNLESS RELEASED BY PUSH BUTTON OR MANUALLY UNLOCKED WITH A KEY. FROM INSIDE EGRESS IS ALWAYS FREE WIRING TO REFERENCE DESK AND MAIN CIRCULATION BY OTHERS LOCATION OF PUSH BUTTON TO BE DETERMINED BY OWNER


HW SET: 13.1

3 EA HINGE 3CB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA INDICATOR LOCK L9486T 17A L583-363 09-611 626 SCH 1 EA PRIMUS CORE 20-740 626 SCH 1 EA ELECTRIC STRIKE 6216 630 VON 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP H 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW 630 IVE 1 EA MOP PLATE 8400 4" X 1" LDW 630 IVE 1 EA DOME STOP W/RISER FS436/438 AS REQ'D 626 IVE 1 SET SEALS 5050B BRN NGP 1 EA POWER SUPPLY PS902 SCE 1 EA BUTTON MINI BOX 660-PB SCE

DOOR ALWAYS LOCKED UNLESS RELEASED BY PUSH BUTTON OR MANUALLY UNLOCKED WITH A KEY. FROM INSIDE EGRESS IS ALWAYS FREE WIRING TO REFERENCE DESK AND MAIN CIRCULATION BY OTHERS LOCATION OF PUSH BUTTON TO BE DETERMINED BY OWNER HW SET: 14

3 EA HINGE 3CB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA PRIVACY SET L9040 17N L583-363 626 SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW 630 IVE 1 EA MOP PLATE 8400 4" X 1" LDW 630 IVE 1 EA DOME STOP W/RISER FS436/438 AS REQ'D 626 IVE 1 EA THRESHOLD PER DETAIL AL NGP 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE

HW SET: 16.1

2 EA HINGE 3CB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA ELECTRIC HINGE 3CB1 4.5 X 4 TW4 652 IVE 1 EA EU STOREROOM

LOCK L9080TEU 17N 626 SCH

1 EA PRIMUS CORE 20-740 626 SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP H 689 LCN 1 EA DOME STOP W/RISER FS436/438 AS REQ'D 626 IVE 1 EA THRESHOLD PER DETAIL AL NGP 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE 1 EA POWER SUPPLY PS902 SCE

CARD READER/KEYPAD & WIRING PROVIDED IN SECURITY SECTION. HW SET: 16.2

1 EA CONTINUOUS HINGE 224HD 628 IVE 1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK L9070T 17N 626 SCH


1 EA PRIMUS CORE 20-740 626 SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP HW/PA 689 LCN 1 EA DOME STOP W/RISER FS436/438 AS REQ'D 626 IVE 1 EA THRESHOLD PER DETAIL AL NGP

HW SET: 16.3

1 EA CONTINUOUS HINGE 224HD 628 IVE 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK L9080T 17N 626 SCH 1 EA PRIMUS CORE 20-740 626 SCH 1 EA ELECTRIC STRIKE 6211AL 630 VON 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP HW/PA 689 LCN 1 EA DOME STOP W/RISER FS436/438 AS REQ'D 626 IVE 1 EA THRESHOLD PER DETAIL AL NGP 1 EA POWER SUPPLY PS902 SCE 1 EA DOOR POSITION


CARD READER/KEYPAD & WIRING PROVIDED IN SECURITY SECTION. DOOR BELL BY OTHERS HW SET: 17

3 EA HINGE 3CB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA OFFICE LOCK L9050T 17N L583-363 626 SCH 1 EA PRIMUS CORE 20-740 626 SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP HW/PA 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW 630 IVE 1 EA DOME STOP W/RISER FS436/438 AS REQ'D 626 IVE 1 EA THRESHOLD PER DETAIL AL NGP

HW SET: 18

3 EA HINGE 3CB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA PANIC HARDWARE AX-98-L-NL-F-17 626 VON 1 EA ALARM KIT 98-ALK 628 VON 1 EA RIM CYLINDER 20-057-ICX 626 SCH 1 EA IC MORTISE

CYLINDER 30-008 FOR ALARM 626 SCH

2 EA PRIMUS CORE 20-740 626 SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW 630 IVE 1 EA DOME STOP W/RISER FS436/438 AS REQ'D 626 IVE 1 SET SEALS 5050B BRN NGP

HW SET: 19

2 EA CONTINUOUS HINGE 224HD 628 IVE 1 SET CONST LATCHING

BOLT FB51P 630 IVE

1 EA DUST PROOF STRIKE DP2 626 IVE


1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK L9070T 17N 626 SCH 1 EA PRIMUS CORE 20-740 626 SCH 2 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP H 689 LCN 2 EA DOME STOP W/RISER FS436/438 AS REQ'D 626 IVE

HW SET: 22

2 EA MORTISE CYLINDER 20-059-ICX OR AS REQ'D 626 SCH 2 EA PRIMUS CORE 20-740 626 SCH

BALANCE OF HARDWARE BY DOOR SUPPLIER HW SET: 24 NOTE EXISTING TO REMAIN B/O

END OF SECTION

LA MIRADA LIBRARY WINDOW SHADES 12527-1

SECTION 12527

ROLLER SHADES PART I GENERAL 1.0 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Manually operated sunscreen roller shades. B. Manually operated room-darkening shades.

C. Electrically operated room-darkening shades. D. Local group and master control system for shade operation with addressable motors.

1.1 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Division 6 – Miscellaneous Carpentry: Wood blocking and grounds for mounting roller

shades and accessories. B. Division 9 - Gypsum Board Systems: Coordination with gypsum board assemblies for

installation of shade pockets, closures and related accessories. C. Division 9 - Acoustical Panel Ceilings: Coordination with acoustical ceiling systems for

installation of shade pockets, closures and related accessories. D. Division 16 - Electrical: Electric service for motor controls.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASTM G 21 - Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric Materials

to Fungi. B. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. C. NFPA 701-99 - Fire Tests for Flame-Resistant Textiles and Films.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300.

B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:

1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Styles, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components, profiles, features,

finishes and operating instructions. 3. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 4. Mounting details and installation methods. 5. Typical wiring diagrams including integration of motor controllers with building

management system, audiovisual and lighting control systems as applicable.

C. Shop Drawings: Plans, elevations, sections, product details, installation details, operational clearances, wiring diagrams and relationship to adjacent work. 1. Prepare shop drawings on Autocad or Microstation format using base sheets provided

electronically by the Architect. 2. Indicate handedness of chain pulls for manual shades and motor locations for

motorized shades.


D. Window Treatment Schedule: For all roller shades. Use same room designations as

indicated on the Drawings and include opening sizes and key to typical mounting details.

E. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, one set of shade cloth options and aluminum finish color samples representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns. Submittal of shadecloth only, without manufacturer and hardware product data, shall not be acceptable.

F. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, one complete set of shade

components, unassembled, demonstrating compliance with specified requirements. Shadecloth sample and aluminum finish sample as selected. Mark face of material to indicate interior faces.

G. Maintenance Data: Methods for maintaining roller shades, precautions regarding cleaning

materials and methods, instructions for operating hardware and controls. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Obtain roller shades through one source from a single

manufacturer with a minimum of twenty years experience in manufacturing products comparable to those specified in this section.

B. Installer Qualifications: Installer trained and certified by the manufacturer with a minimum of

ten years experience in installing products comparable to those specified in this section. C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Passes NFPA 701-99 small and large-scale vertical

burn. Materials tested shall be identical to products proposed for use. D. Electrical Components: NFPA Article 100 listed and labeled by either UL or ETL or other

testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, marked for intended use, and tested as a system. Individual testing of components will not be acceptable in lieu of system testing.

E. Anti-Microbial Characteristics: 'No Growth' per ASTM G 21 results for fungi ATCC9642,

ATCC 9644, ATCC9645. F. Shade cloth to “pass” indoor Air Quality / VOC Testing as per ASTM D 5116-97 and ASTM D

6670-01, USEPA – ETV (U.S. Environmental Protection Agency’s Environmental Technology Verification Protocol).

G. Use only injection-molded Delrin engineered plastics by Dupont for all plastic components of

shade hardware. Styrene based, PVC, or glass reinforced polyester thermo polymer plastics are not acceptable.

H. Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up (manual shades only) of one roller shade assembly for

evaluation of mounting, appearance and accessories. 1. Locate mock-up in window designated by Architect. 2. Do not proceed with remaining work until, mock-up is accepted by Architect.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver shades in factory-labeled packages, marked with manufacturer and product name,

fire-test-response characteristics, and location of installation using same room designations indicated on Drawings and in the Window Treatment Schedule.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS


A. Environmental Limitations: Install roller shades after finish work including painting is

complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Roller Shade Hardware, Chain and Shadecloth: Manufacturer's standard non-depreciating,

fit-for-use 25-year limited warranty. Warranty to transfer to owner upon completion of installation.

B. Roller Shade Motors and Motor Control Systems: Manufacturer's standard non-depreciating

5-year warranty. C. Roller Shade Installation: One year from date of Substantial Completion, not including

scaffolding, lifts or other means to reach inaccessible areas. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.0 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturer, as basis of design, performance and warranty: MechoSystems,

Inc.; www.mechosystems.com, as represented by ARCHITYPE, Tel: (310) 652-2263. Fax: (310) 652-2264, Contact: Jean-Guy Poitras. Email: [email protected], [email protected].

B. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Division 01. C. Alternates products and manufacturers may be bid as an alternate product in accordance

with Division 01. Any pricing for alternate products shall be listed separately from the base bid specified product. Any alternate pricing must include line-by-line compliance or non-compliance with the specifications. If the alternate product is acceptable to the Architect, the specified manufacturer will be given the opportunity to provide an equivalent proposal.

2.1 APPLICATIONS/SCOPE

A. Roller Shade Schedule:

1. Shade Type 1: Manual operating, chain drive, blackout roller shades at specified doors of rooms and spaces shown on the Drawings. Shades to be wall-mounted with fascia and fascia end caps.

2. Shade Type 2: Manual operating, chain drive, 3% open solar roller shades at specified exterior windows and doors of rooms and spaces shown on the Drawings. Shades to be wall-mounted with fascia and fascia end caps.

3. Shade Type 4: Motorized interior Room darkening blackout roller shades at specified windows of rooms and spaces shown on Drawings, and related motor control systems. Shades to be surface-mounted with fascia, and fascia end caps where required.

2.2 SHADE CLOTH

A. Visually Transparent Single-Fabric Shadecloth: MechoShade Systems, Inc., ThermoVeil

group, single thickness non-raveling 0.030-inch (0.762 mm) thick vinyl fabric, woven from 0.018-inch (0.457 mm) diameter extruded vinyl yarn comprising of 21 percent polyester and 79 percent reinforced vinyl, in colors selected from manufacturer's available range. 1. Dense Basket Weave: "1500 series", 3 percent open, 2 by 2 dense basket-weave

pattern.


2. Dense Basket Weave: "1500 series", 0-1 percent open, 2 by 2 dense basket-weave pattern.

3. Color: Selected from manufacturer's standard colors.

B. Vinyl Room Darkening Shadecloth (Single-Fabric): MechoShade Systems, Inc., "0700 series", blackout material, washable and colorfast laminated and embossed vinyl coated fabric, 0.012 inches thick (0.30 mm) blackout material and weighing 0.81 lbs. per square yard, with a minimum of 62 threads per square inch in colors selected from manufacturer's available range. 1. Color: Selected from manufacturer's standard colors.

2.3 SHADE BAND

A. Shade Bands: Construction of shade band includes the fabric, the hem weight, hem-pocket,

shade roller tube, and the attachment of the shade band to the roller tube. Sewn hems and open hem pockets are not acceptable. 1. Hem Pockets and Hem Weights: Fabric hem pocket with RF-welded seams

(including welded ends) and concealed hem weights. Hem weights shall be of appropriate size and weight for shade band. Hem weight shall be continuous inside a sealed hem pocket. Hem pocket construction and hem weights shall be similar, for all shades within one room.

2. Shade band and Shade Roller Attachment: a. Use extruded aluminum shade roller tube of a diameter and wall thickness

required to support shade fabric without excessive deflection. Roller tubes less than 1.55 inch (39.37 mm) in diameter for manual shades, and less than 2.55 inches (64.77 mm) for motorize shades are not acceptable.

b. Provide for positive mechanical engagement with drive / brake mechanism. c. Provide for positive mechanical attachment of shade band to roller tube; shade

band shall be made removable / replaceable with a "snap-on" snap-off" spline mounting, without having to remove shade roller from shade brackets.

d. Mounting spline shall not require use of adhesives, adhesive tapes, staples, and/or rivets.

e. Any method of attaching shade band to roller tube that requires the use of: adhesive, adhesive tapes, staples, and/or rivets are not acceptable.

2.4 SHADE FABRICATION

A. Fabricate units to completely fill existing openings from head to sill and jamb-to-jamb, unless

specifically indicated otherwise. B. Fabricate shadecloth to hang flat without buckling or distortion. Fabricate with heat-sealed

trimmed edges to hang straight without curling or raveling. Fabricate unguided shadecloth to roll true and straight without shifting sideways more than 1/8 inch (3.18 mm) in either direction per 8 feet (2438 mm) of shade height due to warp distortion or weave design. Fabricate hem as follows: 1. Bottom hem weights at top-down shades. 2. Exposed hemtube at bottom-up shades.

C. Provide battens in standard shades as required to assure proper tracking and uniform rolling

of the shadebands. Contractor shall be responsible for assuring the width-to-height (W:H) ratios shall not exceed manufacturer's standards or, in absence of such standards, shall be responsible for establishing appropriate standards to assure proper tracking and rolling of the shadecloth within specified standards. Battens shall be roll-formed stainless steel or tempered steel, as required.

D. For railroaded shadebands, provide seams in railroaded multi-width shadebands as required

to meet size requirements and in accordance with seam alignment as acceptable to


Architect. Seams shall be properly located. Furnish battens in place of plain seams when the width, height, or weight of the shade exceeds manufacturer's standards. In absence of such standards, assure proper use of seams or battens as required to, and assure the proper tracking of the railroaded multi-width shadebands.

E. Provide battens for railroaded shades when width-to-height (W:H) ratios meet or exceed

manufacturer's standards. In absence of manufacturer's standards, be responsible for proper use and placement of battens to assure proper tracking and roll of shadebands.

F. Blackout shadebands, when used in side channels, shall have horizontally-mounted, roll-

formed stainless steel or tempered-steel battens not more than 3 feet (115 mm) on center extending fully into the side channels. Battens shall be concealed in a integrally-colored fabric to match the inside and outside colors of the shadeband, in accordance with manufacturer's published standards for spacing and requirements. 1. Battens shall be roll formed of stainless steel or tempered steel and concave to match

the contour of the roller tube. 2. Batten pockets shall be self-colored fabric front and back RF welded into the

shadecloth. A self-color opaque liner shall be provided front and back to eliminate any see through of the batten pocket that shall not exceed 1-1/2 inches (38.1 mm) high and be totally opaque. A see-through moiré effect, which occurs with multiple layers of transparent fabrics, shall not be acceptable.

2.5 COMPONENTS

A. Access and Material Requirements:

1. Provide shade hardware allowing for the removal of shade roller tube from brackets without removing hardware from opening and without requiring end or center supports to be removed.

2. Provide shade hardware that allows for removal and re-mounting of the shade bands without having to remove the shade tube, drive or operating support brackets.

3. Use only Delrin engineered plastics by DuPont for all plastic components of shade hardware. Styrene based plastics, and /or polyester, or reinforced polyester will not be acceptable.

B. Motorized Shade Hardware and Shade Brackets:

1. Provide shade hardware constructed of minimum 1/8-inch (3.18 mm) thick plated steel, or heavier, thicker, as required to support 150 percent of the full weight of each shade.

2. Provide shade hardware system that allows for field adjustment of motor or replacement of any operable hardware component without requiring removal of brackets, regardless of mounting position (inside, or outside mount).

3. Provide shade hardware system that allows for operation of multiple shade bands offset by a maximum of 8-45 degrees from the motor axis between shade bands (4-22.5 degrees) on each side of the radial line, by a single shade motor (multi-banded shade, subject to manufacturer’s design criteria).

C. Manual Operated Chain Drive Hardware and Brackets:

1. Provide for universal, regular and offset drive capacity, allowing drive chain to fall at front, rear or non-offset for all shade drive end brackets. Universal offset shall be adjustable for future change.

2. Provide hardware capable for installation of a removable fascia, for both regular and/or reverse roll, which shall be installed without exposed fastening devices of any kind.

3. Provide shade hardware system that allows for removable regular and/or reverse roll fascias to be mounted continuously across two or more shade bands without requiring exposed fasteners of any kind.


4. Provide shade hardware system that allows for operation of multiple shade bands (multi-banded shades) by a single chain operator, subject to manufacturer’s design criteria. Connectors shall be offset to assure alignment from the first to the last shade band.

5. Provide shade hardware system that allows multi-banded manually operated shades to be capable of smooth operation when the axis is offset a maximum of 6 degrees on each side of the plane perpendicular to the radial line of the curve, for a 12 degrees total offset.

6. Provide positive mechanical engagement of drive mechanism to shade roller tube. Friction fit connectors for drive mechanism connection to shade roller tube are not acceptable

7. Provide shade hardware constructed of minimum 1/8-inch (3.18 mm) thick plated steel or heavier as required to support 150 percent of the full weight of each shade.

8. Drive Bracket / Brake Assembly: a. MechoShade Drive Bracket model M5 shall be fully integrated with all

MechoShade accessories, including, but not limited to: SnapLoc fascia, room darkening side / sill channels, center supports and connectors for multi-banded shades.

b. M5 drive sprocket and brake assembly shall rotate and be supported on a welded 3/8 inch (9.525 mm) steel pin.

c. The brake shall be an over -running clutch design which disengages to 90 percent during the raising and lowering of a shade. The brake shall withstand a pull force of 50 lbs. (22 kg) in the stopped position.

d. The braking mechanism shall be applied to an oil-impregnated hub on to which the brake system is mounted. The oil impregnated hub design includes an articulated brake assembly, which assures a smooth, non-jerky operation in raising and lowering the shades. The assembly shall be permanently lubricated. Products that require externally applied lubrication and or not permanently lubricated are not acceptable.

e. The entire M5 assembly shall be fully mounted on the steel support bracket, and fully independent of the shade tube assembly, which may be removed and reinstalled without effecting the roller shade limit adjustments.

D. Drive Chain: #10 qualified stainless steel chain rated to 90 lb. (41 kg) minimum breaking

strength. Nickel plate chain shall not be accepted.

2.6 AUTOMATED DAYLIGHTING SOLAR TRACKING SHADE CONTROL SYSTEM A. Solar schedule and Sky Modeling System shall be based on approved scientific solar

algorithms, which shall calculate the following for up to 8 solar control zones per SunDialer under considerations in the building from sunrise to sunset, 52 weeks per year, as follows:

1. Incident angle on every zone. 2. Profile angle on every zone. 3. Direct radiation on every zone. 4. Diffuse radiation on every zone. 5. Surface azimuth. 6. Solar surface azimuth. 7. Window geometry / profile. 8. Geometry of the solar ray and window geometry to determine solar penetration. 9. Adjustment by solar penetration. 10. Geometry of the solar ray, window geometry, and allowable solar penetration calculated to

determine incremental shade position. a. An algorithm integrated with the Solar Radometers to provide in real time, a

microclimatic sky condition for the project, 24/7, which shall be the basis of determining a clear, cloudy or overcast sky condition.


b. The system will then adjust the shades incrementally on the window to provide protection from direct solar radiation while maximizing view and daylighting for the project.

11. Sky modeling and evaluation for clear and cloudy, sky condition utilizing radiometers which measure total solar spectrum (uv, ir visible light).

12. Sky modeling algorithms utilizing the instantaneous, real time total solar data to determine sky condition. a. Control System shall adjust the shade position to maximize energy management,

view and personal comfort based on micro-climactic conditions. b. The goal is to maximize view without Thermal or Visual discomfort through:

1) Thermal Comfort as assured by Solar Tracking c. Control Modules: Control system shall be capable of optimizing the position of the

shades (incrementally), to continuously deploy the shades in response to changes in Proactive requirements: 1) Solar Tracking Module – Base Control System, Thermal Comfort:

a) Proactive Algorithms (Primary): (i) Sun angle. (ii) Solar intensity – Total Light Spectrum.

b) Reactive Algorithms: Real-time sky conditions via roof mounted radiometers. d. Incremental Positioning:

1) Shades shall be capable of being aligned at up to 256 Positions. 2) The Control System shall be capable of staggering the operation of shade

motors to assure balanced loading of the electrical system. e. Continuous Operation:

1) 24 hours per day, 7 days per week, 365-1/4 days per year.

C. Override: Control Software shall incorporate an Override Event Scheduler such that the

building Owner may customize position of shades by motor, group, zone or whole building for any event, night or weekend requirements 1. Manual Override:

a. Wall Switches. b. Virtual Shade Control Switch (via IP).

2.7 INTELLIGENT ENCODED SHADE MOTOR DRIVE SYSTEM

A. Shade Motors: 1. Quiet [44 – 46 db] Intelligent Encoded Motor and Control System: Tubular, asynchronous

(non-synchronous) motors, with built-in reversible capacitor operating at 110v AC (60hz), (230v/50 hz AC) single phase, temperature Class A, thermally protected, totally enclosed, maintenance free with line voltage power supply equipped with locking disconnect plug assembly furnished with each motor.

2. Conceal motors inside shade roller tube. 3. Maximum current draw for each shade motor of 2.3 amps @ 110 V (.9 amps @230 V AC). 4. Use motors rated at the same nominal speed for all shades in the same room.

B. Total hanging weight of shade band shall not exceed 80 percent of the rated lifting capacity of

the shade motor and tube assembly. Spring assisted lift systems shall not be accepted.

C. Quiet Intelligent Encoded Motor System (software, two-way communication): Specifications and design are based on the Intelligent Motor Control System / WhisperShade-IQ™ Motor System) as manufactured by MechoShade Systems, Inc. Other systems may be acceptable providing all of the following performance capabilities are provided. Motor control systems not in complete compliance with these performance criteria shall not be accepted as equal systems.

1. Quiet operation of up to 46dBa within 3’ feet, open air. 2. Upper and lower stopping points (operating limits) of shade bands shall be

programmed into motors via a hand held removable program module / configurator.


3. Intermediate stopping positions for shades shall allow for up to three (3) repeatable and precise aligned positions.

4. Up to 103 available alignment points including 3-user programmable predefined intermediate positions, for a total of 5-defined and aligned positions. All shades on the same switch circuit with the same opening height shall align at each intermediate stopping position.

5. Two inherent methods of control: a. Cost effective, low voltage, hardwired dry-contact for local switch or 3rd party

control operation. b. Expandable to 2-way communication network with IQ/485-NI to support whole

building low-voltage control and integration. 6. Alternate: Mecho-RF™ via Zigby™ wireless mesh, network communication available

to reduce low voltage wiring and field labor associated costs. 7. Uniform or Regular Modes of Operation:

a. Uniform mode shall allow for shades to only move to intermediate stop positions.

b. Regular mode shall allow for shades to move to both intermediate stop positions, plus any position desired between the upper and lower limits as set by the installer.

8. Wall Switches: a. IQ-Switch: in 5 or 10 button, single gang, low voltage.

9. Expandable IQ-485-NI: Available when addressability of each motor or group of motors are required to be on a two-way addressable communication network for whole building or overlapping multi-level control. System Features include:

10. a. 5 @ IQ, Local or Master ports b. 1 @ Photocell input for automated control of shades c. 1 @ IR Eye Input for wireless remote control of shades d. Software Addressable IQ Ports support Multi-Level control with 8 addresses per

port e. IQ-485 MS Bus, 485 shall allow up to 65000 addresses controlling up to

500,000 motors per network f. Shall allow for variety of switch and other user interface options including RF

and Ethernet (IP) g. Shall support 3rd party control integration via RS232 and Ethernet (IP)

10. Provide wall switches:

a. Conference Center: Shades shall be operated by a 4 and 8 button low voltage standard switches or programmable intelligent switches [IS]. Standard switch shall be wired to a bus interface and the bus interface will be programmed to transmit an address for the local switch.

b. Intelligent switches may be installed anywhere on the busline. Each IS shall be capable of storing one control level address to be broadcast along the busline.

c. An address that is transmitted by either a switch or central controller shall be responded to by those motors with the same address in their control table.

d. IS shall provide for interface with other low voltage input devices via a set of dry contact terminals located on the switch.

e. Standard switch or IS may control an individual, sub-group or group of motors in accordance with the address in each motor.

2.8 ACCESSORIES

A. Roller Shade Pocket for recessed mounting in acoustical tile, or drywall ceilings as indicated

on the Drawings.


1. Provide either extruded aluminum and or formed steel shade pocket, sized to accommodate roller shades, with exposed extruded aluminum closure mount, tile support and removable closure panel to provide access to shades.

B. Fascia:

1. Continuous removable extruded aluminum fascia that attaches to shade mounting brackets without the use of adhesives, magnetic strips, or exposed fasteners.

2. Fascia shall be able to be installed across two or more shade bands in one piece. 3. Fascia shall fully conceal brackets, shade roller and fabric on the tube. 4. Provide bracket / fascia end caps where mounting conditions expose outside of roller

shade brackets. 5. Notching of Fascia for manual chain shall not be acceptable.

PART 3 EXECUTION 2.9 EXAMINATION

A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.

B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.

3.0 PREPARATION

C. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.

D. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install roller shades level, plumb, square, and true according to manufacturer's written

instructions, and located so shade band is not closer than 2 inches (50 mm) to interior face of glass. Allow proper clearances for window operation hardware.

B. Adjust and balance roller shades to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free from binding or

malfunction throughout entire operational range.

C. Clean roller shade surfaces after installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Engage Installer to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate and maintain

roller shade systems. 3.2 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products until completion of project.

B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

LA MIRADA LIBRARY TECHNOLOGY EQUIPMENT 16810-1

SECTION 16810

TECHNOLOGY EQUIPMENT

CONTRACTOR SHALL REFERENCE COUNTY OF LOS ANGELES INTERNAL SERVICES DEPARTMENT COMMUNICATIONS/LOW-VOLTAGE SPECIFICATIONS, DATED 8/10/15, FOR ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS

1. PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Refer to Specification Section 16800 for additional requirements

2. PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A. All materials and equipment shall be new, unused and manufactured within eighteen months prior to installation. Where applicable, all materials and equipment shall be listed by Underwrit-ers Laboratories.

2.2 VIDEO DISPLAYS

A. System Description and Installation Requirement

B. The intent of the video displays are to display the selected video system (MATV,SATV, or CATV) programming and blu-ray programming on wall mounted televisions. The video display unit shall consist of a television with built in blu-ray player and television wall mount bracket. The video display unit shall also include a satellite TV receiver or CATV receiver box as re-quired. The television shall be securely mounted and fastened to the wall mount bracket. The satellite receiver and CATV receiver box shall be installed in a bracket below the television.

C. The video displays shall be installed on the wall in the Staff Lounge, Adoption Lobby, and Manager's Office. The walls shall be reinforced to provide additional wall support for the video display units. The video display units shall be mounted at a height above the finished floor meeting ADA height requirements.

D. TV outlets shall be installed in the Staff Lounge, Adoption Lobby, Manager's Office and as indicated on plans. TV outlets shall also be installed in locations as shown on the plans. TV outlets shall be connected to the selected video system (MAN, SAN or CATV). The TV outlets shall be installed a flush mount single gang box with a TV outlet faceplate. A 3/4" inch conduit shall be installed from the TV outlet box and stubbed above the accessible ceiling area. The TV outlets shall be installed next to the video display units.

E. A double duplex 120VAC electrical outlet shall be installed next to each TV outlet. The electrical outlet shall be flush mounted in the wall.


F. Materials and Equipment a. Study room displays – Epson Brightlink projector with wall mount 485Wi b. Study room projection screen wall paint – Screen Goo c. Study room white board wall paint – Idea Paint d. Teen area display TV – 55” minimum, 1080p, 120Hz, back lit LED TV. Samsung 8000 series, Sharp Aquos with Quattron Series e. Teen area TV wall mount - Peerless ST670 f. Wall mounted control unit – Crestron MPC-M10 g. VGA w/Audio and HDMI wall plates – Crestron, Extron h. VGA w/Audio, HDMI, RS232 cables – Crestron, Extron, C2G i. TV Wall plate – Panduit CFPL3BY j. F connector module – Panduit CMFSRIWY k. Cat 6 Module (CJ688TGOR) l. Blank Module – Panduit CMBWH-Y m. Story time display – 55” minimum, 1080p, 120Hz, back lit LED TV. Samsung 8000 series, Sharp Aquos with Quattron Series n. Story time display TV cart w/metal shelf – Peerless SR560M o. Streaming media player – Apple TV and Apple Air p. Blu-ray player – Sony, Samsung q. Surge suppressor – Tripplite AV2FP r. Miscellaneous materials – All materials necessary to furnish and install a complete and fully functional system.

2.3 VOICE COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM

1. The Communications Contractor shall provide project specific and appropriately sized APC UPS systems to support installed data switches and phones for up to four (4) hours. The system shall include environmental monitoring via AP9631. The ISD Project Manager shall provide and approve all UPS specifications. No deviations shall be allowed. Below are the current acceptable APC UPS model, part numbers and acces-sories required. If the UPS model below is discontinued, please consult with ISD Project Manager.

1) APC Smart-UPS RT 3000VA Rack/Tower – SURTA3000RMXL3U (qty 1)

2) APC UPS Network Management Card 2 with Environmental Monitoring – AP9631 (qty 1)

3) APC Smart-UPS RT 192RM Battery Pack – SURT192RMXLBP3U

(qty 4**)

4) APC Rack PDU, Basic 1U - AP9563 (qty 1)

5) The LAN shall consist of 10/100/1000Mbps switching infrastructure. The Contractor shall be responsible for all installation and configuration of Cisco equipment including but not limited to catalyst 10S, IP, VLAN, sub-nets, routes, etc. The Cisco equipment, software, and configurations installed must be compatible with the existing LA County network architecture, and network management software and hardware. To prevent DHCP servers from trunking to the voice VLANs, a VTP domain password shall be configured on ALL LAN switches.

6) The Contractor shall work with the ISD Project Manager to determine tasks required to migrate users from any existing environment to Cisco based Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) network.


13. The Communications Contractor shall furnish and install Cisco Power over Ethernet (PoE) enabled switches and components (as listed below) and as per quantity specified by the DBT's design and confirmed by ISD Project Manager to support the the Owner’s port requirements:

Quantity SKU Description4 WS-C3850-48U-S CiscoCatalyst385048PortUPOEIPBase4 CON-SNT-WS3548US SMARTNET8X5XNBDCiscoCatalyst38508 CAB-TA-NA NorthAmericaACTypeAPowerCable

4 PWR-C1-1100WAC/21100WACConfig1SecondaryPowerSupply

4 S3850UK9-37E CAT3850Universalk9image4 STACK-T1-50CM 50CMType1StackingCable

4 CAB-SPWR-30CMCatalyst3750Xand3850StackPowerCable30CM

4 PWR-C1-1100WAC 1100WACConfig1PowerSupply

2.6 AUDIO — VISUAL SYSTEMS

A. Conference (Meeting) Room

B. The intent of the Conference Room Audio/Video systems shall be to provide a multipurpose audio/video system to be used for meetings and presentations. The Conference room shall have data/video projection system, projection screen, and be integrated with the video confer-encing system. The Conference room audio/video system shall be controlled by a main controller unit.

C. The Conference room shall have an Audio/Video control room (closet) directly adjacent to the Conference room with accessibility from the Conference room. The audio/video control room shall be a minimum of 8'W x 10' D with 9' ceiling. The audio/video control room shall have Air-conditioning at all times. The specifications for air conditioning, electrical, fire protection, flooring, lighting and grounding for the Telecommunications Rooms shall also be applicable to the audio/video control room.

D. Lighting controls for the Conference room shall be installed in the Conference room. The light controls shall be able to raise and dim the light levels and also to be able to turn the lights on and off. A lighting control unit shall be installed for each zone of lighting.

E. Data/Video Projection

1. Description and Installation Requirements

2. The data/video projection system shall project the data and video signals from the signal source to the video projection screen located at the front of the conference room. The data/video projection system shall consist of a video projector and ceiling projector mount. The projector and projector mount shall be securely mounted and earthquake braced. The projector shall have a native resolution of 1080p.

3. If the height of the finished ceiling is at 9 feet above finished floor or less, the video projector shall be mounted below the ceiling on a pole


mount with supporting hardware. An escutcheon ring shall be installed where the pole extends from the ceiling.

4. If the height of the finished ceiling is more than 9 feet above the finished floor the project shall be mounted on a motorized projector lift. The motorized projector lift shall raise the projector above the ceiling and be flush with the ceiling when not in use. When the projector shall be used, the projector shall be lowered to the appropriate height.

5. The projector lift shall be controlled by a three function motorized projector lift controller switch. The projector lift controller switch shall be low voltage type and shall be used with a low voltage control unit. The controller switch shall be mounted on the wall. The controller switch shall have independent functions for up, down, and stop. The projector lift shall include ceiling closure panel, plenum housing, ceiling finishing kit, ceiling access door, projector mounting bracket, and factory installed cabling for HDMI, RGBHV, and control. Four (4) controller switch keys shall be provided to the County.

6. Electrical outlets shall be installed for projector use. Electrical outlets shall be installed flush with the ceiling at the projector location if the projector is pole mounted. Electrical service shall be integrated in to the motorized lift equipment if the projector is installed on a motorized lift and follow the projector lift manufacturer's specifications.

7. The projector shall be located away from the projection screen at a distance in accordance to both the projector and screen manufacturer's specifications.

8. The Communications Contractor shall furnish two (2) additional spare bulbs for the projector.

9. There shall not be any obstructions at the projector location to prevent the mounting and storing of the project in the ceiling. The Communications Contractor shall coordinate with the general contractor and other trades to ensure that projector will be free from any obstructions.

10. The Communications Contractor shall also coordinate and ensure that there will not be any obstructions in the projection path between the projector and the screen.

11. Materials and Equipment a. Projector – Infocus 5145 with appropriate Lens b. Pole Mount – Chief Mfg with appropriate size pole, mounting

bracket, and ceiling plate a. Motorized lift – Draper SL series with accessories as stated in

specification. b. Motorized lift controller switch – Draper LVCS c. Low voltage control unit – Draper LVCIII d. Cabling – Crestron DM cable – plenum rated, Extron RS232

cabling – plenum rated. HDMI cabling – Crestron, Extron, C2G e. Connectors – Crestron, Extron, as required f. Miscellaneous materials – All materials necessary to furnish and

install a complete and fully functional system.


F. Projection Screen

1. System Description and Installation Requirements

2. The projection screen shall be used for displaying video/data images projected by the video projector. The projection screen shall be recessed in the ceiling and securely mounted and earthquake braced. The screen housing shall be plenum rated. The projection screen shall be located at the front of the conference room. The projection screen shall be motorized with a three function low voltage control switch to raise, lower, and stop the screen. The screen shall also be controlled by the touch panel au-dio/video control system. The low voltage switch shall be used in conjunction with the low voltage control unit. The projection screen shall have a projection surface suitable for data and video projection. Contractor shall determine the projection screen size based upon the conference room size. The projection screen shall be 16:9 format. Electrical contractor shall furnish and install the electrical service to the screen motor and make final terminations to the screen motor.

3. Materials and Equipment a. Projection Screen – Da-Lite Tensioned Advantage Deluxe

Electrol Series with DaMat surface b. Low voltage switch – Da-Lite c. Low voltage control module - Da-Lite d. Miscellaneous materials – All materials necessary to furnish and

install a complete and fully functional system.

G. Presentation System

1. System Description and Installation Requirements 2. A presentation system shall be installed in the conference room. The

audio video equipment shall consist of a DVDNCR combination unit, Blu Ray DVD Player, AM/FM tuner, AM/FM antenna, CD Player/Recorder, AudioNideo Matrix Switcher, HDMI switcher, touch panel audio/video control system, the Owner’s provided computer, wireless keyboard, wireless mouse, multimedia audio/video input wall plate, MATV/CATWSATV receiver, equipment rack, amplifier, and speakers. The multimedia audio/video input wall plate shall have inputs to accommodate for HDMI, VGA, composite video, S-Video and corresponding audio signals.

3. With the exception of the multimedia audio/video wall plate, wireless keyboard, wireless mouse, and speakers, AM/FM antenna, wireless audio/video touch panel, and the assistive listening emitter panel, the equipment shall be rack mounted in the equipment rack located in the audio control room.

4. The presentation system shall provide audio, video, and data signals to be displayed on the projection screen and heard through the speakers.

5. An audio/video matrix switcher and HDMI switcher shall be installed to select between the sources to be displayed on the projection screen via the projector and selected the audio source to be heard through the speakers.

6. Touch panel control system shall be installed to control the functions of the projector, projector lift, projector screen, DVD/ VCR combination unit,


Blu Ray DVD player, CD player/recorder, audio/video matrix switcher, HDMI switcher, screen and audio processors, AM/FM tuner, and MATV/CATV/SATV receiver box. The control system shall be able to control the audio volume levels of the meeting room PA and presentation systems. The touch panel control system shall be able to control the power on/off functions for all of the audio/video equipment. The control touch panels shall select the audio, video and computer source to be displayed and heard on the presentation system. A wireless control touch panel with docking station shall be installed and wall mounted in the meeting room. The Communications Contractor shall configure and program all hardware and software for the control touch panels, control system, and audio/video switcher, HDMI switcher, and all other hardware and software associated with the meeting room audio video system. All programming data, configuration, and application software shall become the sole property of the County for the County's use. The Communications Contractor shall provide two copies to the County all programming data, configuration, and programming application software on CD/DVDs.

7. The presentation system shall be configured so that the audio from the Conference room public address system can be recorded on the CD recorder.

8. A second, hard wired control touch panel, shall be installed in the equipment rack and have the same capabilities as the wireless control touch panel to control the Conference room audio/video systems. A release button shall be configured on the hardwired touch panel to release the wireless touch panel from the docking station. The wireless touch panel shall be fully functional controlling the audio/video system while in the docking station.

9. A preview monitor shall be installed in the rack to view the selected video programming. The speakers shall be wall mounted on either side of the projection screen.

10. A MATV/CATV/SAW drop and receiver box as necessary shall be installed from the MATV/CATV/SA7V system in the MCR room and installed in the equipment rack. The TV drop shall be integrated into the audio/video system to be displayed in the meeting room over the presentation system.

11. A multimedia audio/video wall plate shall be installed at the front of the Group Study Rooms room and also at the rear of the Community room. The various audio/video connectors shall be connected to separate individual inputs of the audio/video switcher and HDMI switcher, to be selected as an individual audio/video source.

12. The Communications Contractor shall furnish and install a AM/FM antenna on the roof of the building. The Communications contractor shall furnish and install RG 6 or larger coax cabling from the AM/FM antenna to the AM/FM tuner and connect the antenna to the tuner. The Communications contractor shall ground the antenna and cabling ac-cording to NEC codes.

13. The equipment rack shall be installed and earthquake braced at the top and bottom of the rack. The equipment rack shall be grounded. The equipment rack shall have a vented top panel. The equipment rack shall have a power strip with surge suppression and circuit breaker. All blank rack spaces shall be covered with black vented panels.


14. The Communications Contractor shall furnish and install a laminated "as built" drawing of the wiring diagram for the presentation, public address, and video conferencing systems in the meeting room. The drawing shall be 36"W x 24" H. The drawing shall show all components of the presentation, public address, and video conferencing systems and their interconnects. The drawing shall be installed and mounted on the wall in the audio/video control room.

15. The Communications Contractor shall provide hands-on training to LA County staff at a date and time to be determined by the County in the operation of the system. A roster of attendees shall be documented.

16. Materials and Equipment a. Analog/Digital Tuner - Aurora V-Tune-PROHD b. Blu Ray DVD player – Sony, Samsung c. CD Player/recorder – Tascam CD-RW901SL d. Digital media streaming player – Apple TV and Apple Air Play e. AM/FM Tuner – Tascam TU-690 f. AM/FM Antenna kit – Pixel Technologies AFHD-4 g. Amplifier – QSC CX302V h. Speakers - JBL Control 128WT i. Audio processor – Biamp Audia Flex CM w/IP-2 and OP-2E

cards for a 14 input x 10 output configuration j. Audio/Video Switcher – Crestron DM-MD8x8 k. Switcher input cards – Crestron DMC-C, DMC-HD, l. Switcher output cards – Crestron DMCO-53 m. Computer VGA w/ audio/HDMI wall plate Crestron DM-TX-

200-C-2G-W-T n. Video scaler – Crestron DM-RMC-SCALER-C o. Control system – Crestron PRO2 w/ dual Ethernet module p. Control system associated equipment and accessories – Crestron q. Control Panel, wireless – Crestron TPMC8X with wall mount

docking station r. Control Panel/preview monitor, hardwired – Crestron V15-

WALL-B, Digital graphics engine DGE-2, and Middle Atlantic custom rack kit

s. Volume control – Built into Control Panel t. PoE Router/Switch – Netgear, Cisco u. Wireless Keyboard/Mouse suite - Gyration GP3200-001 v. Equipment rack – Middle Atlantic MRK-4426AXS-Z4 with

vented top, power strip, seismic bracket, slide out tracks, track leveler, and cable management.

w. Cabling and connectors – All required cables and connectors to furnish and install a complete and fully functional system including Crestron DM 8G plenum cable and associated Crestron connectors.

x. Miscellaneous materials – All materials necessary to furnish and install a complete and fully functional system.


H. Digital Signage System

1. System Description and Installation Requirements

2. The contractor shall furnish and install a Digital Signage System. The system shall include a flat TV monitor, digital signage player box and HDMI cable. The flat TV monitor and monitor bracket shall be securely anchored at the wall in Adoption Lobby. The contractor shall provide adequate wall bracing to support the weight of the TV monitor, monitor bracket and Digital Signage Box.

3. The Digital Signage Box shall be connected to the local area network and monitor. The contractor shall furnish and install Cat6 patch cable from the Digital Signage Box to the wall data jack and connect to the monitor's HDMI input. The contractor shall configure the digital signage box to work on the local area network.

4. The contractor shall furnish, install and configure the Digital Signage software on a computer as designated by the Owner’s Systems Engineer. The contractor shall create and publish five (5) digital signs for the the Owner’s.

5, Materials and Equipment

a. LED Monitor (Digital Signage) - Samsung UE55A

b. In Wall Swing Arm Mount - Chief TS318TU

c. Protrate Interface Bracket- Chief TA410

d. MediaBox-300 with Windows 7e Player - MediaSignage, Inc. MS-300W

I. WiFi WIRELESS NETWORKS

1. LACWiFi Wireless Network

2. The intent is to provide authorized County employees with access to the LACWiFi Wireless Network, which provides controlled access to County information systems and networks via the County-side Enterprise Network. The LACWiFi Wireless Network requires user authentication utilizing a SecurlD Token in order to gain access.

3. WiFi Public Wireless Network

4. The intent is to provide the public with Internet access utilizing a separate VLAN WiFi Public Wireless Network, routing users directly to the Internet via the County-side Enterprise Network.

5. Wireless Network Access Points 6. The intent is to provide centrally located (ceiling -mounted) Cisco

Lightweight (controller-based) wireless access points to the LACWiFi Wireless Network and WiFi Public Wireless Network as required to provide complete coverage in the entire facility. Wall-mounted access points shall use the Oberon (p/n: 1029-00) wall-mount bracket. Exact locations are to be reviewed and verified with ISD Project Manager. Authorized models are stated below.

7. Internal access points shall be Cisco Aironet 1142 Series lightweight (controller-based), access points per part numbers and licenses enumerated below:


a. 802.11 a/g/n Fixed Unified AP; Int Ant; A Reg Domain — AIR- LAP1142N-A-K9 (Quantity depends on per site/project requirements).

b. Cisco 1140 Series IOS Wireless LAN LWAPP Recovery -S114RK9W- 12418JA (qty — depends on per site requirement).

c. Primary SKU for all upgrade options on the Cisco 5508 WC -LIC- CT5508-UPG (qty 1).

d. 25 AP Add License for the 5508 Controller - LIC-CT5508-25A (qty 1).

8. External access points shall be Cisco 1252 (NG/N) LWAPP with external antennas (Terrawave M6060060M0136020 MIMO Omni directional antenna or Terrawave M6060070MP13620 MIMO Patch antenna).

J. CATV (Cable Access) A. System Description and Installation Requirement

1. The intent of the system is to provide CATV programming including

local TV channels to the building. The system shall consist of a local cable TV company drop, internal coaxial cable, a distribution amplifier, Taps and _____ (__) drops as indicated on the plans. The communications vendor shall use pads as necessary to prevent overload of the signal.

2. The CATV system shall be grounded in accordance to the National

Electric Code. The installation shall comply with All National Electric Codes, Building, and Fire Codes. The Communications Contractor shall apply section 3.5.1 items a through d. with regard to the low voltage cabling for the CATV system.

3. The Communications Contractor shall coordinate with the local cable

company to bring a CATV drop to the building and terminate in the MCR room. A three inch (3”) conduit shall be installed underground from the MCR room to the building property line closest to the local cable company’s feed line. The conduit shall stub up into the MCR of the building. The conduit shall be capped at the property line to prevent water and debris from entering into the conduit. The Communications Contractor shall coordinate with the local cable company to determine the requirements to interface the conduit to the cable company’s feed. The Communications Contractor shall furnish and install the materials to interface the cable company’s feed with the conduit. The Communications Contractor shall verify with the cable company the signal level that the cable company is providing and ensure that the signal level is appropriate to deliver the proper signal level to the displays and/or receiver units. The Communications contractor shall furnish and install a distribution amplifier as needed.

4. The Communications Contractor shall furnish and install a CATV

distribution amplifier in the MCR room. The Communications Contractor shall furnish and install internal coaxial cabling from the distribution amplifier and splitters to the TV outlets. Each TV outlet shall have an individual coaxial cable home run to the tap and a Category 6 cable run to the MCR patch panel. The CATV system shall have a


minimum of eight (8) output ports to distribute the CATV signals to the TVs. Contractor shall furnish and install a 75 ohm terminator on all unused ports on the tap. Contractor shall furnish and install RG6 cabling and connectors between the output of the distribution amplifier to the input of the tap.

5. The Communications Contractor shall balance, amplify or pad the TV

signals and ensure that each TV have a minimum of 5dBmv of CATV signal level at the TV input for all channels. The Communications Contractor shall ensure that all TVs shall display a clear picture and audio for all channels. The Communications Contractor shall furnish and install all other materials not listed below to deliver a fully functional CATV system.

B. Materials and Equipment

a. Distribution Amplifier – Pico Macom, INC. PIDA-1000, wall-mounted (if necessary).

b. Attenuators/Equalizers – Pico Macom PIDA-AT series, PIDA – EQ series

c. Internal coaxial cable - WestPenn 25841 d. F Connectors – WestPenn CN-FS6PL2 e. TV Wall plate – Panduit CFPL3BY f. F connector module – Panduit CMFSRIWY. g. Taps – Blonder Tongue DGT-8, 11dB h. Cat 6 Module (CJ688TGOR) i. Blank Module – Panduit CMBWH-Y

3. PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 ALL EQUIPMENT SHALL BE INSTALLED PER MANUFACTURER REQUIREMENTS.

3.2 REFER TO SPECIFICATION SECTION 16800 FOR ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS

END OF SECTION

LA MIRADA LIBRARY PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 16820-1

SECTION 16820

PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS


1. PART 1 GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Metal conduits and fittings.

2. Nonmetallic conduits and fittings.

3. Optical-fiber-cable pathways and fittings.

4. Metal wireways and auxiliary gutters.

5. Nonmetallic wireways and auxiliary gutters.

6. Surface pathways.

7. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets.

8. Handholes and boxes for exterior underground cabling.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Division 16 Section "Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems" for exteri-or ductbanks, manholes, and underground utility construction.

2. Division 16 Section "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" for conduits, wireways, surface raceways, boxes, enclosures, cabinets, handholes, and faceplate adapters serving electrical systems.

3. Division 28 Section "Pathways for Electronic Safety and Security" for conduits, surface pathways, innerduct, boxes, and faceplate adapters serving electronic safety and security.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. ARC: Aluminum rigid conduit.

B. GRC: Galvanized rigid steel conduit.

C. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.


1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For surface pathways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets.

C. Shop Drawings: For custom enclosures and cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, and at-tachment details.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Coordination Drawings: Pathway routing plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of items involved:

Structural members in paths of pathway groups with common supports.

2. HVAC and plumbing items and architectural features in paths of conduit groups with common supports.

B. Qualification Data: For professional engineer.

C. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For pathway racks, enclosures, cabinets, equipment racks and their mounting provisions, including those for internal components, from manufacturer.

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation.

2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.

3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which certification is based and their installation requirements.

4. Detailed description of conduit support devices and interconnections on which certification is based and their installation requirements.

D. Source quality-control reports.

2. PART 2 PRODUCTS


A. All materials and equipment shall be new, unused and manufactured within eighteen months prior to installation. Where applicable, all materials and equipment shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories.

2.2 METAL CONDUITS AND FITTINGS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc.

2. Allied Tube & Conduit; a Tyco International Ltd. Co.

3. Alpha Wire Company.


4. Anamet Electrical, Inc.

5. Electri-Flex Company.

6. 0-Z/Gedney; a brand of EGS Electrical Group.

7. Picoma Industries; Subsidiary of Mueller Water Products, Inc.

8. Republic Conduit.

9. Robroy Industries.

10. Southwire Company.

11. Thomas & Betts Corporation.

12, Western Tube and Conduit Corporation.

13. Wheatland Tube Company; a division of John Maneely Company.

B. General Requirements for Metal Conduits and Fittings:

1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2. Comply with TIA-569-B.

C. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6.

D. ARC: Comply with ANSI C80.5 and UL 6A.

E. IMC: Comply with ANSI C80.6 and UL 1242.

F. PVC-Coated Steel Conduit: PVC-coated rigid steel conduit.

1. Comply with NEMA RN 1.

2. Coating Thickness: 0.040 inch, minimum.

G. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797.

H. Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B.

1. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 886 and NFPA 70.

2. Fittings for EMT:

a. Material: Steel.

b. Type: Compression.

3. Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying with UL-467, rated for environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding jumper.

4. Coating for Fittings for PVC-Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness of 0.040 inch, with over-lapping sleeves protecting threaded joints.


Joint Compound for IMC, GRC, or ARC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity.

2.3 NONMETALLIC CONDUITS AND FITTINGS


1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc.

2. Allied Tube & Conduit; a Tyco International Ltd. Co.

3. Anamet Electrical, Inc.

4. Arnco Corporation.

5. CANTEX Inc.

6. CertainTeed Corp.

7. Condux International, Inc.

8. Electri-Flex Company.

9. Kraloy.

10. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.

11. Niedax-Kleinhuis USA, Inc.

12. RACO; a Hubbell company.


B. General Requirements for Nonmetallic Conduits and Fittings:



C. RNC: Type EPC-40-PVC, complying with NEMA TC 2 and UL 651 unless otherwise indicated.

D. Rigid HDPE: Comply with UL 651A.

E. Continuous HDPE: Comply with UL 6518.

F. RTRC: Comply with UL 1684A and NEMA TC 14.

G. Fittings for RNC: Comply with NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material.

2.4 OPTICAL-FIBER-CABLE PATHWAYS AND FITTINGS


1. Alpha Wire Company. 3. Arnco Corporation.


4. Endot Industries Inc.

5. IPEX.

6. Lamson & Sessions; Canon Electrical Products.

B. Description: Comply with UL 2024; flexible-type pathway, approved for plenum installation unless otherwise indicated.



2.5 METAL WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS


1. Cooper B-Line, Inc.

2. Hoffman; a Pentair company.

3. Mono-Systems, Inc.

4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

B. Description: Sheet metal, complying with UL 870 and NEMA 250, Type 12 unless otherwise indi-cated, and sized according to NFPA 70.

1. Metal wireways installed outdoors shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.


C. Fittings and Accessories: Include covers, couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.

D. Wireway Covers: Hinged type unless otherwise indicated.

E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.

2.6 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS


1. Adalet.

2. Cooper Technologies Company; Cooper Crouse-Hinds.

3. EGS/Appleton Electric.

4. Erickson Electrical Equipment Company.

5. Hoffman; a Pentair company.


6. Hubbell Incorporated; Killark Division.

7. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.

8. Milbank Manufacturing Co.

9. Molex; Woodhead Brand.

10. Mono-Systems, Inc.

11. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of EGS Electrical Group.

12. RACO; a Hubbell company.

13. Robroy Industries.

14, Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company.

15. Stahlin Non-Metallic Enclosures; a division of Robroy Industries.


17. Wiremold / Legrand.

B. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets:


2. Boxes, enclosures and cabinets installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet lo-cations.

C. Sheet-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A.

D. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy, Type FD, with gasketed cover.

E. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as recessed box.

F. Metal Floor Boxes:

1. Material: Cast metal.

2. Type: Fully adjustable.

3. Shape: Rectangular.

4. Listing and Labeling: Metal floor boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

G. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

H. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 1773, galvanized, cast iron with gasketed cover.

Device Box Dimensions: 4 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep.


J. Gangable boxes are prohibited. K. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 2 and UL 514C.

L. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Type 12 with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated.

1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.

2. Nonmetallic Enclosures:

a. Material: Fiberglass.

b. Finished inside with radio-frequency-resistant paint.

3. Interior Panels: Steel; all sides finished with manufacturer's standard enamel.

M. Cabinets:

1. NEMA 250, Type 12, galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.

2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge.

3. Key latch to match panelboards.

4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage.

5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.

6. Nonmetallic cabinets shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2.8 HANDHOLES AND BOXES FOR EXTERIOR UNDERGROUND CABLING

A. General Requirements for Handholes and Boxes:

1. Boxes and handholes for use in underground systems shall be designed and identified as defined in NFPA 70, for intended location and application.

2. Boxes installed in wet areas shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.


B. Polymer-Concrete Handholes and Boxes with Polymer-Concrete Cover: Molded of sand and ag-gregate, bound together with polymer resin, and reinforced with steel, fiberglass, or a combination of the two.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indi-cated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

a. Armorcast Products Company.

b. Carson Industries LLC.


d. CDR Systems Corporation; Hubbell Power Systems. e. NewBasis.

f. Oldcastle Precast, Inc.; Christy Concrete Products.

g. Synertech Moulded Products; a division of Oldcastle Precast, Inc.

3. Standard: Comply with SCTE 77.

4. Configuration: Designed for flush burial with closed bottom unless otherwise indicated.

5. Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices and having structural load rating consistent with enclosure and handhole location.

6. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50.

7. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, "COMMUNICATIONS.".

8. Conduit Entrance Provisions: Conduit-terminating fittings shall mate with entering ducts for secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall.

9. Handholes 12 Inches Wide by 24 Inches Long and Larger: Have inserts for cable racks and pulling-in irons installed before concrete is poured.

2.9 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL FOR UNDERGROUND ENCLOSURES

A. Handhole and Pull-Box Prototype Test: Test prototypes of handholes and boxes for compliance with SCTE 77. Strength tests shall be for specified tier ratings of products supplied.

1. Tests of materials shall be performed by an independent testing agency.

2. Strength tests of complete boxes and covers shall be by either an independent testing agency or manufacturer. A qualified registered professional engineer shall certify tests by manufacturer.

3. Testing machine pressure gages shall have current calibration certification complying with ISO 9000 and ISO 10012, and traceable to NIST standards.

3. PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PATHWAY APPLICATION

A. Outdoors: Apply pathway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed Conduit: GRC.

2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: EMT.

3, Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-80-PVC, concrete encased.

4. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R.

B. Indoors: Apply pathway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT.

2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT.


3. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: GRC. Pathway locations include the following:

a. Mechanical rooms.

4. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT.

5. Damp or Wet Locations: GRC.

6. Pathways for Concealed General-Purpose Distribution of Optical-Fiber or Communica-tions Cable: EMT.

C. Minimum Pathway Size: 3/4-inch trade size. Minimum size for optical-fiber cables is 1 inch.

D. Pathway Fittings: Compatible with pathways and suitable for use and location.

1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless oth-erwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.

2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with this type of conduit. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer and apply in thickness and number of coats recommended by manufacturer.

3. EMT: Use compression, steel fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.

E. Do not install aluminum conduits, boxes, or fittings in contact with concrete or earth.

F. Install surface pathways only where indicated on Drawings.

G. Do not install nonmetallic conduit where ambient temperature exceeds 120 deg F.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1, NECA 101, and TIA-569-B for installation requirements except where re-quirements on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 for aluminum path-ways. Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of pathways allowed in specific occupancies and number of floors.

B. Keep pathways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal pathway runs above water and steam piping.

C. Complete pathway installation before starting conductor installation.

D. Comply with requirements in Division 16 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for hangers and supports.

E. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab.

F. Install no more than the equivalent of two 90-degree bends in any pathway run. Support within 12 inches of changes in direction. Utilize long radius ells for all optical-fiber cables.

G. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. In-stall conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines.

H. Support conduit within 12 inches of enclosures to which attached.


Pathways Embedded in Slabs:

1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size, parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support. Secure pathways to reinforcement at maximum 10-foot intervals.

2. Arrange pathways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings.

3. Arrange pathways to keep a minimum of 2 inches of concrete cover in all directions.

4. Do not embed threadless fittings in concrete unless specifically approved by Architect for each specific location.

5. Change from ENT to GRC before rising above floor.

J. Stub-ups to Above Recessed Ceilings:

1. Use EMT, IMC, or RMC for pathways.

2. Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub-ups not terminated in hubs or in an enclosure.

K. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of pathway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufac-turer's written instructions.

L. Coat field-cut threads on PVC-coated pathway with a corrosion-preventing conductive compound prior to assembly.

M. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes or cabinets. Install insulated bushings on conduits terminated with locknuts.

N. Install pathways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more.

0. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to assure a continuous ground path.

P. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits of 2-inch trade size and larger, use roll cutter or a guide to ensure cut is straight and perpendicular to the length.

Q. Install pull wires in empty pathways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire. Cap un-derground pathways designated as spare above grade alongside pathways in use.

R. Surface Pathways:

1. Install surface pathway for surface telecommunications outlet boxes only where indicated on Drawings.

2. Install surface pathway with a minimum 2-inch radius control at bend points.

3. Secure surface pathway with screws or other anchor-type devices at intervals not exceeding 48 inches and with no less than two supports per straight pathway section. Support surface pathway according to manufacturer's written instructions. Tape and glue are not acceptable support methods.


S. Pathways for Optical-Fiber and Communications Cable: Install pathways, metal and nonmetallic, rigid and flexible, as follows:

1. 3/4-Inch Trade Size and Smaller: Install pathways in maximum lengths of 50 feet.

2. 1-Inch Trade Size and Larger: Install pathways in maximum lengths of 75 feet.

3. Install with a maximum of two 90-degree bends or equivalent for each length of pathway unless Drawings show stricter requirements. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes or terminations at distribution frames or cabinets where necessary to comply with these requirements.

T. Install pathway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed pathways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install pathway seal-ing fittings according to NFPA 70.

U. Install devices to seal pathway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all path-ways at the following points:

1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces.

2. Where an underground service pathway enters a building or structure.

3. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.

Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for solvent welding PVC conduit and fittings.

Expansion-Joint Fittings:

1. Install in each run of aboveground RNC that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 30 deg F, and that has straight-run length that exceeds 25 feet. In-stall in each run of aboveground RMC conduit that is located where environmental tem-perature change may exceed 100 deg F and that has straight-run length that exceeds 100 feet.

2. Install type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for each of the following locations:

a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F temperature change.

b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F temperature change.

c. Indoor Spaces Connected with Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125 deg F temperature change.

d. Attics: 135 deg F temperature change.

3. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F of temperature change for PVC conduits. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.000078 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F of temperature change for metal conduits.

4. Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure expan-sion joints.


5. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at time of installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement.

X. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not individually indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to top of box unless otherwise indicated.

Y. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surface to provide a flat surface for a rain-tight connection between box and cover plate or supported equipment and box.

Z. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same vertical channel.

AA. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose.

BB. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by conduits.

CC. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.

DD. Set nonmetallic floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT

A. Direct-Buried Conduit:

1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. Prepare trench bottom as specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for pipe less than 6 inches in nominal diameter.

2. Install backfill as specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."

3. After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work toward end of conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction as temperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to provide maximum supporting strength. After placing controlled backfill to within 12 inches of finished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and complete backfilling with normal compaction as specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."

4. Install manufactured duct elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through floor unless otherwise indicated. Encase elbows for stub-up ducts throughout length of elbow.

5. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through floor.

a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase coupling with 3 inches of concrete for a minimum of 12 inches on each side of the coupling.


b. For stub-ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases and where conduits penetrate building foundations, extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of 60 inches from edge of foundation or equipment base. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment.

6. Warning Planks: Bury warning planks approximately 12 inches above direct-buried conduits, but a minimum of 6 inches below grade. Align planks along centerline of conduit.

7. Underground Warning Tape: Comply with requirements in Division 16 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

3.4 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND HANDHOLES AND BOXES

A. Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting conduits to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from 1/2-inch sieve to No. 4 sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth.

C. Elevation: In paved areas, set so cover surface will be flush with finished grade. Set covers of other enclosures 1 inch above finished grade.

D. Install handholes with bottom below frost line, below grade.

E. Install removable hardware, including pulling eyes, cable stanchions, cable arms, and insulators, as required for installation and support of cables and conductors and as indicated. Select arm lengths to be long enough to provide spare space for future cables, but short enough to preserve adequate working clearances in enclosure.

F. Field cut openings for conduits according to enclosure manufacturer's written instructions. Cut wall of enclosure with a tool designed for material to be cut. Size holes for terminating fittings to be used, and seal around penetrations after fittings are installed.

3.5 FIRESTOPPING

A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage or deterioration.

1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.

2. Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer.

END OF SECTION

LA MIRADA LIBRARY CABLE TRAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 16830-1

SECTION 16830

CABLE TRAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS


1. PART 1 GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi-tions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Ladder cable trays.


1. Division 16 Section "Cable Trays for Electrical Systems" for cable trays and accesso-ries serving electrical systems.


A. Product Data: For each type of cable tray.

1. Include data indicating dimensions and finishes for each type of cable tray indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: For each type of cable tray.

1. Show fabrication and installation details of cable trays, including plans, elevations, and sections of components and attachments to other construction elements. Designate components and accessories, including clamps, brackets, hanger rods, splice-plate connectors, expansion-joint assemblies, straight lengths, and fittings.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For seismic restraints.

Seismic-Restraint Details: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer, li-censed in the state where Project is located, who is responsible for their preparation.

2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting seismic restraints.

3. Detail fabrication, including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported cable trays.


A. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans and sections, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

1. Include scaled cable tray layout and relationships between components and adjacent structural, electrical, and mechanical elements.


2. Vertical and horizontal offsets and transitions.

3. Clearances for access above and to side of cable trays.

4. Vertical elevation of cable trays above the floor or below bottom of ceiling structure.

B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For cable trays, accessories, and components, from manu-facturer.



3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.

C. Field quality-control reports.

2. PART 2 PRODUCTS



2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements," to design cable tray supports and seismic bracing.

B. Seismic Performance: Cable trays and supports shall withstand the effects of earthquake mo-tions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. The term "withstand" means "the cable trays will remain in place without separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified."

2. Component Importance Factor: 1.0.

C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes in cable tray installed outdoors.

1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

2.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR CABLE TRAYS

A. Cable Trays and Accessories: Identified as defined in NFPA 70 and marked for intended loca-tion, application, and grounding.

1. Source Limitations: Obtain cable trays and components from single manufacturer.

B. Sizes and Configurations: See the Cable Tray Schedule on Drawings for specific requirements for types, materials, sizes, and configurations.


C. Structural Performance: See articles for individual cable tray types for specific values for the following parameters:

1. Uniform Load Distribution: Capable of supporting a uniformly distributed load on the indicated support span when supported as a simple span and tested according to NEMA VE 1,

2. Concentrated Load: A load applied at midpoint of span and centerline of tray.

3. Load and Safety Factors: Applicable to both side rails and rung capacities.

2.4 LADDER CABLE TRAYS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the follow-ing:

B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Chatsworth Products, Inc.

2. Allied Tube & Conduit.

3. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.

4.

C. Description:

1. Configuration: Two I-beam side rails with transverse rungs welded to side rails.

2. Rung Spacing: 9 inches o.c.

3. Radius-Fitting Rung Spacing: 9 inches at center of tray's width.

4. Minimum Cable-Bearing Surface for Rungs: 7/8-inch width with radius edges.

5. No portion of the rungs shall protrude below the bottom plane of side rails.

6. Structural Performance of Each Rung: Capable of supporting a maximum cable load, with a safety factor of 1.5, plus a 200-lb concentrated load, when tested according to NEMA VE 1.

7. Minimum Usable Load Depth: 4 inches.

8. Straight Section Lengths: 10 feet except where shorter lengths are required to facili-tate tray assembly.

9. Width: 12 inches unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.

10. Fitting Minimum Radius: 12 inches.

11. Class Designation: Comply with NEMA VE 1, Class 12B.

12. Splicing Assemblies: Bolted type using serrated flange locknuts.

13. Hardware and Fasteners: Steel, zinc plated according to ASTM B 633.


14. Splice Plate Capacity: Splices located within support span shall not diminish rated loading capacity of cable tray.

2.5 MATERIALS AND FINISHES

A. Steel:

1. Straight Section and Fitting Side Rails and Rungs: Steel complies with the minimum mechanical properties of ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Grade 33, Type 2.

2. Steel Tray Splice Plates: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, HSLAS, Grade 50, Class 1.

3. Fasteners: Steel complies with the minimum mechanical properties of ASTM A 510/A 510M, Grade 1008.

4. Finish: Powder-coat enamel paint.

a. Powder-Coat Enamel: Cable tray manufacturer's recommended primer and corrosion-inhibiting treatment, with factory-applied powder-coat paint.

b. Epoxy-Resin Prime Coat: Cold-curing epoxy primer, MPI# 101.

c. Epoxy-Resin Topcoat: Epoxy, cold-cured, gloss, MPI# 77.

d. Hardware: Chromium-zinc plated, ASTM F 1136.

5. Finish: Factory-standard primer, ready for field painting, with chromium-zinc-plated hardware according to ASTM F 1136.

6. Finish: Black oxide finish for support accessories and miscellaneous hardware ac-cording to ASTM D 769.

2.6 CABLE TRAY ACCESSORIES

A. Fittings: Tees, crosses, risers, elbows, and other fittings as indicated, of same materials and finishes as cable tray.

B. Barrier Strips: Same materials and finishes as for cable tray.

C. Cable tray supports and connectors, including bonding jumpers, as recommended by cable tray manufacturer.

2.7 WARNING SIGNS

A. Lettering: 1-1/2-inch- high, black letters on yellow background with legend "Warning! Not To Be Used as Walkway, Ladder, or Support for Ladders or Personnel."

B. Comply with requirements for fasteners in Division 16 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

2.8 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing: Test and inspect cable trays according to NEMA VE 1.

3. PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 CABLE TRAY INSTALLATION


A. Install cable trays according to NEMA VE 2. B. Install cable trays as a complete system, including fasteners, hold-down clips, support

systems, barrier strips, adjustable horizontal and vertical splice plates, elbows, reducers, tees, crosses, cable dropouts, adapters, covers, and bonding.

C. Install cable trays so that the tray is accessible for cable installation and all splices are accessible for inspection and adjustment.

D. Remove burrs and sharp edges from cable trays.

E. Join aluminum cable tray with splice plates; use four square neck-carriage bolts and locknuts.

F. Fasten cable tray supports to building structure and install seismic restraints.

G. Design fasteners and supports to carry cable tray, the cables, and a concentrated load of 200 lb. Comply with requirements in Division 16 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Sys-tems." Comply with seismic-restraint details according to Division 16 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

H. Place supports so that spans do not exceed maximum spans on schedules and provide clear-ances shown on Drawings. Install intermediate supports when cable weight exceeds the load-carrying capacity of the tray rungs.

Construct supports from channel members, threaded rods, and other appurtenances furnished by cable tray manufacturer. Arrange supports in trapeze or wall-bracket form as required by application.

J. Support bus assembly to prevent twisting from eccentric loading.

K. Install center-hung supports for single-rail trays designed for 60 versus 40 percent eccentric loading condition, with a safety factor of 3.

L. Locate and install supports according to NEMA VE 2. Do not install more than one cable tray splice between supports.

M. Support wire-basket cable trays with trapeze hangers.

N. Support trapeze hangers for wire-basket trays with 1/4-inch- diameter rods.

0. Make connections to equipment with flanged fittings fastened to cable trays and to equipment. Support cable trays independent of fittings. Do not carry weight of cable trays on equipment enclosure.

P. Install expansion connectors where cable trays cross building expansion joints and in cable tray runs that exceed dimensions recommended in NEMA VE 2. Space connectors and set gaps according to applicable standard.

Q. Make changes in direction and elevation using manufacturer's recommended fittings.

R. Make cable tray connections using manufacturer's recommended fittings.

S. Seal penetrations through fire and smoke barriers. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

T. Install capped metal sleeves for future cables through firestop-sealed cable tray penetrations of fire and smoke barriers.

U. Install cable trays with enough workspace to permit access for installing cables.


V. Install barriers to separate cables of different systems, such as power, communications, and data processing; or of different insulation levels, such as 600, 5000, and 15 000 V.

W. Install permanent covers, if used, after installing cable. Install cover clamps according to NEMA VE 2.

X. Clamp covers on cable trays installed outdoors with heavy-duty clamps.

Y. Install warning signs in visible locations on or near cable trays after cable tray installation.

3.2 CABLE TRAY GROUNDING

A. Ground cable trays according to NFPA 70 unless additional grounding is specified. Comply with requirements in Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.

B. Cable trays with communications cable shall be bonded together with splice plates listed for grounding purposes or with listed bonding jumpers.

C. Cable trays with control conductors shall be bonded together with splice plates listed for grounding purposes or with listed bonding jumpers.

D. When using epoxy- or powder-coat painted cable trays as a grounding conductor, completely remove coating at all splice contact points or ground connector attachment. After completing splice-to-grounding bolt attachment, repair the coated surfaces with coating materials recom-mended by cable tray manufacturer.

E. Bond cable trays to power source for cables contained within with bonding conductors sized according to NFPA 70, Article 250.122, "Size of Equipment Grounding Conductors."

3.3 CABLE INSTALLATION

A. Install cables only when each cable tray run has been completed and inspected.

B. Fasten cables on horizontal runs with cable clamps or cable ties according to NEMA VE 2. Tighten clamps only enough to secure the cable, without indenting the cable jacket. Install ca-ble ties with a tool that includes an automatic pressure-limiting device.

C. Fasten cables on vertical runs to cable trays every 18 inches.

D. Fasten and support cables that pass from one cable tray to another or drop from cable trays to equipment enclosures. Fasten cables to the cable tray at the point of exit and support cables independent of the enclosure. The cable length between cable trays or between cable tray and enclosure shall be no more than 72 inches.

E. Tie MI cables down every 36 inches where required to provide a 2-hour fire rating and every 72 inches elsewhere.

F. In existing construction, remove inactive or dead cables from cable trays.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Remove paint from all connection points before making connections. Repair paint after the connections are completed.

B. Connect pathways to cable trays according to requirements in NEMA VE 2 and NEMA FG 1.


3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative:

1. After installing cable trays and after electrical circuitry has been energized, survey for compliance with requirements.

2. Visually inspect cable insulation for damage. Correct sharp corners, protuberances in cable trays, vibrations, and thermal expansion and contraction conditions, which may cause or have caused damage.

3. Verify that the number, size, and voltage of cables in cable trays do not exceed that permitted by NFPA 70. Verify that communications or data-processing circuits are separated from power circuits by barriers or are installed in separate cable trays.

4. Verify that there are no intruding items such as pipes, hangers, or other equipment in the cable tray.

5. Remove dust deposits, industrial process materials, trash of any description, and any blockage of tray ventilation.

6. Visually inspect each cable tray joint and each ground connection for mechanical continuity. Check bolted connections between sections for corrosion. Clean and retorque in suspect areas.

7. Check for improperly sized or installed bonding jumpers.

8. Check for missing, incorrect, or damaged bolts, bolt heads, or nuts. When found, replace with specified hardware.

9. Perform visual and mechanical checks for adequacy of cable tray grounding; verify that all takeoff raceways are bonded to cable trays. Test entire cable tray system for continuity. Maximum allowable resistance is 1 ohm.

B. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed cable trays and cables.

1. Install temporary protection for cables in open trays to safeguard exposed cables against falling objects or debris during construction. Temporary protection for cables and cable tray can be constructed of wood or metal materials and shall remain in place until the risk of damage is over.

2. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by cable tray manufacturer.

3. Repair damage to paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by cable tray manufacturer.

END OF SECTION

LA MIRADA LIBRARY SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR COMMUNICATIONS PATHWAYS AND CABLING 16840-1

SECTION 16840

SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR COMMUNICATIONS PATHWAYS AND CABLING


1. PART 1 GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Con-ditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Sleeves for pathway and cable penetration of non-fire-rated construction walls and floors.

2. Sleeve-seal systems.

3. Sleeve-seal fittings.

4. Grout.

5. Silicone sealants.


1. Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for penetration firestopping installed in fire-resistance-rated walls, horizontal assemblies, and smoke barriers, with and without penetrating items.


A. Product Data: For each type of product.

2. PART 2 PRODUCTS


A. All materials and equipment shall be new, unused and manufactured within eighteen months prior to installation. Where applicable, all materials and equipment shall be listed by Under-writers Laboratories.

2.2 SLEEVES

A. Wall Sleeves:


1. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc coated, plain ends.

2. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.

B. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies: Galvanized-steel sheet; 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint, with tabs for screw-fastening the sleeve to the board.

C. PVC-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.

D. Molded-PVC Sleeves: With nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.

E. Molded-PE or -PP Sleeves: Removable, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth outer surface with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.

F. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings:

1. Material: Galvanized-steel sheet.

2. Minimum Metal Thickness:

a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and with no side larger than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.052 inch.

b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter 50 inches or more and one or more sides larger than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.138 inch.

2.3 GROUT

A. Description: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior sealing openings in non-fire-rated walls or floors.

B. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.

C. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

2.4 SILICONE SEALANTS

A. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of grade indicated below.

1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces that are not fire rated.

B. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.

3. PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR NON-FIRE-RATED ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. Comply with NEMA VE 2 for cable tray and cable penetrations.


C. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Above-Grade Non-Fire-Rated Concrete and Masonry-Unit Floors and Walls:

1. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors:

a. Seal annular space between sleeve and pathway or cable, using joint seal-ant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with require-ments in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

b. Seal space outside of sleeves with mortar or grout. Pack sealing material solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfac-es smooth; protect material while curing.

2. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.

3. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and pathway or cable unless sleeve seal is to be installed or unless seismic criteria re-quire different clearance.

4. Install sleeves for wall penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of walls. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls. Deburr after cutting.

5. Install sleeves for floor penetrations. Extend sleeves installed in floors 3 inches above finished floor level. Install sleeves during erection of floors.

D. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies:

1. Use circular metal sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.

2. Seal space outside of sleeves with approved joint compound for gypsum board as-semblies.

E. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual pathways and cables with flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

F. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

G. Underground, Exterior-Wall and Floor Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pathway or cable and sleeve for in-stalling sleeve-seal system.

3.2 SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at path-way entries into building.

B. Install type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for pathway or cable material and size. Position pathway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechani-cal sleeve seals and install in annular space between pathway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.


3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL-FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve-seal fittings in new walls and slabs as they are constructed.

B. Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete slabs and walls. Position waterstop flange to be centered in concrete slab or wall.

C. Secure nailing flanges to concrete forms. Using grout, seal the space around outside of sleeve-seal fittings.

END OF SECTION

LA MIRADA LIBRARY COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS

16850-1

SECTION 16850

COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS


1. PART 1 GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Telecommunications mounting elements.

2. Backboards.

3. Telecommunications equipment racks and cabinets.

4. Grounding.


1. Division 16 Section "Cable Trays for Communications Systems" for cable trays and accessories.

2. Division 16 Section "Communications Backbone Cabling" for voice and data cabling associated with system panels and devices.

3. Division 16 Section "Communications Horizontal Cabling" for voice and data cabling associated with system panels and devices.

4. Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security" for voice and data cabling associated with system panels and devices.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. BICSI: Building Industry Consulting Service International.

B. LAN: Local area network.

C. RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer.



16850-2


1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for equipment racks and cabinets.

2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: For communications equipment room fittings. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

2. Equipment Racks and Cabinets: Include workspace requirements and access for cable connections.

3. Grounding: Indicate location of grounding bus bar and its mounting detail showing standoff insulators and wall mounting brackets.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer, qualified layout technician, installation supervisor, and field inspector.

B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For equipment frames from manufacturer.


2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. Base certification on the maximum number of components capable of being mounted in each rack type. Identify components on which certification is based.



A. Installer Qualifications: Cabling Installer must have personnel certified by BICSI on staff.

1. Layout Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings shall be under the direct supervision of RCDD.

2. Installation Supervision: Installation shall be under the direct supervision of Registered Technician, who shall be present at all times when Work of this Section is performed at Project site.

3. Field Inspector: Currently registered by BICSI as RCDD to perform the on-site inspection.

1.7 TELECOMMUNICATIONS ROOMS


16850-3

A. To complete the installation, testing and cut-over of the telephone and other sub-systems in a timely manner, the contractor shall give a high priority to completing ALL of the following as soon as possible and no later than four (4) weeks prior to the scheduled completion target date. the Owner’s Systems Engineer will also require immediate notification of any changes in the target date. Failure to comply with these conditions can and will result in communications systems in- service, and occupancy, delays.

B. Communication Rooms Designations

1. Main Communications Room (MCR)

2. This room houses the Telephone system and main data communications equipment. The telecommunication cables from the BEFR, close workstations, and TR's (if necessary), are terminated here. Intrusion Alarm equipment, Card Access System equipment, Door (with Card Reader or Panic Bar) Power Supplies Panels, Restrooms Door Releases Power Supply Panels, Paging equipment, CCTV, CATV distribution equipment, etc. are also housed in this room. Locations of the equipment, component, cabinet or panels in the MCR shall be coordinated with the the Owner’s Systems Engineer.

3. The MCR shall be located in the building in such a way that it is accessible from the Staff Area. Additionally, it shall be placed such that no data cabling, when installed and terminated, will exceed 275 feet or current EIA/TIA Standard.

4. The MCR shall be equipped with furniture to provide a work surface for technical staff. This shall be in the form of a fully supported drop down work surface. This should be at a height that is comfortable to work at standing. A "bar-type" stool shall be provided for sitting when necessary.

The MCR will also be equipped with an 18" deep bookshelf about the work surface. The length may be determined in the field. If the size of the room permits, a desk and chair should be provided in place of the drop down work surface.

C. Air Conditioning

D. The MCR shall be provided with 24 hour, 7 day air conditioning. Under normal operating conditions, a separate duct zone connected from the main building system shall provide COOL AIR ONLY in the MCR. If the main system fails to operate or maintain the required ambient temperature, a standby emergency system shall be automatically activated. Both systems shall be provided and installed with separately controlled thermostats. As an option, stand-alone air conditioning separate from building's central HVAC system may be provided. The MCR shall NOT be under the control of any building energy conservations systems (BEAS). A temperature of 65 degrees Fahrenheit and a relative humidity range of 40% to 60% shall be maintained at all times. Heat dissipation for the communication equipment is approximately 25,000 BTU. Before ANY communications equipment can be activated, a live test of the air conditioning system shall be conducted in the presence of the the Owner’s designated staff or his/her designee.


16850-4

1. NO air conditioning units (HVAC), condensate lines, water heaters, or other types of water lines other than fire sprinklers (with the highest temperature head and pre-action type only) as required by code, may be mounted directly above any MCR or Telecommunications Room (TR) unless otherwise approved in writing by the Owner’s Systems Engineer. In multi-story buildings, where TR's are placed directly above MCR's, or other TR's, (i.e. building risers) air conditioning/heating vents and ducts shall not be placed in the ceiling space directly under the TR.

E. Electrical Requirements

F. Install "twist lock" (L5-30R or L6-30R as required) and QUAD (NEMA 5-20R) power receptacles mounted on the designated locations in the equipment racks. Install QUAD (NEMA 5-20R) electrical outlets in MCR/TR/IDF walls.

G. Intrusion Detection/Alarm System, Access Control System, Panic Bar/Door Locking Devices Power Supplies, Restrooms Door Releases Power Supplies, Fire Alarm Control(Notifier) panel and Fire Alarm Communicator (dialer) panel must be provided with dedicated hard-wired circuits.

H. Power receptacles/outlets shall be on dedicated circuit with

isolated ground. Fire Protection

J. Provide a smoke detector and a high temperature sensor at the MCR, TR or IDF rooms. Connect the detector or sensor to the Fire Alarm panel as two different zones. A fire extinguisher of the type recommended to be use for electrical fires shall be installed on the wall adjacent to the Telecommunications Room door where it can be reached without completely entering the room. If the Telecommunications Room is to be equipped with fire protection/sprinkler heads, it shall be of the highest temperature and "Pre-Action" type.

K. Backboards

L. Install fire-retardant, 3/4 inch x 8 feet plywood backboards covering all 4 walls of the Telecommunications Room with the bottom mounted at 12 inches above the floor. Backboards shall be painted off-white. Backboard shall be anchored on the wall and capable of supporting installation of communications equipment/panels.

M. Door Locks

N. Install a door lock mechanism keyed separately from all other doors or a card key reader (if the building has Access Control System) on all Telecommunications Rooms.

0. Grounding

P. The grounding in all Telecommunications Rooms shall be a #2/0 AWG insulated ground cable from main building ground and terminate on a ground bus bar (Chatsworth Standard Bus Bar P/N: 10622-010).

Q. Lighting

R. Lighting intensity in all Telecommunications Rooms shall be 90-100 foot-candles at 36 inches above finished floor. The bottom of lighting fixtures shall be 9 feet above finished floor.


16850-5

S. Flooring

T. Coordinate with architectural plans and provide Anti-static vinyl flooring in all Telecommunications Rooms. Anti-static vinyl flooring must be grounded to the MTGBB (Main Telecommunications Ground Bus Bar) through a flat copper strap or sheet at least 0.022 inch thick x 2 inch wide.

2. PART 2 PRODUCTS




A. Seismic Performance: Equipment frames shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."

2.3 BACKBOARDS

A. Backboards: Plywood, fire-retardant treated, 3/4 by 48 by 96 inches. Comply with requirements for plywood backing panels specified in Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry."

1. Fire retardant shall be Class A rated

2.4 EQUIPMENT FRAMES



1. Chatsworth Products, Inc.

2. Hubbell Premise Wiring.

3. Panduit Corp.

4. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc.

C. EQUIPMENT RACKS / MOUNTINGS

1. The contractor shall provide and install equipment racks that are earthquake rated for Zone 4. All rack installations shall be in accordance with the Los Angeles County Standard 902. This standard will require the use of a 3-inch spacer bar (B-Line P/N STD108DET4) or the Chatsworth Cable Tray Elevation Kit (P/N: CPI 10506-702) to attach the rack to the cable tray.


16850-6

2. The contractor shall provide and install standard 2-Posts relay racks, 19"W x 7'H (Chatsworth P/N 48353-703 or P/N 55053-703, 45 RMU), color black, heavy duty rack shelves and cable trays. 4 posts relay racks, 19"W x 29"D x 7'H (Chatsworth P/N 50120-703, 45 RMU), black color, shall be used to mount the Network equipment, UPS and batteries. The contractor shall install, position, reposition, or remove racks and equipment as required without disruption of ongoing services. The contractor shall furnish extension cables, power taps, or temporary racks if needed.

3. All equipment racks shall be augmented with horizontal and vertical wire management hardware, both front and back as required, to properly dress cables and patch cords.

4. The horizontal wire organizers shall be Panduit WMPH2E and WMPSE. Furnish one horizontal wire organizer per patch panel plus one (1) additional wire organizer at the top of each row of patch panels. Be sure to include the Panduit Mini-Corn Jacks on the patch panel. Vertical wire managers shall also be furnished and installed using either Panduit WMPVHC45E or WMPV45E as required. Refer to the Equipment Rack Layout provided by the ISD Project Manager for further details.

5. The number of equipment racks shall be determined by the contractor and approved by the Owner’s Systems Engineer. The number of racks required shall be dependent on the size of the facility or the number of data ports and computer stations.

6. All voice/data cables shall be terminated on separate patch panels in the MCR. Separate patch panels shall be allocated for STAFF ports and PUBLIC (if required) ports. The cables shall be terminated and labeled sequentially on the patch panels. The Equipment Rack Layout will be provided by the contractor and shall obtain approval of the Owner’s Sys-tems Engineer. Voice cables are normally terminated on the 66 blocks mounted on the designated backboard space as shown in the MCR layout. Confirm with ISD Project Manager regarding voice cable termination in the MCR/TR.

7. Cable trays shall be Chatsworth Products, INC. (CPI) P/N 11252-713, black color.

8. All structural ironwork shall be UL-certified, providing the best bonding for static and grounding. Painted structural ironwork is not allowed.

9. Cable tray shall be of the tubular type construction. The tray shall be installed with the rungs on the topside of the tray. All attachments to drywall shall be on 3/4" plywood.

10. Cable tray shall be mounted at 7'3" above the finish floor. This will require the installation of a 3" (Black) spacer manufactured by B-Line Systems, INC., P/N STD108DET4 or the Chatsworth Cable Tray Elevation Kit (P/N: CPI 10506-702). The B-Line part number is not cataloged and requires special order. The 7'3" allows for the cable tray to be positioned over the 7' doorway.

11. Structural cable tray, relay racks, cabinets, systems, attachments and earthquake bracing shall comply with Zone 4 earthquake, NEMA, NEC and TIA/EIA-569 standards. Floor mounting hardware shall be a 3/8" bolt, lock washer, flat washer, with anchor in the floor, quantity as required.


16850-7

12. All exposed cut and sharp edges shall be deburred and filed to a safe finish. Cable tray runway ends shall be capped with a black rubber cap.

13. Relay racks shall be high strength aluminum construction with universal 5/8"-5/8"-1/2" tapped mounting hole #12-24 thread pattern on both front and rear. Designed and seismic built to the EIA-310C Standard.

14. All cable tray and racks shall be individually grounded to the Telecoms Ground Bus Bar using the standard ground lug and #6 AWG stranded ground copper wire with "Green" jacket or insulation. Daisy chaining the ground wire between racks is not allowed.

15. The Communications Contractor shall install, position, reposition, or remove racks and equipment as required without disruption of ongoing services. The Communications Contractor shall furnish extension cables, power taps, or temporary racks if needed.

2.5 GROUNDING

A. Comply with requirements in Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." for grounding conductors and connectors.

B. Telecommunications Main Bus Bar:

1. Connectors: Mechanical type, cast silicon bronze, solderless exothermic-type wire terminals, and long-barrel, two-bolt connection to ground bus bar.

2. Ground Bus Bar: Copper, minimum 1/4 inch thick by 4 inches wide with 9/32-inch holes spaced 1-1/8 inches apart.

3. Stand-Off Insulators: Comply with UL 891 for use in switchboards, 600 V. Lexan or PVC, impulse tested at 5000 V.

C. Comply with J-STD-607-A.

2.6 LABELING

A. Comply with TIA/EIA-606-A and UL 969 for a system of labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers.

3. PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 ENTRANCE FACILITIES

A. Contact telecommunications service provider and arrange for installation of demarcation point, protected entrance terminals, and a housing when so directed by service provider.

B. Comply with requirements in Division 16 Section "Pathways for Communications Systems" for materials and installation requirements for underground pathways.

3.2 INSTALLATION


B. Comply with BICSI TDMM for layout and installation of communications equipment rooms.


16850-8

C. Bundle, lace, and train conductors and cables to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Install lacing bars and distribution spools.

D. Coordinate layout and installation of communications equipment with Owner's telecommunications and LAN equipment and service suppliers. Coordinate service entrance arrangement with local exchange carrier.

1. Meet jointly with telecommunications and LAN equipment suppliers, local exchange carrier representatives, and Owner to exchange information and agree on details of equipment arrangements and installation interfaces.

2. Record agreements reached in meetings and distribute them to other participants.

3. Adjust arrangements and locations of distribution frames, cross-connects, and patch panels in equipment rooms to accommodate and optimize arrangement and space requirements of telephone switch and LAN equipment.

4. Adjust arrangements and locations of equipment with distribution frames, cross-connects, and patch panels of cabling systems of other communications, electronic safety and security, and related systems that share space in the equipment room.

E. Coordinate location of power raceways and receptacles with locations of communications equipment requiring electrical power to operate.

3.3 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Division 16 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Communications Pathways and Cabling."

3.4 FIRESTOPPING

A. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

B. Comply with TIA-569-B, Annex A, "Firestopping."

C. Comply with BICSI TDMM, "Firestopping Systems" Article.

3.5 GROUNDING

A. Install grounding according to BICSI TDMM, "Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical Protection" Chapter.

B. Comply with J-STD-607-A.

C. Locate grounding bus bar to minimize the length of bonding conductors. Fasten to wall allowing at least 2-inch clearance behind the grounding bus bar. Connect grounding bus bar with a minimum No. 4 AWG grounding electrode conductor from grounding bus bar to suitable electrical building ground.

D. Bond metallic equipment to the grounding bus bar, using not smaller than No. 6 AWG equipment grounding conductor.


16850-9

1. Bond the shield of shielded cable to the grounding bus bar in communications rooms and spaces.

3.6 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, and cabling complying with TIA/EIA-606-A. Comply with requirements in Division 16 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Comply with requirements in Division 09 Section "Interior Painting" for painting backboards. For fire-resistant plywood, do not paint over manufacturer's label.

C. Paint and label colors for equipment identification Shall comply with TIA/EIA-606-A for Class 2 level of administration including optional identification requirements of this standard.

D. Labels shall be preprinted or computer-printed type.

END OF SECTION

LA MIRADA LIBRARY COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING 16860-1

SECTION 16860

COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING


1. PART 1 GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Pathways.

2. UTP cable.

3. 50/125-micrometer, optical fiber cabling.

4. Coaxial cable.

5. Cable connecting hardware, patch panels, and cross-connects.

6. Cabling identification products.

B. Related Sections:


1.3 DEFINITIONS


B. Cross-Connect: A facility enabling the termination of cable elements and their interconnection or cross-connection.

C. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.

D. IDC: Insulation displacement connector.

E. LAN: Local area network.

F. RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer.

G. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.

1.4 BACKBONE CABLING DESCRIPTION


A. Backbone cabling system shall provide interconnections between communications equipment rooms, main terminal space, and entrance facilities in the telecommunications cabling system structure. Cabling system consists of backbone cables, intermediate and main cross-connects, mechanical terminations, and patch cords or jumpers used for backbone-to-backbone cross-connection.

B. Backbone cabling cross-connects may be located in communications equipment rooms or at en-trance facilities. Bridged taps and splitters shall not be used as part of backbone cabling.


A. General Performance: Backbone cabling system shall comply with transmission standards in TIA/EIA-568-B.1, when tested according to test procedures of this standard.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

1. For coaxial cable, include the following installation data for each type used:

a. Nominal OD.

b. Minimum bending radius.

c. Maximum pulling tension.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. System Labeling Schedules: Electronic copy of labeling schedules, in software and format selected by Owner.

2. System Labeling Schedules: Electronic copy of labeling schedules that are part of the cabling and asset identification system of the software.

Cabling administration drawings and printouts.

4. Wiring diagrams to show typical wiring schematics including the following:

a. Cross-connects.

b. Patch panels.

c. Patch cords.

5. Cross-connects and patch panels. Detail mounting assemblies, and show elevations and physical relationship between the installed components.

6. Cable tray layout, showing cable tray route to scale, with relationship between the tray and adjacent structural, electrical, and mechanical elements. Include the following:

a. Vertical and horizontal offsets and transitions.

b. Clearances for access above and to side of cable trays.

c. Vertical elevation of cable trays above the floor or bottom of ceiling structure.

d. Load calculations to show dead and live loads as not exceeding manufacturer's rating for tray and its support elements.



A. Qualification Data: For Installer, qualified layout technician, installation supervisor, and field in-spector.

B. Source quality-control reports. C. Material Safety Data Sheets.

D. Field quality-control reports.

E. Maintenance Data: For splices and connectors to include in maintenance manuals.

1.8 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation:

1. Software operating and upgrade manuals.

2. Program Software Backup: On magnetic media or compact disk, complete with data files.

3. Device address list.

4. Printout of software application and graphic screens.



1. Layout Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings, Cabling Administration Drawings, and field testing program development by an RCDD.

2. Installation Supervision: Installation shall be under the direct supervision of Level 2 In-staller, who shall be present at all times when Work of this Section is performed at Project site.

3. Testing Supervisor: Currently certified by BICSI as an RCDD to supervise on-site testing.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by BICSI as an RCDD to supervise on-site testing.

C. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.

2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

E. Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces: Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A.

F. Grounding: Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A.



A. Test cables upon receipt at Project site.

1. Test optical fiber cable to determine the continuity of the strand end to end. Use optical loss test set.

2. Test optical fiber cable while on reels. Use an optical time domain reflectometer to verify the cable length and locate cable defects, splices, and connector, including the loss value of each. Retain test data and include the record in maintenance data.

3. Test each pair of UTP cable for open and short circuits.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cables and connecting materials until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

1.12 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of telecommunications pathways and cabling with Owner's tele-communications and LAN equipment and service suppliers.

2. PART 2 PRODUCTS


A. All materials and equipment shall be new, unused and manufactured within eighteen months prior to installation. Where applicable, all materials and equipment shall be listed by Underwriters La-boratories.

2.2 PATHWAYS

A. General Requirements: Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A.

B. Cable Support: NRTL labeled for support of Category 6 cabling, designed to prevent degradation of cable performance and pinch points that could damage cable.

1. Support brackets with cable tie slots for fastening cable ties to brackets.

2. Lacing bars, spools, J-hooks, and D-rings.

3. Straps and other devices.

C. Cable Trays:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Cable Management Solutions, Inc.

b. Cablofil Inc.

c. Cooper B-Line, Inc.

d. Cope - Tyco/Allied Tube & Conduit.

e. GS Metals Corp.


2. Cable Tray Material: Metal, suitable for indoors, and protected against corrosion by elec-troplated zinc galvanizing, complying with ASTM B 633, Type 1, not less than 0.000472 inches thick.

a. Ladder Cable Trays: Nominally 12 inches wide, and a rung spacing of 12 inch-es.

D. Conduit and Boxes: Comply with requirements in Division 16 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems." Flexible metal conduit shall not be used.

1. Outlet boxes shall be no smaller than 2 inches wide, 3 inches high, and 2-1/2 inches deep.

2.3 CABLING SYSTEM

A. Patch Cables

1. The Communications Contractor shall furnish patch cords per length, color and quantity as required by DBT's design and confirmed by the Owner’s Systems Engineer.

2. Patch cords shall be Panduit Category 6, 23 AWG stranded, 4-pair assemblies with RJ45 plugs on both end, straight through (no pair reversals), and "slender strain" relief and "clear" boot type, Category 6, UTPSP, patch cords. The Communications Contractor shall be responsible for the installation and dressing of all patch cables in the MCR, TR and Workstations based on the Patch Schedule provided the the Owner’s Systems Manager.

2.4 DISTRIBUTION CABLING (WHERE APPLICABLE)

A. Voice Cabling

1. The Communications Contractor shall provide, install and terminate an appropriately sized, CMR or CMP rated cable (as determined by the the Owner’s Systems Engineer), to provide connectivity between the MPOE and TR/MCR.

2. Backbone cables shall be installed separately from the station cables. Where both cables are installed in a cable tray or wire way, backbone cables shall be installed first and bun-dled separately from the station cables.

B. Fiber Optic Cabling

1. If required, fiber optic cable shall be jacketed as appropriate for use in an underground environment.

2. The cable shall be composite, tight buffered, all dielectric, Kevlar strength members with polyethylene outer jacket (medium or high density) with 600 lbs pull-strength. Individual fi-bers shall be covered with a 900-micron primary buffer. Corning Cable Systems Indoor and Outdoor Buffer Tube Fan-Out Kits shall be used on both ends of the fiber cable to provide the ultimate fiber strand protection and management for the field installation of connectors and for the termination of 12-fiber buffer tubes. Corning Cable Systems Standard Recommended Procedures shall be followed when installing the Fan-Out kits. The cable shall contain continuous glass with Corning or Lucent Technologies glass only, and no splices.


3. The cable shall consist of 8 Multi-mode fibers and 4 Single-mode fibers and shall meet or exceed the following specifications.

a. Multi-mode: diameter (microns) 50/125 Laser Optimized Multi-mode fiber (LOMMF); dual window (850/1300): maximum attenuation @ 850/1300 nm < 3.15/1.5 db/Km: minimum bandwidth (MHz-km) @ 850/1300 nm, 160/500: grad-ed index.

b. Single-mode: diameter (microns) 8.3/125: dual window (1310/1550) maximum attenuation @ 110/1550 nm, <4.3 db/km.

c. The Communications Contractor shall ensure that the multi-mode fiber optic ca-bles can support FDDI, 100Base-FX, and 1000Base-FX,10GBBASE-S, and 10GBASE-LX4 protocols, and the single-mode fiber optic cables can support 1000Base-LX, 1000Base-SX protocols, 10GBASE-LX4, and 10GBASE-L.

d. The Communications Contractor shall furnish and install a rack-mounted 12-port fiber distribution enclosure by Siecor or equivalent, fully equipped with couplers in the MCR.

Note: The Fiber Patch Panel Assemblies shall be mounted above the core chassis on the relay racks or as shown on the Equipment Rack Layout provided by the the Owner’s Systems Engineer.

e. The Communications Contractor shall furnish, install and terminate all fiber optic strands on ceramic type of ferrule connectors in each distribution enclosure or fi-ber distribution panel, install LC or SC type of connectors for the multi-mode ca-bles and LC or SC for the single-mode cables as required or directed by the the Owner’s Systems Engineer.

1. The Communications Contractor shall also furnish and install one-inch diameter inner-duct (orange color) for the complete fiber runs.

9. The Communications Contractor shall furnish and install each span of the fiber optic cables in one continuous length, no splices, utilizing building conduits and sleeves.

h. The Communications Contractor shall provide hardware for termination and ca-ble securing, such as clamps, tie-raps, soft buffer, spiral wrap or split loom, LC connectors, etc.

The Communications Contractor shall leave at least ten (10) feet of fiber optic cables slack on top of cable tray.

The Communications Contractor shall provide other services, if required, to complete, such as: tighten barrel connectors, secure cable to fiber distribution panel, and install connectors to couplers, place fiber distribution enclosures in rack.

k. The Communications contractor shall provide fiber patch cords per type, (LC/LC, SC/SC OR LC/SC), length, color and quantity required or specified by the the Owner’s Systems Engineer.

2.5 BACKBOARDS

A. Backboards: Plywood, fire-retardant treated,3/4 by 48 by 96 inches. Comply with requirements in Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for plywood backing panels.



2. Plywood shall contain no added Urea formaldehyde.

3. Plywood shall be FSC certified.

2.6 UTP CABLE

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Superior Essex Inc.

2. Belden CDT Inc.; Electronics Division.

3. West Penn

4. Berk-Tek; a Nexans company.

5. General Cable

6. Panduit

B. Description: 100-ohm, 100-pair UTP, formed into 25-pair binder groups covered with a gray thermoplastic jacket.

1. Comply with ICEA S-90-661 for mechanical properties.

2. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-8.1 for performance specifications.

3. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2, Category 6.

4. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying with UL 444 and NFPA 70 for the following types:

a. Communications, Plenum Rated: Type CMP or MPP, complying with NFPA 262.

b. Multipurpose, Plenum Rated: Type MPP, complying with NFPA 262.

2.7 UTP CABLE HARDWARE

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. American Technology Systems Industries, Inc.

2. Dynacom Corporation.


4. KRONE Incorporated.

5. Leviton Voice & Data Division.

6. Molex Premise Networks; a division of Molex, Inc.

7. Nordex/CDT; a subsidiary of Cable Design Technologies.

8. Panduit Corp.


9. Siemon Co. (The).

10. Tyco Electronics/AMP Netconnect; Tyco International Ltd.

B. General Requirements for Cable Connecting Hardware: Comply with TIA/EIA-568-13.2, IDC type, with modules designed for punch-down caps or tools. Cables shall be terminated with connecting hardware of same category or higher.

C. Connecting Blocks: 66-style IDC for Category 5e. Provide blocks for the number of cables termi-nated on the block, plus 25 percent spare. Integral with connector bodies, including plugs and jacks where indicated.

D. Cross-Connect: Modular array of connecting blocks arranged to terminate building cables and permit interconnection between cables.

1. Number of Terminals per Field: One for each conductor in assigned cables.

E. Patch Panel: Modular panels housing multiple-numbered jack units with IDC-type connectors at each jack for permanent termination of pair groups of installed cables.

1. Number of Jacks per Field: One for each four-pair UTP cable indicated.

F. Jacks and Jack Assemblies: Modular, color-coded, eight-position modular receptacle units with integral IDC-type terminals.

G. Patch Cords: Provide (2)CAT6 Factory-made, 4-pair cables patch cords per UTP port within pro-ject's scope of work. Lengths shall be as follows: 1/3-3', 1/3-6', 1/3-9'. Verify with owner if additional cables are required; terminated with 8-position modular plug at each end.

1. Patch cords shall have bend-relief-compliant boots and color-coded icons to ensure Cat-egory 6 performance. Patch cords shall have latch guards to protect against snagging.

2. Patch cords shall have color-coded boots for circuit.identification.

2.8 OPTICAL FIBER CABLE

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering prod-ucts that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:



3. West Penn


5. General Cable

6. Panduit

B. Description: Multimode, 50/125-micrometer, 8 multi-mode fiber and 4 single-mode,tight buffer, op-tical fiber cable.


2. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.3 for performance specifications.

3. Comply with TIA/EIA-492AAAA-B for detailed specifications.


4. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying with UL 444, UL 1651, and NFPA 70 for the following types:

a. Plenum Rated, Nonconductive: Type OFNP, complying with NFPA 262.

b. Plenum Rated, Conductive: Type OFCP or OFNP, complying with NFPA 262.

5. Maximum Attenuation: 3.50 dB/km at 850 nm; 1.5 dB/km at 1300 nm.

6. Minimum Modal Bandwidth: 160 MHz-km at 850 nm; 500 MHz-km at 1300 nm.

C. Jacket:

1. Jacket Color: Aqua for 50/125-micrometer cable.

2. Cable cordage jacket, fiber, unit, and group color shall be according to TIA/EIA-598-B.

3. Imprinted with fiber count, fiber type, and aggregate length at regular intervals not to ex-ceed 40 inches.

2.9 OPTICAL FIBER CABLE HARDWARE


1. ADC.



4. Corning Cable Systems.

5. Dynacom Corporation.



8. Nordex/CDT: a subsidiary of Cable Design Technologies.

9. Optical Connectivity Solutions Division; Emerson Network Power.


B. Cross-Connects and Patch Panels: Modular panels housing multiple-numbered, duplex cable connectors.

1. Number of Connectors per Field: One for each fiber of cable or cables assigned to field, plus spares and blank positions adequate to suit specified expansion criteria.

C. Patch Cords: Factory-made, dual-fiber cables in 36-inch lengths.

D. Cable Connecting Hardware:

1. Comply with Optical Fiber Connector Intermateability Standards (FOCIS) specifications of TIA/EIA-604-2, TIA/EIA-604-3-A, and TIA/EIA-604-12. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.3.


2. Quick-connect, simplex and duplex, Type SC or Type LC connectors per the Owner’s. Insertion loss not more than 0.75 dB.

3. Type SFF connectors may be used in termination racks, panels, and equipment packages.

2.10 COAXIAL CABLE




3. West Penn


5. General Cable

6. Panduit

B. General Coaxial Cable Requirements: Broadband type, recommended by cable manufacturer specifically for broadband data transmission applications. Coaxial cable and accessories shall have 75-ohm nominal impedance with a return loss of 20 dB maximum from 7 to 806 MHz.

C. RG-11/U: NFPA 70, Type CATV.

1. No. 14 AWG, solid, copper-covered steel conductor.

2. Gas-injected, foam-PE insulation.

3. Double shielded with 100 percent aluminum polyester tape and 60 percent aluminum braid.

4. Jacketed with sunlight-resistant, black PVC or PE.

5. Suitable for outdoor installations in ambient temperatures ranging from minus 40 to plus 85 deg C.

D. RG-6/U: NFPA 70, Type CATV or CM.

1. No. 16 AWG, solid, copper-covered steel conductor; gas-injected, foam-PE insulation.

2. Double shielded with 100 percent aluminum-foil shield and 60 percent aluminum braid.

3. Jacketed with black PVC or PE.

4. Suitable for indoor installations.

E. NFPA and UL compliance, listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdic-tion as complying with UL 1655 and with NFPA 70, "Radio and Television Equipment" and "Com-munity Antenna Television and Radio Distribution" Articles. Types are as follows:

1. CATV Cable: Type CATV, or CATVP or CATVR.

2. CATV Plenum Rated: Type CATVP, complying with NFPA 262.


2.11 COAXIAL CABLE HARDWARE


1. Aim Electronics; a brand of Emerson Electric Co.

2. Blonder Tongue

3. Pico Macom



B. Coaxial-Cable Connectors: Type BNC, 75 ohms.

2.12 GROUNDING

A. Comply with requirements in Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." for grounding conductors and connectors.

B. Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A.

2.13 IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A. Comply with TIA/EIA-606-A and UL 969 for a system of labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers.


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to evaluate cables.

B. Factory test cables on reels according to TIA/EIA-568-B.1.

C. Factory test UTP cables according to TIA/EIA-568-B.2.

D. Factory test multimode optical fiber cables according to TIA/EIA-526-14-A and TIA/EIA-568-B.3.

E. Cable will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3. PART 3 EXECUTION


A. Coordinate backbone cabling with the protectors and demarcation point provided by communica-tions service provider.

3.2 WIRING METHODS

A. Wiring Method: Install cables in raceways and cable trays except within consoles, cabinets, desks, and counters and except in accessible ceiling spaces, in attics, and in gypsum board partitions where unenclosed wiring method may be used. Conceal raceway and cables except in unfinished spaces.

1. Install plenum cable in environmental air spaces, including plenum ceilings.


2. Comply with requirements for raceways and boxes specified in Division 16 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems."

B. Wiring Method: Conceal conductors and cables in accessible ceilings, walls, and floors where possible.

C. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train cables within enclosures. Connect to terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Provide and use lacing bars and distribution spools.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF PATHWAYS

A. Cable Trays: Comply with NEMA VE 2 and TIA/EIA-569-A.

B. Comply with requirements for demarcation point, pathways, cabinets, and racks specified in Division 16 Section "Communications Equipment Room Fittings." Drawings indicate general arrangement of pathways and fittings.

C. Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A for pull-box sizing and length of conduit and number of bends between pull points.

D. Comply with requirements in Division 16 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems" for installation of conduits and wireways.

E. Install manufactured conduit sweeps and long-radius elbows whenever possible.

F. Pathway Installation in Communications Equipment Rooms:

Position conduit ends adjacent to a corner on backboard where a single piece of plywood is installed, or in the corner of room where multiple sheets of plywood are installed around perimeter walls of room.

2. Install cable trays to route cables if conduits cannot be located in these positions.

3. Secure conduits to backboard when entering room from overhead.

4. Extend conduits 3 inches above finished floor.

5. Install metal conduits with grounding bushings and connect with grounding conductor to grounding system.

G. Backboards: Install backboards with 96-inch dimension vertical. Butt adjacent sheets tightly, and form smooth gap-free corners and joints.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF CABLES


B. General Requirements for Cabling:

1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1.

2. Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 6, "Cable Termination Practices."

3. Install 110-style IDC termination hardware unless otherwise indicated.

4. Terminate all conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make termina-tions only at indicated outlets, terminals, cross-connects, and patch panels.


5. Cables may not be spliced. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches and not more than 6 inches from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals.

6. Install lacing bars to restrain cables, to prevent straining connections, and to prevent bending cables to smaller radii than minimums recommended by manufacturer.

7. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in BICSI ITSIM, "Cabling Termination Practices" Chapter. Use lacing bars and distribution spools.

8. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged dur-ing installation and replace it with new cable.

9. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling. Heat lamps shall not be used for heating.

10. In the communications equipment room, install a 10-foot- long service loop on each end of cable.

11. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 4, "Pulling Cable." Monitor cable pull ten-sions.

C. UTP Cable Installation:


2. Do not untwist UTP cables more than 1/2 inch from the point of termination to maintain cable geometry.

D. Optical Fiber Cable Installation:

Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.3.

2. Cable may be terminated on connecting hardware that is rack or cabinet mounted.

E. Open-Cable Installation:

1. Install cabling with horizontal and vertical cable guides in telecommunications spaces with terminating hardware and interconnection equipment.

2. Suspend UTP cable not in a wireway or pathway, a minimum of 8 inches above ceilings by cable supports not more than 60 inches apart.

3. Cable shall not be run through structural members or in contact with pipes, ducts, or other potentially damaging items.

F. Outdoor Coaxial Cable Installation:

1. Install outdoor connections in enclosures complying with NEMA 250, Type 4X. Install cor-rosion-resistant connectors with properly designed 0-rings to keep out moisture.

2. Attach antenna lead-in cable to support structure at intervals not exceeding 36 inches.

G. Group connecting hardware for cables into separate logical fields.


H. Separation from EMI Sources:

1. Comply with BICSI TDMM and TIA/EIA-569-A recommendations for separating unshielded copper voice and data communication cable from potential EMI sources, including electrical power lines and equipment.

2. Separation between open communications cables or cables in nonmetallic raceways and unshielded power conductors and electrical equipment shall be as follows:

a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 5 inches.

b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches.

c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 24 inches.

3. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and unshield-ed power lines or electrical equipment shall be as follows:

a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 2-1/2 inches.



4. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and power lines and electrical equipment located in grounded metallic conduits or enclosures shall be as follows:

a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: No requirement.



5. Separation between Communications Cables and Electrical Motors and Transformers, 5 kVA or HP and Larger: A minimum of 48 inches.

6. Separation between Communications Cables and Fluorescent Fixtures: A minimum of 5 inches.

3.5 FIRESTOPPING


B. Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A, Annex A, "Firestopping."


3.6 GROUNDING


B. Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A.

C. Locate grounding bus bar to minimize the length of bonding conductors. Fasten to wall allowing at least 2-inch clearance behind the grounding bus bar. Connect grounding bus bar with a minimum No. 4 AWG grounding electrode conductor from grounding bus bar to suitable


electrical building ground. D. Bond metallic equipment to the grounding bus bar, using not smaller than No. 6 AWG equipment grounding conductor.

3.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, and cabling complying with TIA/EIA-606-A. Comply with re-quirements for identification specified in Division 16 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Administration Class: 1.

2. Color-code cross-connect fields and apply colors to voice and data service backboards, connections, covers, and labels.

B. Comply with requirements in Division 09 Section "Interior Painting" for painting backboards. For fire-resistant plywood, do not paint over manufacturer's label.

C. Paint and label colors for equipment identification shall comply with TIA/EIA-606-A for Class 1 level of administration including optional identification requirements of this standard.

D. Comply with requirements in Division 16 Section "Communications Horizontal Cabling" for cable and asset management software.

E. Cable Schedule: Install in a prominent location in each equipment room and wiring closet. List in-coming and outgoing cables and their designations, origins, and destinations. Protect with rigid frame and clear plastic cover. Furnish an electronic copy of final comprehensive schedules for Project.

F. Cabling Administration Drawings: Show building floor plans with cabling administration-point label-ing. Identify labeling convention and show labels for telecommunications closets, backbone path-ways and cables, entrance pathways and cables, terminal hardware and positions, horizontal ca-bles, work areas and workstation terminal positions, grounding buses and pathways, and equip-ment grounding conductors.

G. Cable and Wire Identification:

1. Label each cable within 4 inches of each termination and tap, where it is accessible in a cabinet or junction or outlet box, and elsewhere as indicated.

2. Each wire connected to building-mounted devices is not required to be numbered at de-vice if color of wire is consistent with associated wire connected and numbered within panel or cabinet.

3. Exposed Cables and Cables in Cable Trays and Wire Troughs: Label each cable at inter-vals not exceeding 15 feet.

4. Label each terminal strip and screw terminal in each cabinet, rack, or panel.

a. Individually number wiring conductors connected to terminal strips and identify each cable or wiring group being extended from a panel or cabinet to a building-mounted device with name and number of particular device as shown.

b. Label each unit and field within distribution racks and frames.

5. Identification within Connector Fields in Equipment Rooms and Wiring Closets: Label each connector and each discrete unit of cable-terminating and connecting hardware. Where similar jacks and plugs are used for both voice and data communication cabling, use a different color for jacks and plugs of each service.


H. Labels shall be preprinted or computer-printed type with printing area and font color that contrasts with cable jacket color but still complies with requirements in TIA/EIA 606-A, for the following:

Cables use flexible vinyl or polyester that flexes as cables are bent.


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Perform tests and inspections.

C. Tests and Inspections:

Visually inspect UTP and optical fiber jacket materials for NRTL certification markings. Inspect cabling terminations in communications equipment rooms for compliance with color-coding for pin assignments, and inspect cabling connections for compliance with TIA/EIA-568-13.1.

2. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equipment and patch cords, and labeling of all components.

3. Test UTP copper cabling for DC loop resistance, shorts, opens, intermittent faults, and polarity between conductors. Test operation of shorting bars in connection blocks. Test cables after termination but not cross-connection.

a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA/EIA-568- B.2. Perform tests with a tester that complies with performance requirements in "Test Instruments (Normative)" Annex, complying with measurement accuracy specified in "Measurement Accuracy (Informative)" Annex. Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test configuration.

4. Optical Fiber Cable Tests:

a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TINEIA-568-13.1. Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment man-ufacturer for channel or link test configuration.

b. Link End-to-End Attenuation Tests:

1) Horizontal and multimode backbone link measurements: Test at 850 or 1300 nm in 1 direction according to TIA/EIA-526-14-A, Method B, One Reference Jumper.

2) Attenuation test results for backbone links shall be less than 2.0 dB. Attenuation test results shall be less than that calculated according to equation in TIA/EIA-568-B.1.

D. Data for each measurement shall be documented. Data for submittals shall be printed in a sum-mary report that is formatted similar to Table 10.1 in BICSI TDMM, or transferred from the instru-ment to the computer, saved as text files, and printed and submitted.

E. Remove and replace cabling where test results indicate that they do not comply with specified re-quirements.

F. End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

G. Prepare test and inspection reports.


3.9 CABLE TESTING

A. General

1. All testing shall be per the Los Angeles County STD-902 Testing Standard. An orientation with the the Owner’s Systems Engineer shall take place on site prior to the test. It shall be scheduled at least one week in advance. the Owner’s Systems Engineer shall certify prior to testing the following:

2. Test meters have been calibrated to TIA/EIA Standard within the last 12 months. With a Certificate of Compliance, meter serial number and dated.

3. Test meter shall be fully charged.

4. Test configuration set to the County Standards.

5. Manufacturer's warranty certification (if applicable) requirements shall be reviewed to en-sure that all warranty requirements are met.

6. The Communications Contractor shall furnish one (1) printed copy and one copy on CD-ROM, with the complete set of test results. Copies of PC based software to view drawings and results shall also be provided to the the Owner’s Systems Engineer.

B. Communications Contractor Requirements

Communications Contractor shall provide sufficient skilled labor to complete testing within the agreed upon test period. Testing shall commence no later than ________________ and be completed no later than ____________

2. Communications Contractor shall have a minimum of 3 years experience installing and testing structured cabling systems. All installers assigned by the Contractor to the installation shall have factory certification that they are qualified to install and test the provided products.

3. Communications Contractor is responsible for supplying all of the required test equipment used to conduct acceptance tests.

4. Communications Contractor is responsible for submitting acceptance documentation as defined in section 3.7.5 below.

C. Test Process

1. The County reserves the right to be present during any or all of testing.

2. Testing shall be of the Permanent Link. However, the Communications Contractor shall warrant performance based on Channel performance and provide patch cords that meet channel performance.

3. All cabling not tested strictly in accordance with these procedures shall be re-tested at no additional cost to the County.

4. 100% of the installed voice and data cabling must be tested. All tests must pass ac-ceptance criteria defined in E.4.

5. Test equipment shall be fully charged prior to each days testing.

D. Standards Compliance & Test Requirements

1. Cabling must meet the indicated performance specifications:


TIA 568B Category 6

TIA 568A Category 6

2. All test equipment used must meet the performance specifications defined in Section F below.

E. Documentation

1. Test reports must be submitted in hardcopy and electronic format. Hand-written test reports are not acceptable.

2. Hardcopy reports are to be submitted in labeled 3 ring binders with an attached affidavit verifying passing execution of all tests. For large installations electronic reports with hard-copy summaries are preferred. Hardcopy summary reports shall contain the following information on each row of the report: circuit ID, test specification used, length, date of test, and pass/fail result.

3. Electronic reports are to be submitted on CD-ROM only. If proprietary software is required to view test results, the software shall be provided to the Owner’s Systems Engineer. If the results are delivered in a standard format like Excel, Access, CSV files, etc. then software to read these files need not be provided. Electronic reports must be accompanied by a Cer-tificate signed by an authorized representative of the Contractor warranting the truth and accuracy of the electronic report. Certificate must reference traceable circuit numbers that match the electronic record.

4. Test reports shall include the following information for each cabling element tested:

a. Wiremap results that indicate the cabling has no shorts, opens, miswires, split, reversed, or crossed pairs, and end to end connectivity is achieved.

b. For Category 6 cabling: Attenuation, NEXT, PSNEXT, Return Loss, ELFEXT, and PSELFEXT data that indicate the worst case result, the frequency at which it occurs, the limit at that point, and the margin. These tests shall be performed in a swept frequency manner from 1 MHz to highest relevant frequency, using a swept frequency interval that is consistent with TIA and ISO requirements. In-formation shall be provided for all pairs or pair combinations and in both direc-tions when required by the appropriate standards. Any individual test that fails the relevant performance specification shall be marked as a FAIL.

c. Length (in meters), propagation delay, and delay skew relative to the relevant limit. Any individual test that fails the relevant performance specification shall be marked as a FAIL.

d. Cable manufacturer, cable model number/type, and NVP

e. Tester manufacturer, model, serial number, hardware version, and software ver-sion

f. Circuit ID number and project name

9. Autotest specification used

h. Overall pass/fail indication

Date of test


Test reports shall be submitted within 7 business days of completion of testing.

F. Test Equipment

1. Test equipment used under this contract shall be from manufacturers that have a minimum of 5 years experience in producing field test equipment. Manufacturers must be ISO 9001 certified.

2. All test tools of a given type shall be from the same manufacturer, and have compatible electronic results output.

3. Test adapter cables must be approved by the manufacturer of the test equipment. Adapters from other sources are not acceptable.

4. Baseline accuracy of the test equipment must exceed TIA Level III, as indicated by independent laboratory testing.

5. Test equipment must be capable of certifying Category 6 links.

6. Test equipment must be capable of storing full frequency sweep data for all tests and drawing color graphical reports for all swept measurements.

7. Test equipment must include S-Band time domain diagnostics for NEXT and return loss (TDNXT and TDRL) for accurate and efficient troubleshooting.

8. Test equipment must be capable of running individual NEXT, return loss, etc measurements in addition to autotests. Individual tests increase productivity when diagnosing faults.

9. Test equipment must include a the Owner’s of cable types, sorted by major manufacturer.

10. Test equipment must store Category 6 autotests in internal memory.

11. Test equipment must be able to internally group autotests and cables in project folders for good records management.

12. Test equipment must include DSP technology for support of advanced measurements.

13. Test equipment must make swept frequency measurements in compliance with TIA standards.

14. The measurement reference plane of the test equipment shall start immediately at the output of the test equipment interface connector. There shall not be a time domain dead zone of any distance that excludes any part of the link from the measurement.

G. Fiber

1. The Communications Contractor shall perform end-to-end fiber optic strand testing per Los Angeles County Fiber Testing Standard with the following minimum quality levels: Optical Time Domain Reflectometer (OTDR) with drawings (both directions) and absolute dB loss (power meter), at 850 nanometers for multi-mode and 1310 nanometers for single-mode. All fiber optic cable lengths less than 600 feet shall require a certified kilometer to be


used with the OTDR testing equipment. After testing on the reel has been successfully completed, fiber optic system shall be installed with all patch cords attached and then the entire channel shall be tested.

2. The Communications Contractor shall perform two sets of OTDR drawings with the above mentioned minimum quality levels. The first OTDR reading and drawings must be done on-site and submitted to the County Project Manager prior to the utilization of the fiber, and the second OTDR reading and drawings must be done after installation.

3. Upon completion of the fiber optic portion of this project, the Communications Contractor shall provide two complete sets of OTDR traces on 8 1/2x 11" sheets. The Communications Contractor shall annotate on each OTDR trace 1) direction of test per strand (from-to); 2) bundle number; 3) buffer color and 4) strand color. Communications Contractor-provided representations of the test data are not acceptable.

END OF SECTION

LA MIRADA LIBRARY COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 16860-1

SECTION 16860

COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING


1. PART 1 GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Con-ditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. UTP cabling.

2. 50/125-micrometer, optical fiber cabling.

3. Coaxial cable.

4. Multiuser telecommunications outlet assemblies.

5. Cable connecting hardware, patch panels, and cross-connects.

6. Telecommunications outlet/connectors.

7. Cabling system identification products.

8. Cable management system.


1. Division 16 Section "Communications Backbone Cabling" for voice and data cabling associated with system panels and devices.


1.3 DEFINITIONS


B. Consolidation Point: A location for interconnection between horizontal cables extending from building pathways and horizontal cables extending into furniture pathways.


C. Cross-Connect: A facility enabling the termination of cable elements and their interconnec-tion or cross-connection. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.

D. IDC: Insulation displacement connector.

E. LAN: Local area network.

F. Outlet/Connectors: A connecting device in the work area on which horizontal cable or outlet cable terminates.

G. RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer.

H. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.

1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordinate layout and installation of telecommunications cabling with Owner's telecommuni-cations and LAN equipment and service suppliers.

B. Coordinate telecommunications outlet/connector locations with location of power receptacles at each work area.




a. Nominal OD.



B. Shop Drawings:

1. System Labeling Schedules: Electronic copy of labeling schedules, in software and format selected by Owner.

2. System Labeling Schedules: Electronic copy of labeling schedules that are part of the cabling and asset identification system of the software.

3. Cabling administration drawings and printouts.

4. Wiring diagrams to show typical wiring schematics, including the following:

a. Cross-connects.

b. Patch panels.

c. Patch cords.

5. Cross-connects and patch panels. Detail mounting assemblies, and show eleva-tions and physical relationship between the installed components.


1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTAL

A. Qualification Data: For Installer, qualified layout technician, installation supervisor, and field inspector.

B. Source quality-control reports.

C. Field quality-control reports.


A. Maintenance Data: For splices and connectors to include in maintenance manuals.

B. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation:

1. Software operating and upgrade manuals.

2. Program Software Backup: On magnetic media or compact disk, complete with data files.

3. Device address list.

4. Printout of software application and graphic screens.



1. Layout Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings, Cabling Administration Draw-ings, and field testing program development by an RCDD.

2. Installation Supervision: Installation shall be under the direct supervision of Level 2 Installer, who shall be present at all times when Work of this Section is performed at Project site.

3. Testing Supervisor: Currently certified by BICSI as an RCDD to supervise on-site testing.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by BICSI as an RCDD to su-pervise on-site testing.



1. Test optical fiber cables to determine the continuity of the strand end to end. Use optical loss test set.

2. Test optical fiber cables while on reels. Use an optical time domain reflectometer to verify the cable length and locate cable defects, splices, and connector; including the loss value of each. Retain test data and include the record in maintenance data.



2. PART 2 PRODUCTS



2.2 HORIZONTAL CABLING DESCRIPTION

A. Horizontal cable and its connecting hardware provide the means of transporting signals be-tween the telecommunications outlet/connector and the horizontal cross-connect located in the communications equipment room. This cabling and its connecting hardware are called a "permanent link," a term that is used in the testing protocols.

1. TIA/EIA-568-B.1 requires that a minimum of two telecommunications out-let/connectors be installed for each work area.

2. Horizontal cabling shall contain no more than one transition point or consolidation point between the horizontal cross-connect and the telecommunications out-let/connector.

3. Bridged taps and splices shall not be installed in the horizontal cabling.

4. Splitters shall not be installed as part of the optical fiber cabling.

B. A work area is approximately 100 sq. ft., and includes the components that extend from the telecommunications outlet/connectors to the station equipment.

C. The maximum allowable horizontal cable length is 295 feet. This maximum allowable length does not include an allowance for the length of 16 feet to the workstation equipment or in the horizontal cross-connect.

2.3 CABLING SYSTEM

A. Station Cable (Voice/Data)

1. The Communications Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining a low voltage in-stallation permit from the appropriate authority prior to start of installation.

2. The Communications Contractor shall be responsible for consulting with the building inspector to determine whether there are special local requirements for strapping the cables in the attic area.

The Communications Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating with the building's General Contractor to determine the cable routings, schedules for cable placement and ceiling inspection.

4. The Communications Contractor shall provide installation of the cable hangers and sleeves that will support the horizontal cables in the attic area per all applicable local building code(s).

5. The Communications Contractor shall furnish and install voice/data locations, voice only locations, and data only locations as required.


6. The Communications Contractor shall furnish and install whips, wall plate adapters and floor plate adapters.

7. All voice/data outlets shall be furnished and installed complete with four (4) data jacks (Cat 6, RJ45) terminated with four (4) Cat6 plenum rated cables unless other-wise noted.

8. All data cables shall be General Cable GenSPEED 6000 Enhanced Category 6 plenum rated 23 AWG, 4-pair, blue jacket cables. No substitutions will be allowed without prior written approval from the the Owner’s Systems Engineer. All cables shall be installed from the station jack directly to the appropriate Cat 6 patch panels in the MCR. All cable pairs or modular jacks shall be wired to ANSIMA/EIA568-B using T568-A wiring scheme at both ends. All cables shall be tested to minimum Cat 6 standards.

9. The jack housings and faceplates shall have four (4) positions for jacks. Blank co-vers shall be installed in vacant jack positions. Jack housings and faceplates shall be compatible with the Panduit Mini-Corn Jacks. The type and color is to be deter-mined by the installed location. Some will be flush or non-flush. Modular furniture faceplates shall be color coordinated with the color of the furniture base plate. The Communications Contractor shall furnish and install the proper jack housings and faceplates. The Communications Contractor shall determine the type of faceplate prior to the scheduled installation and must be approved by the Owner’s Systems Engineer prior to use.

10. Floor monuments shall be flush mounted and fully adjustable with one (1) inch con-duit knockouts, unless otherwise noted on the plan. Depending on the amount of gang boxes required, Hubbell Floor Boxes B243641, B423341 or B433361 shall be used as required. Cover plate shall be Hubbell S3825. If applicable, corresponding carpet flanges shall be SB3083, SB3084 or SB3085. Any deviation must receive written approval from the the Owner’s Staff prior to use.

11. Floor monument mounting plates shall be Panduit CF-1064E1.

12. The Communications Contractor shall furnish and install patch panels and wire managers or organizers. Patch panels shall be provided for the STAFF areas. The patch panels shall be Panduit Mini-Corn 48 port all metal modular, part number CP48BLY. The horizontal wire organizers shall be Panduit WMPH2E and WMPSE as required. Furnish one (1) horizontal wire organizer per patch panel plus one (1) additional wire organizer at the top of each row of patch panels. Be sure to include the Panduit Mini-Corn Jacks on the patch panel. Vertical wire managers shall also be furnished and installed as required using Panduit WMPV45E or WMPVHC45E as specified in the Equipment Rack Elevation layout.

13. The RJ45 data jacks shall be wired according to TINEIA 568-B using the T568- A wiring scheme.

14. All jacks shall be modular Panduit Panduit Mini-Corn Jacks. All jacks (Cat 6, RJ45) shall be Panduit Mini-Corn Jacks part number CJ688TG . Provide (1) orange and (1) blue jacks at each location. Provide "Grey jack for the fax machine data outlet. No substitutions will be approved.

15. The STAFF areas shall use Orange jacks.


16. All voice/data jacks and patch panels shall be labeled according to Los Angeles County standard 902, Labels are to be typed or printed with a labeling device and permanently affixed. No hand written lettering is acceptable. The labels shall be printed on white tape with black lettering for jacks. Patch panels shall be labeled both front and back. The patch panel labels shall be black tape with white lettering, four (4) labels per strip. See the the Owner’s Systems Engineer if further clarification is needed.

Example: DXYYY77Z (Data jack) - D1001MCR, D1002MCR... VXYYY777 (Voice jack) - V1001MCR, V1002MCR...

B. D stands for data, V stands for Voice, X stands for floor level, YYY is jack number starting from 001, and Z77 is the serving patch panel or MCR/TR room. Alpha (A&B) lettering of data jacks in not allowed.

C. Data designation "D" and MCR shall not be required for the Patch Panel

labeling. Example: XYYY - 1001, 1002...

D. The MCRTTR end of the voice cables shall be terminated on the 66 blocks mounted in the designated location in the MCR/TR backboard. 66 block label starts from 1001, 1002, and so on.

1. All wire and cable runs in the ceiling area shall be supported with ceiling hangers, supplied and installed by the selected Communications Contractor. Cables must be supported at a space interval that is allowable by code. At no point shall cable(s) rest on acoustic ceiling grids, panels or lighting support wires, electrical conduit and HVAC pipes or ducts.

2. Cable shall be installed in continuous lengths (no splices allowed) from origin to MCR, using the shortest route possible, and shall be tight bundled in groups of no more than six-around-one, and combined bundles of six-around-one of not greater than three bundles or a total of 21 cables.

Likff an-1-cm

3. The data cables shall be bundled with a Velcro type of tie, such as Panduit HLS, HLM, HLC or equivalent. Do not use plastic ties on data cables.

4. Furnish and install flexible tubing (Seal Tite) to conceal wire runs into modular furniture or where needed to secure multiple exposed cables.

5. It shall be the responsibility of the Communications Contractor to determine and furnish the quantity of voice/data wire needed.


6. The Communications Contractor shall furnish and install three (3) Category 6 cables with three(3) Rj45 jacks; two (2) adjacent to the Fire Alarm Monitor Panel and one (1) adjacent to the Intrusion Alarm System. The other end of the alarm cable should terminate on a 66 blocks (not on the relay rack patch panel) near the Telco blocks at the MCR. This will be used to provide Telco dial tone to the alarm systems. The mb lines to be used will be ordered by County the Owner’s Systems Engineer. The Communications Contractor will cross-connect the alarm mb lines from the Telco block to the 66 block. The alarm contractor will terminate the lines into the alarm systems.

E. Workstation Outlets

a. Unless otherwise noted on the plans, each outlet location installed on the

wall, on the modular furniture system, or on the floor, shall be equipped with four (4) Category 6 RJ45 type data modular jacks, color-coded as follows: Orange (OR) jacks for the STAFF locations and Blue (BL) jacks for the PUBLIC locations as shown on the plan.

b. Each outlet location shall be provided with four (4) Cat 6 cables unless

otherwise -shown on the plan. The following are the data drops required for each location:

Staff Areas (Orange Jacks):

1. CLM/Librarian – 2/location 2. Staff Workroom – 2 /location 3. Delivery Vestibule – 2 and 1 Wall Phone 4. Circulation Desk – 2/location 5. Customer Service Desk – 2/location 6. Reference Desk – 2/location 7. Information Desk -2/location 8. POD – 2/location 9. Self-Checks – 2/location 10. AV Closet – 2 and 1 with TV Outlet 11. All TV Outlets – 1 12. Wireless Access Points – 2/location 13. Storage – 2/location 14. LAPTOP Vending – 2/location 15. Video Projectors – 1/location 16. Staff Lounge/Break room – 1 with TV Outlet and 1 Wall

Phone 17. MCR – 1 Wall Phone 18. Copier/FAX – 2/location

Public Areas (Blue Jacks):

1. Public (Adult, Teen, Children) Computers – 2/location 2. Print Release Station (PRS) – 4/location


3. OPACS – 2/location 4. Copier/Kiosk – 4/location 5. Friends of the Library – 2 6. Digital Signage – 2/location 7. Storage – 2/location 8. Group Study Rooms – 4/location

Meeting Room (Orange/Blue Jacks):

1. Podium/Lectern – 1OR/1BL 2. Coordinate number of data drops for the Meeting Room.

Quantity of cable drops will depend on the table and chair configuration.

3. Provide 1 Wall Phone (Location to be coordinated with ISD PM)

c. All jacks shall be Category 6, 8 position, 8 wire with termination cap color,

wired to the ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-B using the T568-A wiring scheme. All jacks shall be manufactured by Panduit (CJ688TGOR or CJ688TGBU). No brand substitutions will be accepted by the County.

d. Panduit (CFPE4) shall be used to mount jacks on a four- (4) module,

Electrical Ivory, faceplate for the wall.

e. Where outlet location is specified for a wall-mounted telephone, provide and install a voice cable terminated on a RJ45 jack with a single module faceplate by Panduit (Phone Plate with module - KWP3Y).

f. Provide and install appropriate faceplate extenders as determined by

modular furniture brand. The Communications Contractor shall determine bracket type and color prior to scheduled installation.

g. If faceplates are mounted to double gang boxes, the Communications

Contractor shall provide and install, as required, In-Wall box adapters as manufactured by Panduit.

h. The Communications Contractor shall be responsible to install cover plates

or blank modules of the appropriate color on any unused single or double gang boxes. Modules shall be Panduit (CMB).

i. The Communications Contractor shall furnish and install cross-connect

jumpers for telephone lines as required from the MPOE to MCR, between MCR's and IDF's and for faxes, modems, elevator phones, fire alarm and security systems, etc. as required.

j. Any deviation/substitution must be verified and approved in writing by the

ISD Project Manager prior to use.


F. Wireless Network Access Point Data Cables

1. Category 6 data cables will be used to provide connectivity between the Wireless Access Points (WAPs) and the data network switch in the MCR or Telecommunications Closets. Two (2) run of data cables terminated with RJ45 jacks shall be provided per AP location. The jacks shall be mounted on a biscuit with dual port mount or a junction box with a faceplate for dual jacks.

2. The Contractor shall run and position the data cables in the ceiling space and terminate the data cable on an RJ45 jack (orange color) mounted on the faceplate of a single gang box outlet installed below the ceiling). The Contractor shall patch the WAPs as required with "orange" patch cords (at device end) and "Yellow' patch cords on the patch panel.

3. The locations of Cisco WAPs and Category 6 cable runs will be determined following an RF survey or as per layout drawings provided by the the Owner’s Systems Engineer.

4. The WAPs shall be installed per the manufacturer's installation guidelines, below ceiling and horizontally mounted with logo facing downward. Vertical installation of the WAPs will not be allowed. Any deviation will require prior approval of the the Owner’s Systems Engineer. Oberon Model 1029 wall-mount bracket shall be used for wall-mounted WAP installations. The jacks shall be mounted on a dual port faceplate. When aesthetics is strictly required by the architect, Terrawave Model TVVC-AC-BKT-L mounting bracket shall be used for above T-bar ceiling installations. For below suspended ceilingfT-bar ceiling installations, use Ceiling Grid Clip, Recessed (AIR-AP-T-Rail-R), if the ceiling tiles land below the ceiling grid. Use Ceiling Grip Clip, Flush (AIR-AP-T- RAIL-F) if the T-bar ceiling tiles are flush with the ceiling grid. For hard ceiling installations with data outlet boxes mounted on the ceiling, Universal Mounting Bracket (AIR-AP-BRACKET-2) shall be used.

5. Provide Cisco 5508 Wireless Controller.

G. Patch Cables

1. The Communications Contractor shall furnish patch cords per length, color and quantity as required by DBT's design and confirmed by the Owner’s Systems Engineer.

2. Patch cords shall be Panduit Category 6, 23 AWG stranded, 4-pair assemblies with RJ45 plugs on both end, straight through (no pair reversals), and "slender strain" relief and "clear" boot type, Category 6, UTPSP, patch cords. The Communications Contractor shall be responsible for the installation and dressing of all patch cables in the MCR, TR and Workstations based on the Patch Schedule provided the the Owner’s Systems Manager.

2.4 DISTRIBUTION CABLING (WHERE APPLICABLE)

A. Voice Cabling

LA MIRADA LIBRARY COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING

16860-10

1. The Communications Contractor shall provide, install and terminate an appropriately sized, CMR or CMP rated cable (as determined by the the Owner’s Systems Engineer), to provide connectivity between the MPOE and TR/MCR.

2. Backbone cables shall be installed separately from the station cables. Where both cables are installed in a cable tray or wire way, backbone cables shall be installed first and bundled separately from the station cables.


A. General Performance: Horizontal cabling system shall comply with transmission standards in TINEIA-568-B.1 when tested according to test procedures of this standard.

B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less,


C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

D. Grounding: Comply with J-STD-607-A.

2.6 BACKBOARDS

A. Backboards: Plywood, fire-retardant treated, 3/4 by 48 by 96 inches. Comply with requirements in Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for plywood backing panels.




2.7 UTP CABLE

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:




16860-11


3. West Penn


5. General Cable

6. Panduit C. Description: 100-ohm, four-pair UTP, formed into 25-pair, binder groups covered

with a blue thermoplastic jacket.










1. ADC.


3. Belden Inc.

4. Dynacom Inc.


6. Leviton Commercial Networks Division.


8. Panduit Corp.


16860-12


10. Tyco Electronics Corporation; AMP Products.

C. General Requirements for Cable Connecting Hardware: Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2, IDC type, with modules designed for punch-down caps or tools. Cables shall be terminated with connecting hardware of same category or higher.

D. Connecting Blocks: 66-style IDC for Category 5e. Provide blocks for the number of cables terminated on the block, plus 25 percent spare. Integral with connector bodies, including plugs and jacks where indicated.

E. Cross-Connect: Modular array of connecting blocks arranged to terminate building cables and permit interconnection between cables. 1. Number of Terminals per Field: One for each conductor in assigned cables.

F. Patch Panel: Modular panels housing multiple-numbered jack units with IDC-type connectors at each jack for permanent termination of pair groups of installed cables.

1. Number of Jacks per Field: One for each four-pair UTP cable indicated.

G. Jacks and Jack Assemblies: Modular, color-coded, eight-position modular receptacle units with integral IDC-type terminals.

H. Patch Cords: Provide (2)CAT6 Factory-made, 4-pair cables patch cords per UTP port within projects scope of work. Lengths shall be as follows: 1/3-3, 1/3-6', 1/3-9'. Verify with owner if additional cables are required; terminated with eight-position modular plug at each end.

1. Patch cords shall have bend-relief-compliant boots and color-coded icons to ensure Category 6 performance. Patch cords shall have latch guards to protect against snagging.

2. Patch cords shall have color-coded boots for circuit identification.






3. West Penn


16860-13


5. General Cable

6. Panduit

C. Description: Multimode, 50/125-micrometer, 8 multi-mode fiber and 4 single-mode, nonconductive, tight buffer, optical fiber cable.



3. Comply with TIA-492AAAB for detailed specifications.

4. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying with UL 444, UL 1651, and NFPA 70 for the following types:





D. Jacket:


2. Cable cordage jacket, fiber, unit, and group color shall be according to TIA-598-C.

3. Imprinted with fiber count, fiber type, and aggregate length at regular intervals not to exceed 40 inches.




1. ADC.


3. Belden Inc.


16860-14


5. Corning Cable Systems.

6. CSI Technologies Inc.

7. Dynacom Inc.




C. Cross-Connects and Patch Panels: Modular panels housing multiple-numbered, duplex cable connectors.

1. Number of Connectors per Field: One for each fiber of cable or cables assigned to field, plus spares and blank positions adequate to suit specified expansion criteria.

D. Patch Cords: Factory-made, dual-fiber cables in 36-inch lengths.

E. Cable Connecting Hardware:

1. Comply with Optical Fiber Connector Intermateability Standards (FOCIS) specifications of TIA-604-2-B, TIA-604-3-B, and TINEIA-604-12. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-13.3.

2. Quick-connect, simplex and duplex, Type SC or Type LC connectors per the Owner’s. Insertion loss not more than 0.75 dB.


2.11 COAXIAL CABLE





3. West Penn


5. General Cable


16860-15

6. Panduit

C. Cable Characteristics: Broadband type, recommended by cable manufacturer specifically for broadband data transmission applications. Coaxial cable and accessories shall have 75-ohm nominal impedance with a return loss of 20 dB maximum from 7 to 806 MHz.

D. RG-11/U: NFPA 70, Type CATV.






E. RG-6/U: NFPA 70, Type CATV or CM.




4. Suitable for indoor installations. F. NFPA and UL compliance, listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to

authorities having jurisdiction as complying with UL 1655 and with NFPA 70 "Radio and Television Equipment" and "Community Antenna Television and Radio Distribution" Articles. Types are as follows:








16860-16

2. Blonder Tongue

3. Pico Macom



C. Coaxial-Cable Connectors: Type BNC, 75 ohms.

2.13 TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTLET/CONNECTORS

A. Jacks: 100-ohm, balanced, twisted-pair connector; four-pair, eight-position modular. Comply with TIA/E1A-568-B.1.

B. Workstation Outlets: Two-port-connector assemblies mounted in single faceplate.

1. Plastic Faceplate: High-impact plastic. Coordinate color with Division 16 Section "Wiring Devices."

2. Metal Faceplate: Stainless steel, complying with requirements in Division 16 Section "Wiring Devices."

3. For use with snap-in jacks accommodating any combination of UTP, optical fiber, and coaxial work area cords.

a. Flush mounting jacks, positioning the cord at a 45-degree angle.

4. Legend: Machine printed, in the field, using adhesive-tape label.

5. Legend: Snap-in, clear-label covers and machine-printed paper inserts.

2.14 GROUNDING

A. Comply with requirements in Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems" for grounding conductors and connectors.

B. Comply with J-STD-607-A. 2.15 IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A. Comply with TIA/EIA-606-A and UL 969 for labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers.

B. Comply with requirements in Division 16 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."



B. Factory test UTP and optical fiber cables on reels according to TIA/EIA-568-B.1.


16860-17


D. Factory test multimode optical fiber cables according to TIA-526-14-A and TIA/EIA-568-B.3.

E. Factory-sweep test coaxial cables at frequencies from 5 MHz to 1 GHz. Sweep test shall test the frequency response, or attenuation over frequency, of a cable by generating a voltage whose frequency is varied through the specified frequency range and graphing the results.

F. Cable will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


3. PART 3 EXECUTION


A. Coordinate backbone cabling with the protectors and demarcation point provided by communications service provider.

3.2 WIRING METHODS

A. Install cables in pathways and cable trays except within consoles, cabinets, desks, and counters and except in accessible ceiling spaces and in gypsum board partitions where unen-closed wiring method may be used. Conceal pathways and cables except in unfinished spaces.


Comply with requirements in Division 16 Section "Pathways for Communications Systems."

3. Comply with requirements in Division 16 Section "Cable Trays for Communications Systems."

B. Conceal conductors and cables in accessible ceilings, walls, and floors where possible.

C. Wiring within Enclosures:

1. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii.

2. Install lacing bars and distribution spools. 3. Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to sides and back of enclosure.




16860-18

B. General Requirements for Cabling:




4. MUTOA shall not be used as a cross-connect point.

5. Consolidation points may be used only for making a direct connection to telecommunications outlet/connectors:

a. Do not use consolidation point as a cross-connect point, as a patch connection, or for direct connection to workstation equipment.

b. Locate consolidation points for UTP at least 49 feet from communications equipment room.

6. Terminate conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, cross-connects, and patch panels.

7 Cables may not be spliced. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches and not more than 6 inches from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals.

8. Install lacing bars to restrain cables, to prevent straining connections, and to prevent bending cables to smaller radii than minimums recommended by manufacturer.

9. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in BICSI ITSIM, "Cabling Termination Practices" Chapter. Install lacing bars and distribution spools.

10. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged during installation and replace it with new cable.

11. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling. Heat lamps shall not be used for heating.

12. In the communications equipment room, install a 10-foot- long service loop on each end of cable.

13. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 4, "Pulling Cable." Monitor cable pull tensions.

C. UTP Cable Installation:


16860-19

1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2. 2. Do not untwist UTP cables more than 1/2 inch from the point of

termination to maintain cable geometry.

D. Optical Fiber Cable Installation:


2. Cable may be terminated on connecting hardware that is rack or cabinet mounted.

E. Open-Cable Installation:


2. Suspend UTP cable not in a wireway or pathway a minimum of 8 inches above ceilings by cable supports not more than 60 inches apart.


F. Group connecting hardware for cables into separate logical fields.

G. Separation from EMI Sources:

1. Comply with BICSI TDMM and TIA-569-B for separating unshielded copper voice and data communication cable from potential EMI sources, including electrical power lines and equipment.





3. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and unshielded power lines or electrical equipment shall be as follows:



16860-20



4. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and power lines and electrical equipment located in grounded metallic conduits or enclosures shall be as follows:




5. Separation between Communications Cables and Electrical Motors and Transformers, 5 kVA or HP and Larger: A minimum of 48 inches.

6. Separation between Communications Cables and Fluorescent Fixtures: A minimum of 5 inches.

3.4 FIRESTOPPING


B. Comply with TIA-569-B, Annex A, "Firestopping."


3.5 GROUNDING


B. Comply with J-STD-607-A.

C. Locate grounding bus bar to minimize the length of bonding conductors. Fasten to wall allowing at least 2-inch clearance behind the grounding bus bar. Connect grounding bus bar with a minimum No. 4 AWG grounding electrode conductor from grounding bus bar to suitable electrical building ground.

D. Bond metallic equipment to the grounding bus bar, using not smaller than No. 6 AWG equipment grounding conductor.

3.6 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, and cabling complying with TIA/EIA-606-A. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 16 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

Administration Class: 1.


16860-21

2. Color-code cross-connect fields. Apply colors to voice and data service backboards, connections, covers, and labels.

B. Using cable management system software specified in Part 2, develop Cabling Administration Drawings for system identification, testing, and management. Use unique, alphanumeric designation for each cable and label cable, jacks, connectors, and terminals to which it connects with same designation. At completion, cable and asset management software shall reflect as-built conditions.

C. Comply with requirements in Division 09 Section "Interior Painting" for painting backboards. For fire-resistant plywood, do not paint over manufacturer's label.

D. Paint and label colors for equipment identification shall comply with TIA/EIA-606-A for Class 1 level of administration, including optional identification requirements of this standard.

E. Cable Schedule: Post in prominent location in each equipment room and wiring closet. List incoming and outgoing cables and their designations, origins, and destinations. Protect with rigid frame and clear plastic cover. Furnish an electronic copy of final comprehensive schedules for Project.

F. Cabling Administration Drawings: Show building floor plans with cabling administration-point labeling. Identify labeling convention and show labels for telecommunications closets, backbone pathways and cables, entrance pathways and cables, terminal hardware and positions, horizontal cables, work areas and workstation terminal positions, grounding buses and pathways, and equipment grounding conductors. Follow convention of TINEIA-606-A. Furnish electronic record of all drawings, in software and format selected by Owner.

G. Cable and Wire Identification:

1. Label each cable within 4 inches of each termination and tap, where it is accessible in a cabinet or junction or outlet box, and elsewhere as indicated.

2. Each wire connected to building-mounted devices is not required to be numbered at device if color of wire is consistent with associated wire connected and numbered within panel or cabinet.

3. Exposed Cables and Cables in Cable Trays and Wire Troughs: Label each cable at intervals not exceeding 15 feet.

4. Label each terminal strip and screw terminal in each cabinet, rack, or panel.

a. Individually number wiring conductors connected to terminal strips, and identify each cable or wiring group being extended from a panel or cabinet to a building-mounted device shall be identified with name and number of particular device as shown.

b. Label each unit and field within distribution racks and frames.


16860-22

5. Identification within Connector Fields in Equipment Rooms and Wiring Closets: Label each connector and each discrete unit of cable-terminating and connecting hardware. Where similar jacks and plugs are used for both voice and data communication cabling, use a different color for jacks and plugs of each service.

6. Uniquely identify and label work area cables extending from the MUTOA to the work area. These cables may not exceed the length stated on the MUTOA label.

H. Labels shall be preprinted or computer-printed type with printing area and font color that contrasts with cable jacket color but still complies with requirements in TIA/EIA-606-A.

1. Cables use flexible vinyl or polyester that flex as cables are bent.



B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

C. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative:

1. Visually inspect UTP and optical fiber cable jacket materials for NRTL certification markings. Inspect cabling terminations in communications equipment rooms for compliance with color-coding for pin assignments, and inspect cabling connections for compliance with TIA/EIA-568-6.1.

2. Visually confirm Category 6, marking of outlets, cover plates, outlet/connectors, and

patch panels.

3. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equip-

ment and patch cords, and labeling of all components.

4. Test UTP backbone copper cabling for DC loop resistance, shorts, opens, intermit-

tent faults, and polarity between conductors. Test operation of shorting bars in connection blocks. Test cables after termination but not cross-connection.

a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA/EIA- 568-B.2. Perform tests with a tester that complies with performance requirements in "Test Instruments (Normative)" Annex, complying with measurement accuracy specified in "Measurement Accuracy (Informative)" Annex. Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test configuration.


16860-23


a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA/EIA-568-8.1. Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test configuration.


1) Horizontal and multimode backbone link measurements: Test at 850 or 1300 nm in 1 direction according to TIA-526-14-A, Method B, One Reference Jumper.

2) Attenuation test results for backbone links shall be less than 2.0 dB. Attenuation test results shall be less than that calculated according to equation in TIA/EIA-568-B.1.

6. UTP Performance Tests:

a. Test for each outlet and MUTOA. Perform the following tests according to TIA/E1A-568-13.1 and TIA/EIA-568-B.2:

1) Wire map.

2) Length (physical vs. electrical, and length requirements).

3) Insertion loss.

4) Near-end crosstalk (NEXT) loss.

5) Power sum near-end crosstalk (PSNEXT) loss.

6) Equal-level far-end crosstalk (ELFEXT).

7) Power sum equal-level far-end crosstalk (PSELFEXT).

8) Return loss. 9) Propagation delay.

10) Delay skew.

7. Optical Fiber Cable Performance Tests: Perform optical fiber end-to-end link tests according to TIA/EIA-568-B.1 and TIA/EIA-568-B.3.

8. Coaxial Cable Tests: Conduct tests according to Division 16 Section "Master Antenna Television System."

9. Final Verification Tests: Perform verification tests for UTP and optical fiber systems after the complete communications cabling and workstation outlet/connectors are installed.


16860-24

a. Voice Tests: These tests assume that dial tone service has been installed. Connect to the network interface device at the demarcation point. Go off-hook and listen and receive a dial tone. If a test number is available, make and receive a local, long distance, and digital subscription line telephone call.

b. Data Tests: These tests assume the Information Technology Staff has a network installed and is available to assist with testing. Connect to the network interface device at the demarcation point. Log onto the network to ensure proper connection to the network.

D. Document data for each measurement. Data for submittals shall be printed in a summary report that is formatted similar to Table 10.1 in BICSI TDMM, or transferred from the instrument to the computer, saved as text files, and printed and submitted.

E. End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


3.8 SOFTWARE SERVICE AGREEMENT

A. Technical Support: Beginning with Substantial Completion, provide software support for two years.

B. Upgrade Service: Update software to latest version at Project completion. Install and program software upgrades that become available within two years from date of Substantial Completion. Upgrading software shall include operating system. Upgrade shall include new or revised licenses for use of software.

Provide 30 days' notice to Owner to allow scheduling and access to system and to allow Owner to upgrade computer equipment if necessary.

3.9 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel in cable-plant management operations, including changing signal pathways for different workstations, rerouting signals in failed cables, and keeping records of cabling assignments and revisions when extending wiring to establish new workstation outlets.

3.10 CABLE TESTING

A. General

1. All testing shall be per the Los Angeles County STD-902 Testing Standard. An orientation with the the Owner’s Systems Engineer shall take place on site prior to the test. It shall be scheduled at least one week in advance. the Owner’s Systems Engineer shall certify prior to testing the following:


16860-25

2. Test meters have been calibrated to TIA/EIA Standard within the last 12 months. With a Certificate of Compliance, meter serial number and dated.

3. Test meter shall be fully charged.

4. Test configuration set to the County Standards.

5. Manufacturer's warranty certification (if applicable) requirements shall be reviewed to ensure that all warranty requirements are met.

6. The Communications Contractor shall furnish one (1) printed copy and one copy on CD-ROM, with the complete set of test results. Copies of PC based software to view drawings and results shall also be provided to the the Owner’s Systems Engineer.

B. Communications Contractor Requirements

Communications Contractor shall provide sufficient skilled labor to complete testing within the agreed upon test period. Testing shall commence no later than

___________ and be completed no later than ____________

2. Communications Contractor shall have a minimum of 3 years experience installing and testing structured cabling systems. All installers assigned by the Contractor to the installation shall have factory certification that they are qualified to install and test the provided products.

3. Communications Contractor is responsible for supplying all of the required test equipment used to conduct acceptance tests.

4. Communications Contractor is responsible for submitting acceptance documentation as defined in section 3.7.5 below.

C. Test Process

1. The County reserves the right to be present during any or all of testing.

2. Testing shall be of the Permanent Link. However, the Communications Contractor shall warrant performance based on Channel performance and provide patch cords that meet channel performance.

3. All cabling not tested strictly in accordance with these procedures shall be re-tested at no additional cost to the County.

4. 100% of the installed voice and data cabling must be tested. All tests must pass acceptance criteria defined in E.4.

5. Test equipment shall be fully charged prior to each days testing. D. Standards Compliance & Test Requirements


16860-26

1. Cabling must meet the indicated performance specifications:

_____ TIA 568B Category 6

______ TIA 568A Category 6

2. All test equipment used must meet the performance specifications defined in Section F below.

E. Documentation

1. Test reports must be submitted in hardcopy and electronic format. Hand-written test reports are not acceptable.

2. Hardcopy reports are to be submitted in labeled 3 ring binders with an attached affidavit verifying passing execution of all tests. For large installations electronic reports with hardcopy summaries are preferred. Hardcopy summary reports shall contain the following information on each row of the report: circuit ID, test specification used, length, date of test, and pass/fail result.

3. Electronic reports are to be submitted on CD-ROM only. If proprietary software is required to view test results, the software shall be provided to the Owner’s Systems Engineer. If the results are delivered in a standard format like Excel, Access, CSV files, etc. then software to read these files need not be provided. Electronic reports must be accompanied by a Certificate signed by an authorized representative of the Contractor warranting the truth and accuracy of the electronic report. Certificate must reference traceable circuit numbers that match the electronic record.

4. Test reports shall include the following information for each cabling element tested:

a. Wiremap results that indicate the cabling has no shorts, opens, miswires, split, reversed, or crossed pairs, and end to end connectivity is achieved.

b. For Category 6 cabling: Attenuation, NEXT, PSNEXT, Return Loss, ELFEXT, and PSELFEXT data that indicate the worst case result, the frequency at which it occurs, the limit at that point, and the margin. These tests shall be performed in a swept frequency manner from 1 MHz to highest relevant frequency, using a swept frequency interval that is consistent with TIA and ISO requirements. Information shall be provided for all pairs or pair combinations and in both directions when required by the appropriate standards. Any individual test that fails the relevant performance specification shall be marked as a FAIL.

c. Length (in meters), propagation delay, and delay skew relative to the relevant limit. Any individual test that fails the


16860-27

relevant performance specification shall be marked as a FAIL.

d. Cable manufacturer, cable model number/type, and NVP

e. Tester manufacturer, model, serial number, hardware version, and software version

f. Circuit ID number and project name 9. Autotest specification used

h. Overall pass/fail indication

Date of test

j. Test reports shall be submitted within 7 business days of completion of testing.

F. Test Equipment

Test equipment used under this contract shall be from manufacturers that have a minimum of 5 years experience in producing field test equipment. Manufacturers must be ISO 9001 certified.

2. All test tools of a given type shall be from the same manufacturer, and have compatible electronic results output.

3. Test adapter cables must be approved by the manufacturer of the test equipment. Adapters from other sources are not acceptable.

4. Baseline accuracy of the test equipment must exceed TIA Level III, as indicated by independent laboratory testing.

5. Test equipment must be capable of certifying Category 6 links.

6. Test equipment must be capable of storing full frequency sweep data for all tests and drawing color graphical reports for all swept measurements.

7. Test equipment must include S-Band time domain diagnostics for NEXT and return loss (TDNXT and TDRL) for accurate and efficient troubleshooting.

8. Test equipment must be capable of running individual NEXT, return loss, etc measurements in addition to autotests. Individual tests increase productivity when diagnosing faults.

9. Test equipment must include a the Owner’s of cable types, sorted by major manufacturer.

10. Test equipment must store Category 6 autotests in internal memory.


16860-28

11. Test equipment must be able to internally group autotests and cables in project folders for good records management.

12. Test equipment must include DSP technology for support of advanced measurements.

13. Test equipment must make swept frequency measurements in compliance with TIA standards.

14. The measurement reference plane of the test equipment shall start immediately at the output of the test equipment interface connector. There shall not be a time domain dead zone of any distance that excludes any part of the link from the measurement.

G. Fiber

1. The Communications Contractor shall perform end-to-end fiber optic strand testing per Los Angeles County Fiber Testing Standard with the following minimum quality levels: Optical Time Domain Reflectometer (OTDR) with drawings (both directions) and absolute dB loss (power meter), at 850 nanometers for multi-mode and 1310 nanometers for single-mode. All fiber optic cable lengths less than 600 feet shall require a certified kilometer to be used with the OTDR testing equipment. After testing on the reel has been successfully completed, fiber optic system shall be installed with all patch cords attached and then the entire channel shall be tested.

2. The Communications Contractor shall perform two sets of OTDR drawings with the above mentioned minimum quality levels. The first OTDR reading and drawings must be done on-site and submitted to the County Project Manager prior to the utilization of the fiber, and the second OTDR reading and drawings must be done after installation.

3. Upon completion of the fiber optic portion of this project, the Communications Contractor shall provide two complete sets of OTDR traces on 8 % x 11" sheets. The Communications Contractor shall annotate on each OTDR trace 1) direction of test per strand (from-to); 2) bundle number; 3) buffer color and 4) strand color. Communications Contractor-provided representations of the test data are not acceptable.

END OF SECTION

LA MIRADA LIBRARY PUBLIC ADDRESS AND MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEMS 16870-1

SECTION 16870

PUBLIC ADDRESS AND MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEMS

CONTRACTOR SHALL REFERENCE COUNTY OF LOS ANGELES INTERNAL SERVICES DEPARTMENT COMMUNICATIONS/LOW-VOLTAGE SPECIFICATIONS, DATED 8/10/15 FOR ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS

1. PART 1 GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Preamplifiers.

2. Power amplifiers.

3. Transfer to standby amplifier.

4. Microphones.

5. Volume limiter/compressors.

6. Control console.

7. Equipment cabinet.

8. Equipment rack.

9. Telephone paging adapters.

10. Tone generator.

11. Monitor panel.

12. Loudspeakers.

13. Noise-operated gain controllers.

14. Microphone and headphone outlets.

15. Battery backup power unit.

16. Conductors and cables.

17. Raceways.


1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Channels: Separate parallel signal paths, from sources to loudspeakers or loudspeaker zones, with separate amplification and switching that permit selection between paths for speaker alternative program signals.

B. VU: Volume unit.

C. Zone: Separate group of loudspeakers and associated supply wiring that may be arranged for selective switching between different channels.


A. Delegated Design: Design supports and seismic restraints for control consoles, equipment cabinets and racks, and components, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

B. Seismic Performance: Supports and seismic restraints for control consoles, equipment cabi-nets and racks, and components shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to SEI/ASCE 7.

1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified."


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

Shop Drawings: For supports and seismic restraints for control consoles, equipment cabinets and racks, and components. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

2. Console layouts.

3. Control panels.

4. Rack arrangements.

5. Calculations: For sizing backup battery.

6. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.

a. Identify terminals to facilitate installation, operation, and maintenance.

b. Single-line diagram showing interconnection of components.

c. Cabling diagram showing cable routing.

B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For supports and seismic restraints for control consoles, equip-ment cabinets and racks, and components indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.


1. Detail fabrication and assembly of supports and seismic restraints for control consoles, equipment cabinets and racks, and components.


A.Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved.

B Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

C. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For control consoles, equipment cabinets and racks, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.






A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For public address and mass notification systems to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A.Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Microphone: One.

2. Desk Stand(s): One.


A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project.

1. Personnel certified by NICET as Audio Systems Level III Technician.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified agency, with the experience and capability to conduct testing indicated.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NICET at Level III to super-vise on-site testing.


C. Source Limitations: Obtain public address and mass notification systems from single source from single manufacturer.


E. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.10 COORDINATION

F. Coordinate layout and installation of system components and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.

2. PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 OVERHEAD PAGING SYSTEM

A. System Description and Installation Requirement

B. The intent of the system is to provide voice paging. The system will cover the entire interior building area. The overhead paging system shall be configured with three (3) zones plus All Call. The zones are: 1) Staff, and 2) Public, 3) Meeting Room. All Call shall be configured to have the paging announcements made simultaneously to all three (3) zones. The system will originate through the telephone system. Requirements shall include:

1. The paging equipment shall have 600 ohm balanced input for connection to the telephone system.

2. All speaker assemblies shall include a back box, grill and line matching transformer. The speakers shall include a built-in, screwdriver adjustable volume control and be equipped with a 70-volt line-matching transformer set on one and one quarter (1.25) watt tap.

3. The paging system will be accessible from the telephone instruments to allow paging through the overhead speakers. The general paging amplifier (including zone volume controls) for the building shall be mounted in the equipment rack located in the MCR. The contractor will work with ISD to connect the Paging Sytem to the NORSTAR Key Telephone System using an FXO Trunk from the voice gateway. The FXO circuit shall be placed on an RJ14 and terminated on the paging amplifier using an RJ14-to-Spade terminating cable.

4. The paging system amplifier and the zone paging modules shall be mounted on the designated plywood backboard space. The paging contractor shall provide the cable and termination blocks to connect the paging module to the phone system.

5. The amplifier shall be sized appropriately to support all speakers.

6. The speaker cables shall be shielded twisted one (1) pair, 16 AWG, and plenum (CMP) rated. The speaker cables shall be installed horizontally through the ceiling ar-ea in a neat and orderly fashion and supported by cable hangers at appropriate inter-vals. The speaker cables shall be positioned at least six (6) inches from telephone and data wires. The installation shall comply with ALL applicable National Electric Code, Building Safety, and Fire Codes. The Communications Contractor shall apply section 3.5.1 items a through d. with regard to the low voltage cabling for the overhead paging system.


8. The Communications Contractor and its subcontractors shall be an authorized manu-facturer's distributor and a manufacturer's certified installer of the PA equipment. The contractor and subcontractors shall submit manufacturer's certification at the time of bid submittal.

9. The Public Address (PA) System shall be a 70 V system if approved by the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). Contractor shall verify with the AHJ that plenum speaker cabling can be installed without conduit using the amplifier 70V PA amplifier output. Contractor shall use the AHJ approved 25V output if AHJ does not approve 70V ampli-fier output using plenum cabling without conduit.

10. The Communications Contractor shall install the PA system in accordance with all Federal, State, and local building codes including but not limited to the National Electric Code (NEC).

11. The Communications Contractor shall be responsible for verifying site conditions and for furnishing the proper type and quantity of material.

12. The Communications Contractor shall repair, replace and reinstall any material damaged during the course of this project.

13. The Communications Contractor shall furnish and install any and all materials, whether or not specified, to provide a complete and fully functional Public Address System as intended. This includes but not limited to: wall mounted speakers, ceiling mounted speakers, speaker support brackets, cabling, all mounting and supporting materials, amplifiers, transformers, adapters, and telephone interface units.

14. The Communications Contractor shall install all material required in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and specifications.

15. The Communications Contractor shall furnish, install, and connect the cabling from the speakers to the AHJ approved output of the amplifier.

16. The Communications Contactor shall install all speakers as required and shall verify all speaker locations.

17. The Communications Contractor shall verify speaker locations and ceiling types with the County project manager and the general contractor. Some speakers may be mounted above the ceiling tiles/covering in certain areas. The Communications Contractor shall furnish and install all appropriate materials to install the speakers in and above the various ceiling types. Contractor shall custom paint the speaker assemblies (enclosure, baffle, etc.) to match the adjacent color.

18. The Communications Contractor shall furnish, install, and earthquake brace all speaker assemblies including speaker enclosures, speaker support brackets, cabling and associated materials.

19. The Communications Contractor shall cut the holes in the ceiling tiles where the speakers will be installed in the ceiling tiles and hard ceilings.

20. The Communications Contractor shall group a maximum of fifteen (15) speakers in any one cable run to the amplifier. The Communications Contractor shall furnish and install multiple cable runs for the speaker groups to the amplifier. Speakers shall be grouped by general location.

21. The Communications Contractor shall identify which speakers belong to which group on the cables and on the "As Built" drawings. The Communications Contractor shall also identify the cable runs on the "As built" drawings.


22. Cable runs shall be kept as short as possible.

23. The Communications Contractor shall install the cabling above the ceiling level. The Communications Contractor shall furnish and install cabling support and shall ensure that the cabling is supported independently from the supports used for the suspended ceiling and other systems above the ceiling.

24. The Communications Contractor shall furnish and install cabling support hardware for the cabling as per NEC.

25. Cabling shall not lie on the ceiling tiles or hard ceiling.

26. The Communications Contractor shall furnish and install the amplifier on the wall in the MCR room or equipment rack using appropriate rack mount hardware. The Communications Contractor shall refer to the drawings for amplifier location.

27. The Communications Contractor shall furnish and install the telephone interface equipment on the wall and securely fasten the telephone interface units to the wall. The Communications Contractor shall connect the zone outputs of the telephone interface unit to the respective zone speaker lines. The Communications Contractor shall furnish, install, and connect the PA amplifier to the telephone interface unit in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions for a multiple zone PA system.

28. The Communications Contractor shall furnish and install interface cabling between the telephone system and the PA system and terminate the cabling on the telephone system.

29. The Communications Contractor shall coordinate with the telephone system contractor to determine where to terminate the interface cabling on the telephone system and to obtain the telephone access code to the PA system.

30. The Communications Contractor shall connect the PA system to the telephone system at the location specified by the telephone contractor.

31. The Communications Contractor shall test the PA system through the telephone system with the access codes given by the telephone contractor.

32. The Communications Contractor shall balance the PA system when completed. The Communications Contractor shall adjust the audio levels of the PA system and audio sound levels of each speaker so that announcements can be heard distinctly and clearly above ambient noise levels during normal business activity in all areas.

33. The PA system shall not have any interference and/or unwanted audio noise including but not limited to buzz or hum noises. The contractor shall trouble shoot and eliminate any interference, feedback, and/or unwanted audio noise in the PA system.

34. The Communications Contactor shall reset the wattage of the speakers if it is deter-mined that the sound level cannot be heard distinctly and clearly above the ambient noise level and adjust the speaker sound level and PA system sound level so that the announcements can be heard distinctly and clearly above ambient noise level during normal business activity. The Communications Contractor shall reset the wattage and/or adjust the speaker volume control if it is determined that the speaker is too loud or too low in any area.

35. The Communications Contractor shall remove volume control knobs from the speakers so that the speaker volume control adjustment will be recessed.


36. The Communications Contractor shall furnish and install rack mounted UPS systems (UPS, batteries) and a rack mounted power distribution unit for the PA and telephone access equipment. UPS shall provide the equipment with a minimum of two hours of backup power to operate the equipment should there be an interruption of local power. The Communications Contractor shall connect the UPS units to AC power circuits. The Communications Contractor shall furnish and install hardware and brackets and earth-quake brace UPS system and batteries to seismic 4 rating.

37. The Communications contractor shall provide hands-on training to LA County staff at a date and time to be determined by the County in the operation of the system. A roster of attendees shall be documented.

C. Materials and Equipment

1. Amplifiers — Solid State, Bogen TPU or GS series sized to accommodate all speakers in the PA system and 20% minimum of additional output power.

2. Telephone paging interface unit — Bogen PCM-2000 system including PCM-CPU,

3. PCM-TIM and PCM-ZPM

4. Power supplies — Bogen PCM - PS

5. Speaker — 8", 8 ohm, with 25/70 volt transformer and recessed volume control, Quam model C5/BUM/NC

6. Speaker enclosure — Quam model ERD 8 series.

7 Ceiling mounting bracket (suspended ceilings) — Quam model SSB-2.

8. Ceiling mounting bracket (hard lid ceilings) — Quam model SSB-7.

9. Speaker cable — shielded twisted pair AWG #16, plenum (CMP) rated. — WestPenn 25294B

10. Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) — APC for 2 hours back-up power with battery packs.

11. Miscellaneous materials — All materials necessary to furnish and install a complete and fully functional system.

D. Materials and Equipment

1. Amplifier — QSC CX204V

2. Digital Signal Processor — Biamp Audia Flex CM w/AEC-2HD input cards and OP-2E output cards to configure a 24 input x 12 output audio processor

3. Feedback processor- Sabine FBX2400

4. Hand Held wired microphone — Shure SM58

5. Hand Held wireless microphone system — Shure ULXP 24/58

6. Lavalier wireless microphone system — Shure ULXP 14/85


7. Microphone floor stands — Atlas Soundolier MS — 12CE

8. Microphone outlet plates — Lowell Manufacturing MCP] — C3F

9. Assistive listening system — Sennheiser SZI1015-T/NT emitter panel, IR Headset RI 250, Battery Charger L151-10 and NT92-120, Spare batteries BA151, and wall/ceiling mount WM1.

10. Speaker cabling — WestPenn 25294B

11. Microphone cabling (wall plate to DSP processor) — WestPenn 25303B

12. Microphone cabling (15') with connectors - Whirlwind MK415

13. Ceiling speakers — JBL Control 26CT

14. Miscellaneous materials — All materials necessary to furnish and install a complete and fully functional system.



2.3 EQUIVALENT MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A. Manufacturers' names and model numbers are used herein only as a means of establishing standards of quality and performance. Comparable equipment of standard manufacture and established reputation, which meets the requirements outlined above, may be submitted to the the Owner’s Systems Engineer for approval. Equipment of the following manufacturers may be used if it meets or exceeds parameters of the specified equipment.

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Cable — Superior Essex, Belden, West Penn, Berk-Tek, General Cable, Panduit

2. Overhead Paging Amplifier — Bogen, Quam

3. Community Room Public Address — QSC, JBL

4. Loudspeaker/Transformer — Soundolier, Bogen, Quam, JBL

5. Loudspeaker/Enclosure/Baffle — Soundolier, Bogen, Quam, JBL

6. Volume Control — Soundolier, Bogen, Quam, Atlas Sound

7. Door Intercom — AiPhone AX series

8. Uninterruptible Power Supply System- APC


2.4 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM

A. System Functions:

1. Selectively connect any zone to any available signal channel.

2. Selectively control sound from microphone outlets and other inputs.

3. "All-call" feature shall connect the all-call sound signal simultaneously to all zones re-gardless of zone or channel switch settings.

4. Telephone paging adapter shall allow paging by dialing an extension from any local telephone instrument and speaking into the telephone.

5. Produce a program-signal tone that is amplified and sounded over all speakers, overriding signals currently being distributed.

6. Reproduce high-quality sound that is free of noise and distortion at all loudspeakers at all times during equipment operation including standby mode with inputs off; output free of nonuniform coverage of amplified sound.

2.5 GENERAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS

Compatibility of Components: Coordinate component features to form an integrated system. Match components and interconnections for optimum performance of specified functions.

A. Equipment: Comply with UL 813. Equipment shall be modular, using solid-state components, and fully rated for continuous duty unless otherwise indicated. Select equipment for normal op-eration on input power usually supplied at 110 to 130 V, 60 Hz.

B. Equipment Mounting: Where rack, cabinet, or console mounting is indicated, equipment shall be designed to mount in a 19-inch housing complying with TIA/EIA-310-D.

Weather-Resistant Equipment: Listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency for duty out-doors or in damp locations.

2.6 PREAMPLIFIERS

A. Preamplifier: Separately mounted.

B. Preamplifier: Integral to power amplifier.

C. Output Power: Plus 4 dB above 1 mW at matched power-amplifier load.

D. Total Harmonic Distortion: Less than 1 percent.

E. Frequency Response: Within plus or minus 2 dB from 20 to 20,000 Hz.

F. Input Jacks: Minimum of two. One matched for low-impedance microphone; the other matcha-ble to cassette deck, CD player, or radio tuner signals without external adapters.

G. Minimum Noise Level: Minus 55 dB below rated output.

H. Controls: On-off, input levels, and master gain.


2.7 POWER AMPLIFIERS

I. Mounting: Wall.

J. Output Power: 70-V balanced line. 80 percent of the sum of wattage settings of connected for each station and speaker connected in all-call mode of operation, plus an allowance for future stations.

K. Total Harmonic Distortion: Less than 3 percent at rated power output from 50 to 12,000 Hz.

L. Minimum Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 60 dB, at rated output.

M. Frequency Response: Within plus or minus 2 dB from 50 to 12,000 Hz.

N. Output Regulation: Less than 2 dB from full to no load.

O. Controls: On-off, input levels, and low-cut filter.

P. Input Sensitivity: Matched to preamplifier and to provide full-rated output with sound-pressure level of less than 10 dynes/sq. cm impinging on speaker microphone or handset transmitter.

2.8 TELEPHONE PAGING ADAPTER

A. Adapters shall accept voice signals from telephone extension dialing access and automatically provide amplifier input and program override for preselected zones.

1. Minimum Frequency Response: Flat, 200 to 2500 Hz.

2. Impedance Matching: Adapter matches telephone line to public address equipment input.

3. Wall mounting.

2.9 LOUDSPEAKERS

A. Cone-Type Loudspeakers:

1. Minimum Axial Sensitivity: 96 dB at one meter, with 1-W input.

2. Frequency Response: Within plus or minus 3 dB from 65 to 17,000 Hz.

3. Size: 8 inches with 1-inch voice coil and minimum 5-oz. ceramic magnet.

4. Minimum Dispersion Angle: 90 degrees.

5. Rated Output Level: 5 W.

6. Matching Transformer: Full-power rated with four taps. Maximum insertion loss of 0.5 dB.

7. Surface-Mounting Units: Ceiling, wall, or pendant mounting, as indicated, in steel back boxes, acoustically dampened. Front face of at least 0.0478-inch steel and whole assembly rust proofed and shop primed for field painting.

8. Flush-Ceiling-Mounting Units: In steel back boxes, acoustically dampened. Metal ceil-ing grille with white baked enamel.


Factory volume control option.

2.10 BATTERY BACKUP POWER UNIT

A. Unit shall be rack mounted, consisting of time-delay relay, sealed lead-calcium battery, battery charger, on-off switch, "normal" and "emergency" indicating lights, and adequate capacity to supply maximum equipment power requirements for one hour of continuous full operation.

B. Unit shall supply public address equipment with 12- to 15-V dc power automatically during an outage of normal 120-V ac power.

C. Battery shall be on float charge when not supplying system and to transfer automatically to supply system after three to five seconds of continuous outage of normal power, as sensed by time-delay relay.

D. Unit shall automatically retransfer system to normal supply when normal power has been reestablished for three to five seconds continuously.

2.11 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Jacketed, twisted pair and twisted multipair, untinned solid copper.

1. Insulation for Wire in Conduit: Thermoplastic, not less than 1/32 inch thick.

2. Microphone Cables: Neoprene jacketed, not less than 2/64 inch thick, over shield with filled interstices. Shield No. 34 AWG, tinned, soft-copper strands formed into a braid or approved equivalent foil. Shielding coverage on conductors is not less than 60 percent.

3. Plenum Cable: Listed and labeled for plenum installation.

2.12 RACEWAYS

A. Conduit and Boxes: Comply with Division 16 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Sys-tems." Flexible metal conduit shall not be used.

1. Outlet boxes shall be not less than 2 inches wide, 3 inches high, and 2-1/2 inches deep.

3. PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 WIRING METHODS

A. Wiring Method: Install cables in raceways and cable trays except within consoles, cabinets, desks, and counters, and except in accessible ceiling spaces and in gypsum board partitions where unenclosed wiring method may be used. Conceal raceway and cables except in unfin-ished spaces.


2. Comply with requirements for raceways and boxes specified in Division 16 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems."


B. Wiring Method: Conceal conductors and cables in accessible ceilings, walls, and floors where possible.

C. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train cables to terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Provide and use lacing bars and distribution spools.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF RACEWAYS

A. Comply with requirements in Division 16 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems" for installation of conduits and wireways.

1. Install manufactured conduit sweeps and long-radius elbows whenever possible.



B. General Cable Installation Requirements:

1. Terminate conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make terminations only at outlets and terminals.

2. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Arrange on numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures. Cables may not be spliced.

3. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches and not more than 6 inches from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals.

4. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Install lacing bars and distribution spools.

5. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice ca-ble between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if dam-aged during installation and replace it with new cable.

6. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling. Heat lamps shall not be used.

C. Open-Cable Installation:


2. Suspend speaker cable not in a wireway or pathway a minimum of 8 inches above ceiling by cable supports not more than 60 inches apart.

3. Cable shall not be run through structural members or be in contact with pipes, ducts, or other potentially damaging items.

D. Separation of Wires: Separate speaker-microphone, line-level, speaker-level, and power wiring runs. Install in separate raceways or, where exposed or in same enclosure, separate conduc-tors at least 12 inches apart for speaker microphones and adjacent parallel power and tele-phone wiring. Separate other intercommunication equipment conductors as recommended by equipment manufacturer.


3.4 INSTALLATION

A. Match input and output impedances and signal levels at signal interfaces. Provide matching networks where required.

B. Identification of Conductors and Cables: Color-code conductors and apply wire and cable marking tape to designate wires and cables so they identify media in coordination with system wiring diagrams.

C. Equipment Cabinets and Racks:

1. Group items of same function together, either vertically or side by side, and arrange controls symmetrically. Mount monitor panel above the amplifiers.

2. Arrange all inputs, outputs, interconnections, and test points so they are accessible at rear of rack for maintenance and testing, with each item removable from rack without disturbing other items or connections.

3. Blank Panels: Cover empty space in equipment racks so entire front of rack is occu-pied by panels.

D. Volume Limiter/Compressor: Equip each zone with a volume limiter/compressor. Install in cen-tral equipment cabinet. Arrange to provide a constant input to power amplifiers.

E. Wall-Mounted Outlets: Flush mounted.

F. Floor-Mounted Outlets: Conceal in floor and install cable nozzles through outlet covers. Se-cure outlet covers in place. Trim with carpet in carpeted areas.

G. Conductor Sizing: Unless otherwise indicated, size speaker circuit conductors from racks to loudspeaker outlets not smaller than No. 18 AWG and conductors from microphone receptacles to amplifiers not smaller than No. 22 AWG.

H. Weatherproof Equipment: For units that are mounted outdoors, in damp locations, or where exposed to weather, install consistent with requirements of weatherproof rating.

I. Speaker-Line Matching Transformer Connections: Make initial connections using tap settings indicated on Drawings.

J. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

3.5 GROUNDING

A. Ground cable shields and equipment to eliminate shock hazard and to minimize ground loops, common-mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other impairments.

B. Signal Ground Terminal: Locate at main equipment cabinet. Isolate from power system and equipment grounding.

C. Install grounding electrodes as specified in Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."




B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

Perform tests and inspections.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.

C. Tests and Inspections:

1. Schedule tests with at least seven days advance notice of test performance.

2. After installing public address and mass notification systems and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements.

3. Operational Test: Perform tests that include originating program and page messages at microphone outlets, preamplifier program inputs, and other inputs. Verify proper routing and volume levels and that system is free of noise and distortion.

4. Signal-to-Noise Ratio Test: Measure signal-to-noise ratio of complete system at nor-mal gain settings as follows:

a. Disconnect microphone at connector or jack closest to it and replace it in the circuit with a signal generator using a 1000-Hz signal. Replace all other mi-crophones at corresponding connectors with dummy loads, each equal in impedance to microphone it replaces. Measure signal-to-noise ratio.

b. Repeat test for each separately controlled zone of loudspeakers.

c. Minimum acceptance ratio is 50 dB.

5. Distortion Test: Measure distortion at normal gain settings and rated power. Feed signals at frequencies of 50, 200, 400, 1000, 3000, 8000, and 12,000 Hz into each preamplifier channel. For each frequency, measure distortion in the paging and all-call amplifier outputs. Maximum acceptable distortion at any frequency is 3 percent total harmonics.

6. Acoustic Coverage Test: Feed pink noise into system using octaves centered at 500 and 4000 Hz. Use sound-level meter with octave-band filters to measure level at five locations in each zone. For spaces with seated audiences, maximum permissible variation in level is plus or minus 2 dB. In addition, the levels between locations in same zone and between locations in adjacent zones must not vary more than plus or minus 3 dB.

7. Power Output Test: Measure electrical power output of each power amplifier at nor-mal gain settings of 50, 1000, and 12,000 Hz. Maximum variation in power output at these frequencies must not exceed plus or minus 1 dB.

8. Signal Ground Test: Measure and report ground resistance at pubic address equip-ment signal ground. Comply with testing requirements specified in Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."


D. Inspection: Verify that units and controls are properly labeled and interconnecting wires and terminals are identified. Prepare a list of final tap settings of paging speaker-line matching transformers.

E. Public address and mass notification systems will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.


Include a record of final speaker-line matching transformer-tap settings, and signal ground-resistance measurement certified by Installer.

3.7 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.

1. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's submittal and installation requirements.

2. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.8 ADJUSTING

A. On-Site Assistance: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to provide on-site assistance in adjusting sound levels, resetting transformer taps, and adjusting controls to meet occupancy conditions.

B. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose.

3.9 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain the public address and mass notification systems and equipment.

END OF SECTION

LA MIRADA LIBRARY CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 16900-1

SECTION 16900

CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

CONTRACTOR SHALL REFERENCE COUNTY OF LOS ANGELES INTERNAL SERVICES DEPARTMENT COMMUNICATIONS/LOW-VOLTAGE SPECIFICATIONS, DATED 8/10/15, FOR

ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS

1. PART 1GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. UTP cabling.

2. 50/125-micrometer, multimode optical fiber cabling.

3. Coaxial cabling.

4. RS-232 cabling.

5. RS-485 cabling.

6. Low-voltage control cabling.

7. Control-circuit conductors.

8. Fire alarm wire and cable.

9. Identification products.

1.3 DEFINITIONS


B. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.

C. IDC: Insulation displacement connector.

D. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or for remote-control and signaling power-limited circuits.

E. Open Cabling: Passing telecommunications cabling through open space (e.g., between the studs of a wall cavity).

F. RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer.





a. Nominal OD.




A. Qualification Data: For qualified layout technician, installation supervisor, and field inspector.

B. Source quality-control reports.

C. Material Safety Data Sheets.



A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by BICSI as an RCDD to super-vise on-site testing.



1. Test optical fiber cable to determine the continuity of the strand end to end. Use opti-cal loss test set.

2. Test optical fiber cable on reels. Use an optical time domain reflectometer to verify the cable length and locate cable defects, splices, and connector; include the loss value of each. Retain test data and include the record in maintenance data.


1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Do not install conductors and cables that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.

1. Indications that wire and cables are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration and sagging of factory packing materials.

B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install UTP, optical fiber, and coaxial cables and connecting materials until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.


2. PART 2 PRODUCTS



2,2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.


B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2.3 BACKBOARDS

A. Backboards: Plywood, fire-retardant treated, 3/4 by 48 by 96 inches. Comply with requirements for plywood backing panels in Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry."




2.4 UTP CABLE





3. West Penn


5. General Cable

6. Panduit

C. Description: 100-ohm, four-pair UTP, covered with a blue thermoplastic jacket.











1. ADC.


3. AMP Netconnect; a brand of Tyco Electronics Corporation.

4. Belden Inc.

5. Dynacom Inc.

6. Hubbell Incorporated; Hubbell Premise Wiring.

7. Leviton Commercial Networks Division.


9. Panduit Corp.

10. Siemon.

C. UTP Cable Connecting Hardware: IDC type, using modules designed for punch-down caps or tools. Cables shall be terminated with connecting hardware of the same category or higher.

D. Connecting Blocks: 66-style for Category 5e. Provide blocks for the number of cables termi-nated on the block, plus 25 percent spare. Integral with connector bodies, including plugs and jacks where indicated.







3. West Penn


5. General Cable

6. Panduit

C. Description: Multimode, 50/125-micrometer, 8 multi-mode fiber and 4 single-mode, noncon-ductive, tight buffer, optical fiber cable.



3. Comply with TIA-492AAAB for detailed specifications.

4. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as comply-ing with UL 444, UL 1651, and NFPA 70 for the following types:





D. Jacket:


2. Cable cordage jacket, fiber, unit, and group color shall be according to TIA-598-C.

3. Imprinted with fiber count, fiber type, and aggregate length at regular intervals not to exceed 40 inches.





1. ADC.


3. Belden Inc.


5. Corning Incorporated; Corning Cable Systems.

6. CSI Technologies Inc.

7. Dynacom Inc.

8. Hubbell Incorporated; Hubbell Premise Wiring.


10. Siemon.

C. Cable Connecting Hardware: Meet the Optical Fiber Connector Intermateability Standards (FOCIS) specifications of TIA-604-2-B, TIA-604-3-B, and TIA/EIA-604-12. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.3.

1. Quick-connect, simplex and duplex, Type SC or Type LC connectors per DACC. In-sertion loss not more than 0.75 dB.


2.8 COAXIAL CABLE





3. West Penn


5. General Cable

6. Panduit


C. General Coaxial Cable Requirements: Broadband type, recommended by cable manufacturer specifically for broadband data transmission applications. Coaxial cable and accessories shall have 75-ohm nominal impedance with a return loss of 20 dB maximum from 7 to 806 MHz.

D. RG-11/U: NFPA 70, Type CATV.






E. RG-6/U: NFPA 70, Type CATV or CM.




4. Suitable for indoor installations.

F. NFPA and UL Compliance: Coaxial cables shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying with UL 1655, and with NFPA 70 "Radio and Television Equipment" and "Community Antenna Television and Radio Distribution" Articles. Types are as follows:







2. Blonder Tongue

3. Pico Macom




C. Coaxial-Cable Connectors: Type BNC, 75 ohms.

2.10 RS-232 CABLE

A. Standard Cable: NFPA 70, Type CM.

1. Paired, 2 pairs, No. 22 AWG, stranded (7x30) tinned copper conductors.

2. Polypropylene insulation.

3. Individual aluminum foil-polyester tape shielded pairs with 100 percent shield coverage.

4. PVC jacket.

5. Pairs are cabled on common axis with No. 24 AWG, stranded (7x32) tinned copper drain wire.

6. Flame Resistance: Comply with UL 1581.

B. Plenum-Rated Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMP.


2. Plastic insulation.

3. Individual aluminum foil-polyester tape shielded pairs with 100 percent shield coverage.

4. Plastic jacket.

5. Pairs are cabled on common axis with No. 24 AWG, stranded (7x32) tinned copper drain wire.

6. Flame Resistance: Comply with NFPA 262.

2.11 RS-485 CABLE

A. Standard Cable: NFPA 70, Type CM or CMG.

1. Paired, 2 pairs, twisted, No. 22 AWG, stranded (7x30) tinned copper conductors.

2. PVC insulation.

3. Unshielded.

4. PVC jacket.


B. Plenum-Rated Cable: NFPA 70, Type CIVIP.


2. Fluorinated ethylene propylene insulation.


3. Unshielded.

4. Fluorinated ethylene propylene jacket.

5. Flame Resistance: NFPA 262, Flame Test.

2.12 LOW-VOLTAGE CONTROL CABLE

A. Paired Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMG.

1. One pair, twisted, No. 16 AWG, stranded (19x29) and No. 18 AWG, stranded (19x30) tinned copper conductors.

2. PVC insulation.

3. Unshielded.

4. PVC jacket.


B. Plenum-Rated, Paired Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMP.

One pair, twisted, No. 16 AWG, stranded (19x29) and No. 18 AWG, stranded (19x30) tinned copper conductors.

2. PVC insulation.

3. Unshielded.

4. PVC jacket.

5. Flame Resistance: Comply with NFPA 262.

2.13 CONTROL-CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS

A. Class 1 Control Circuits: Stranded copper, Type THHN-THWN, complying with UL 83, in race-way.

B. Class 2 Control Circuits: Stranded copper, Type THHN-THWN, complying with UL 83, in race-way.

C. Class 3 Remote-Control and Signal Circuits: Stranded copper, Type TVV or TF, complying with UL 83.

2.14 FIRE ALARM WIRE AND CABLE



1. Comtran Corporation.


2. Draka Cableteq USA.

3. Genesis Cable Products; Honeywell International, Inc.

4. Rockbestos-Suprenant Cable Corp.

5. West Penn Wire.

C. General Wire and Cable Requirements: NRTL listed and labeled as complying with NFPA 70, Article 760.

D. Signaling Line Circuits: Twisted, shielded pair, not less than No. 18 AWG size as recommended by system manufacturer.

1. Circuit Integrity Cable: Twisted shielded pair, NFPA 70, Article 760, Classification Cl, for power-limited fire alarm signal service Type FPL. NRTL listed and labeled as complying with UL 1424 and UL 2196 for a 2-hour rating.

E. Non-Power-Limited Circuits: Solid-copper conductors with 600-V rated, 75 deg C, color-coded insulation.

1. Low-Voltage Circuits: No. 16 AWG, minimum.

2. Line-Voltage Circuits: No, 12 AWG, minimum.

3. Multiconductor Armored Cable: NFPA 70, Type MC, copper conductors, Type TFNITTHHN conductor insulation, copper drain wire, copper armor with outer jacket with red identifier stripe, NTRL listed for fire alarm and cable tray installation, plenum rated, and complying with requirements in UL 2196 for a 2-hour rating.

2.15 IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS



1. Brady Worldwide, Inc.

2. HellermannTyton North America.

3. Kroy LLC.

4. Panduit Corp.

C. Comply with UL 969 for a system of labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers.

D. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical

Systems." 2.16 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL



B. Factory test UTP and optical fiber cables on reels according to TIA/EIA-568-B.1.


D. Factory test multimode optical fiber cables according to TIA-526-14-A and TIA/EIA-568-B.3.

E. Factory sweep test coaxial cables at frequencies from 5 MHz to 1 GHz. Sweep test shall test the frequency response, or attenuation over frequency, of a cable by generating a voltage whose frequency is varied through the specified frequency range and graphing the results.

F. Cable will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


3. PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for installation of supports for cables.

3.2 WIRING METHOD

A. Install wiring in metal pathways and wireways.

1. Minimum conduit size shall be 3/4 inch. Control and data transmission wiring shall not share conduit with other building wiring systems.

2. Comply with requirements in Division 28 Section "Pathways for Electronic Safety and Security."

3. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Cable Trays for Electrical Systems."

B. Install cable, concealed in accessible ceilings, walls, and floors when possible.

C. Wiring within Enclosures:

1. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii.

2. Install lacing bars and distribution spools.

3. Separate power-limited and non-power-limited conductors as recommended in writing by manufacturer.

4. Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to sides and back of enclosure.

5. Connect conductors that are terminated, spliced, or interrupted in any enclosure associated with intrusion system to terminal blocks.

6. Mark each terminal according to system's wiring diagrams.

7. Make all connections with approved crimp-on terminal spade lugs, pressure-type terminal blocks, or plug connectors.


3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES


B. Conductors: Size according to system manufacturer's written instructions unless otherwise in-dicated.

General Requirements for Cabling:

1. Comply with TINEIA-568-B.1.


3. Terminate all conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make termi-nations only at indicated outlets, terminals, and cross-connect and patch panels.

4. Cables may not be spliced. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches and not more than 6 inches from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals.

5. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in BICSI ITSIM, "Cabling Termination Practices" Chapter. Install lacing bars and distribution spools.

6. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice ca-ble between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if dam-aged during installation and replace it with new cable.

7 Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling. Heat lamps shall not be used for heating.

8. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 4, "Pulling Cable." Monitor cable pull tensions.

D. UTP Cable Installation: Install using techniques, practices, and methods that are consistent with Category 6 rating of components and that ensure Category 6 performance of completed and linked signal paths, end to end.



3. Do not untwist UTP cables more than 1/2 inch from the point of termination to maintain cable geometry.

E. Optical Fiber Cable Installation:

1. Comply with TINE IA-568-B.3.

2. Cable shall be terminated on connecting hardware that is rack or cabinet mounted.

F. Open-Cable Installation:



2. Suspend copper cable not in a wireway or pathway a minimum of 8 inches above ceilings by cable supports not more than 60 inches apart.


G. Separation from EMI Sources:

1. Comply with BICSI TDMM and TIA-569-B recommendations for separating unshielded copper voice and data communication cable from potential EMI sources, including electrical power lines and equipment.



Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches.


3. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and unshielded power lines or electrical equipment shall be as follows:




4. Separation between cables in grounded metallic raceways and power lines and elec-trical equipment located in grounded metallic conduits or enclosures shall be as fol-lows:




5. Separation between Cables and Electrical Motors and Transformers, 5 kVA or HP and Larger: A minimum of 48 inches.

6. Separation between Cables and Fluorescent Fixtures: A minimum of 5 inches.

3.4 FIRE ALARM WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NFPA 72.

B. Wiring Method: Install wiring in metal raceway according to Division 26 Section "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems."



2. Fire alarm circuits and equipment control wiring associated with the fire alarm system shall be installed in a dedicated raceway system. This system shall not be used for any other wire or cable.

C. Wiring Method:

1. Cables and raceways used for fire alarm circuits, and equipment control wiring associated with the fire alarm system, may not contain any other wire or cable.

2. Fire-Rated Cables: Use of 2-hour, fire-rated fire alarm cables, NFPA 70, Types MI and Cl, is not permitted.

3. Signaling Line Circuits: Power-limited fire alarm cables shall not be installed in the same cable or raceway as signaling line circuits.

D. Wiring within Enclosures: Separate power-limited and non-power-limited conductors as rec-ommended by manufacturer. Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to sides and back of the enclosure. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess. Connect conductors that are terminated, spliced, or interrupted in any enclosure associated with the fire alarm system to terminal blocks. Mark each terminal according to the system's wir-ing diagrams. Make all connections with approved crimp-on terminal spade lugs, pressure-type terminal blocks, or plug connectors.

E. Cable Taps: Use numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes, cabinets, or equipment enclosures where circuit connections are made.

F. Color-Coding: Color-code fire alarm conductors differently from the normal building power wir-ing. Use one color-code for alarm circuit wiring and another for supervisory circuits. Color-code audible alarm-indicating circuits differently from alarm-initiating circuits. Use different colors for visible alarm-indicating devices. Paint fire alarm system junction boxes and covers red.

G. Risers: Install at least two vertical cable risers to serve the tire alarm system. Separate risers in close proximity to each other with a minimum one-hour-rated wall, so the loss of one riser does not prevent the receipt or transmission of signals from other floors or zones.

H. Wiring to Remote Alarm Transmitting Device: 1-inch conduit between the fire alarm control panel and the transmitter. Install number of conductors and electrical supervision for connect-ing wiring as needed to suit monitoring function.

3.5 POWER AND CONTROL-CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS

A. 120-V Power Wiring: Install according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables" unless otherwise indicated.

B. Minimum Conductor Sizes:

1. Class 1 remote-control and signal circuits, No. 14 AWG.

2. Class 2 low-energy, remote-control and signal circuits, No. 16 AWG.

3. Class 3 low-energy, remote-control, alarm and signal circuits, No. 12 AWG.

3.6 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements in Division 28 Section "Perimeter Security Systems" for connecting, terminating, and identifying wires and cables.


B. Comply with requirements in Division 28 Section "Intrusion Detection" for connecting, terminat-ing, and identifying wires and cables.

C. Comply with requirements in Division 28 Section "Access Control" for connecting, terminating, and identifying wires and cables.

D. Comply with requirements in Division 28 Section "Video Surveillance" for connecting, terminat-ing, and identifying wires and cables.

E. Comply with requirements in Division 28 Section "PLC Electronic Detention Monitoring and Control Systems" for connecting, terminating, and identifying wires and cables.

F. Comply with requirements in Division 28 Section "Digital, Addressable Fire-Alarm System" for connecting, terminating, and identifying wires and cables.

G. Comply with requirements in Division 28 Section "Refrigerant Detection and Alarm" for connect-ing, terminating, and identifying wires and cables.

3.7 FIRESTOPPING


B. Comply with TIA-569-B, "Firestopping" Annex A.


3.8 GROUNDING

A. For communications wiring, comply with J-STD-607-A and with BICSI TDMM, "Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical Protection" Chapter.

B. For low-voltage wiring and cabling, comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

3.9 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, and cabling complying with TIA/EIA-606-A. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Sys-tems."



B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

C. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative:

Visually inspect UTP and optical fiber cable jacket materials for NRTL certification markings. Inspect cabling terminations to confirm color-coding for pin assignments, and inspect cabling connections to confirm compliance with TIA/EIA-568-B.1.

2. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equip-ment and patch cords, and labeling of all components.

LA MIRADA LIBRARY CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

16900-16

3. Test UTP cabling for DC loop resistance, shorts, opens, intermittent faults, and polarity between conductors. Test operation of shorting bars in connection blocks. Test cables after termination but not cross connection.

a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA/EIA-568-B.2. Perform tests with a tester that complies with performance requirements in "Test Instruments (Normative)" Annex, complying with measurement accuracy specified in "Measurement Accuracy (Informative)" Annex. Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test configuration.


a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA/EIA-568-B.1. Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test configuration.


1) Multimode Link Measurements: Test at 850 or 1300 nm in one di-rection according to TIA-526-14-A, Method B, One Reference Jumper.

2) Attenuation test results for links shall be less than 2.0 dB. Attenuation test results shall be less than that calculated according to equation in TIA/EIA-568-B.1.

5. Coaxial Cable Tests: Comply with requirements in Division 27 Section "Master Anten- na Television System."

D. Document data for each measurement. Print data for submittals in a summary report that is formatted using Table 10.1 in BICSI TDMM as a guide, or transfer the data from the instrument to the computer, save as text files, print, and submit.

E. End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


END OF SECTION

LA MIRADA LIBRARY ACCESS CONTROL 16910-1

SECTION 16910

ACCESS CONTROL

CONTRACTOR SHALL REFERENCE COUNTY OF LOS ANGELES DEPARTMENT OF ANIMAL CARE & CONTROL COMMUNICATIONS/LOW-VOLTAGE SPECIFICATIONS, DATED 08/10/15, FOR ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS

1. PART 1 GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Security access central-control station.

2. One or more security access networked workstations.

3. Security access operating system and application software.

4. Security access controllers connected to high-speed electronic-data transmission network.

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND INSTALLATION REQUIREMENT: Access Control System

The intent and purpose of this system shall be to provide Card Access Control. The system design follows:

a. The system design utilizes a Sielox Pinnacle Access Software System design. One server computer is required. The software will allow for DACC Staff to control access for only their doors and employees through the programming of the restricted database feature on the Access Control System Software. Additional, remote workstation computers may be required and installed as designated on the plans. The system will provide the capability for remote access database management or management via client network.

b. The Access Control System (ACS) shall NOT be integrated with the Bosch Intrusion Alarm system. The ACS shall be integrated with the Intrusion Alarm system to provide access and disarm areas or security zones independent of the other zones. This may at DACC discretion incorporate an access level unique to a class of cardholders that when presented, will provide a dedicated momentary relay closure to disarm the Intrusion Alarm system.

c. The ACS system shall also include the Sielox Aegis2 Graphical & Control Integration Software. The Aegis2 software feature shall allow the ability to control all alarms produced by the Bosch or Sielox control panels and will display alarm information on any workstation with the Aegis2 Graphical Maps Display license. The Aegis2 will also allow for real time event monitoring of all the access control door locations. Any authorized administrator of the system shall be able to remotely lock or unlock doors from the Aegis2 application. The modular architecture of the Aegis2 system and subsystems shall allow for all the features and functions of the Bosch alarm panels to provide redundancy of alarms on Graphical Map Displays or on the Bosch alarm keypads. Privileges shall be determined by


the Aegis2 system and allowed per workstation. Each workstation shall be capable of being programmed to receive any or all the alarms through the Sielox networked security system.

d. The Access Control system contractor shall be an authorized and current direct Sielox dealer as described in paragraph 1.2 A Contractor Qualifications. The contractor must provide proof of dealership with Sielox, Inc., as well as verification of prior experience with all specified equipment including but not limited to the Database Partitioning feature and the Aegis Graphics Display module. The contractor must have experience in programming system features. The installer must provide proof of training via a valid training certificate prior to any work being performed. Certificate must have been issued more than six (6) months and less than five (5) years prior to installation date. Proof of dealership must be attached to any quotation.

e. The General Contractor shall furnish and install all proximity card readers as per locations indicated on the plans or drawings. The card readers shall be connected to locking devices on the doors at the locations specified on the plans. To comply with ADA code requirements, all proximity card readers shall be installed within six (6) inches of the door they are controlling.

f. Each door with card reader shall have its own dedicated magnetic door contacts and shall connect to the Access Controller panel to reset the locking device at the door when opened.

g. The door locking devices (Electrified Hinge, Mortised Lock, Electrified Door Strike and Panic Bar) must be rated at 24-volt DC for continuous operation. Power supplies for these door locking devices shall be mounted in a panel located in the nearest Telecommunications room (MCR, TR1.1, etc.). The power supplies for these door locking devices shall have a dedicated 120V-20Amp branch circuit identified and labeled with panel and branch circuit numbers on the junction box mounted in the designated wall space in the MCR backboard. This branch circuit is separate from the Access Controller power supply panel branch circuit,

h. The Access Controller power supply panel shall have a dedicated 120V-20Amp branch circuit identified and labeled with panel and branch circuit numbers on the junction box mounted in the designated backboard space in the MCR/TR.

i. The Access Controller/Power Supply panels and Door Locking devices power supply panels shall be grounded to the Telecoms Ground Bus Bar using #12AWG solid copper wires with green insulation. The ground wire shall be run inside a 1/2- inch conduit.

j. All low voltage wirings running between panels and enclosures shall be in conduit.

k. The Access Controller panel and Power Supplies panels shall be provided with locks and four (4) sets of keys.

l. Cabling shall be a minimum of #18/2 AWG conductors that reflect less than a 10% voltage drop to any access control component.

m. The ACS contractor shall program system and restricted database feature. There will be no equipment substitutions that will be accepted for the Sielox ACS system. The ACS contractor shall provide fifty (50) initial cards. The Contractor shall be responsible for the initial programming of all requested time zones, access levels, card users and cards. The contractor shall be responsible to provide a minimum of four (8) hours users training on system use, programming, backing up critical database files and creating report templates at a date and time to be determined by the County.

n. The General Contractor or Door Hardware contractor shall furnish and install the Fail Secure door lock hardware and electrified door hinge with 4'cable spliced to the door lock. The other side of the hinge shall be wired by the ACS contractor. The purpose is to ensure that the door will stay latched in


case of power failure. Panic hardware shall be provided on all Fail Secure doors for egress as specified on the plans. Any penetrations of doors after UL Listing shall require UL re-certification.

o. Properly bond and ground all shields on one side only.

p. Provide UPS for ALL system components and equipment, including servers, workstations, monitors, enrollment stations, and accessories, for up to four (4) hours continuous use.

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND INSTALLATION REQUIREMENT: Restroom Door Release

System Description and Installation Requirement

a. The intent of this system is to provide door releases from the Circulation Desk and the Children’s Desk as required for the restroom doors. It requires that a line of sight be established between the restrooms and the Circulation and Children’s desks. It may be incorporated with the Door Communications System in Section 3.2.4. It may also be integrated with the card access or intrusion alarm systems, Sections 3.2.1 and 3.2.2 respectively as required.

b. The ACS contractor (if included in their scope) shall provide submittals for the system to

include design and hardware required for making the system operational prior to ordering and installation for approval and sign-off by ISD Project Manager. Otherwise, this shall be furnished and installed under the General Contractor’s scope of work if indicated or stated on the ISD drawing Telecommunications notes.

c. The power supply panel for the Restroom Door Release shall be installed in the designated

wall space in the MCR backboard and shall be provided with a dedicated 120V-20Amp circuit labeled with panel and branch circuit numbers on the junction box. The door locking devices must be rated at 24-VDC for continuous duty.

d. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to coordinate with the General Contractor,

electrician, or door contractor for the installation schedule and to deliver a fully functional system.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. CCTV: Closed-circuit television.

B. CPU: Central processing unit.

C. Credential: Data assigned to an entity and used to identify that entity.

D. dpi: Dots per inch.

E. DTS: Digital Termination Service. A microwave-based, line-of-sight communication pro-vided directly to the end user.

F. GFI: Ground fault interrupter.

G. Identifier: A credential card; keypad personal identification number; or code, biometric characteristic, or other unique identification entered as data into the entry-control data-


base for the purpose of identifying an individual. Where this term is presented with an ini-tial capital letter, this definition applies.

H. I/O: Input/Output.

LAN: Local area network.

J. Location: A Location on the network having a PC-to-controller communications link, with additional controllers at the Location connected to the PC-to-controller link with a TIA 485A communications loop. Where this term is presented with an initial capital letter, this definition applies.

K. PC: Personal computer. Applies to the central station, workstations, and file servers.

L. PCI Bus: Peripheral Component Interconnect. A peripheral bus providing a high-speed data path between the CPU and the peripheral devices such as a monitor, disk drive, or network.

M. PDF: Portable Document Format. The file format used by the Acrobat document-exchange-system software from Adobe.

N. RAS: Remote access services.

0. RF: Radio frequency.

P. ROM: Read-only memory. ROM data are maintained through losses of power.

Q. TCP/IP: Transport control protocol/Internet protocol incorporated into Microsoft Windows.

R. TWAIN: Technology without an Interesting Name. A programming interface that lets a graphics application, such as an image editing program or desktop publishing program, activate a scanner, frame grabber, or other image-capturing device.

S. UPS: Uninterruptible power supply.

T. USB: Universal serial bus.

U. WAN: Wide area network.

V. WAV: The digital audio format used in Microsoft Windows.

W. WMP: Windows media player.

X. Wiegand: Patented magnetic principle that uses specially treated wires embedded in the credential card.

Y. Windows: Operating system by Microsoft Corporation.

Z. Workstation: A PC with software that is configured for specific, limited security-system functions.

AA. WYSIWYG: What You See Is What You Get. Text and graphics appear on the screen the same as they will in print.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. Reference each product to a


location on Drawings. Test and evaluation data presented in Product Data shall comply with SIA 610-01.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Diagrams for cable management system.

2. System labeling schedules, including electronic copy of labeling schedules that are part of the cable and asset identification system of the software specified in Parts 2 and 3.

3. Wiring Diagrams. For power, signal, and control wiring. Show typical wiring

schematics including the following:

a. Workstation outlets, jacks, and jack assemblies.

b. Patch cords.

c. Patch panels.

4. Cable Administration Drawings: As specified in "Identification" Article.

5. Battery and charger calculations for central station, workstations, and controllers.

C. Other Action Submittals:

1. Project planning documents as specified in Part 3.


A. Field quality-control reports.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For security system to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Op-eration and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Microsoft Windows software documentation.

2. PC installation and operating documentation, manuals, and software for the PC and all installed peripherals. Software shall include system restore, emergency boot diskettes, and drivers for all installed hardware. Provide separately for each PC.

3. Hard copies of manufacturer's specification sheets, operating specifications, de-sign guides, user's guides for software and hardware, and PDF files on CD-ROM of the hard-copy submittal.

4. System installation and setup guides with data forms to plan and record options and setup decisions.


A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.


1. Alarm Printer Black/Red Ribbons: Package of 12.

2. Laser Printers: Three toner cassettes and one replacement drum unit.

3. Credential card blanks, ready for printing. Include enough credential cards for all personnel to be enrolled at the site plus an extra 50 percent for future use.

4. Fuses of all kinds, power and electronic, equal to 10 percent of amount installed

for each size used, but no fewer than three units.


A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer.

Cable installer must have on staff a registered communication distribution designer certified by Building Industry Consulting Service International.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain central station, workstations, controllers, Identifier readers, and all software through one source from single manufacturer.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

D. Comply with NEPA 70, "National Electrical Code."

E. Comply with SIA DC-01 and SIA DC-03 and SIA DC-07.


A. Central Station, Workstations, and Controllers:

1. Store in temperature- and humidity-controlled environment in original manufac-turer's sealed containers. Maintain ambient temperature between 50 and 85 deg F, and not more than 80 percent relative humidity, noncondensing.

2. Open each container; verify contents against packing list; and file copy of packing list, complete with container identification, for inclusion in operation and maintenance data.

3. Mark packing list with the same designations assigned to materials and equip-ment for recording in the system labeling schedules that are generated by software specified in "Cable and Asset Management Software" Article.

4. Save original manufacturer's containers and packing materials and deliver as directed under provisions covering extra materials.


A. Environmental Conditions: System shall be capable of withstanding the following envi-ronmental conditions without mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of operating capability:

Control Station: Rated for continuous operation in ambient conditions of 60 to 85 deg F and a relative humidity of 20 to 80 percent, noncondensing.

2. Indoor, Controlled Environment: NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure. System compo-nents, except the central-station control unit, installed in air-conditioned indoor


environments shall be rated for continuous operation in ambient conditions of 65 deg F dry bulb and 40 to 60 percent relative humidity, noncondensing.

3. Outdoor Environment: NEMA 250, NEMA 250, Type 3R enclosures. System

components installed in locations exposed to weather shall be rated for continu-ous operation in ambient conditions of minus 30 to plus 122 deg F dry bulb and 20 to 90 percent relative humidity, condensing. Rate for continuous operation where exposed to rain as specified in NEMA 250, winds up to 85 mph.

2. PART 2 PRODUCTS




A. Manufacturers' names and model numbers are used herein only as a means of establishing standards of quality and performance. Comparable equipment of standard manufacture and established reputation, which meets the requirements outlined above, may be submitted to the DACC Systems Engineer for approval. Equipment of the following manu-facturers may be used if it meets or exceeds parameters of the specified equipment.

B. Access Control System — Sielox Access Control System (ACS)

C. Sirens — Sentrol

D. Cable — Superior Essex, Belden, West Penn, Berk-Tek, General Cable, Panduit

E. Panic Button — Suspicion, Edwards, Soundolier,

F. Public Area and Emergency Exit Doors Panic Hardware — Von Duprin Series #99, Series #33 or Detex V-40.

G. Uninterruptible Power Supply System- APC


A. Software — Sielox Pinnacle Software with Web Seat License — AC-PNVVWST

B. Sielox Performa Series Proximity Reader — AC-125SG

C. Sielox Performa Series Reader (mullion-mount)- AC-125MG

D. Sielox Proximity card — AC-15C-E (Quantity = 50).

Sielox 32-Bit Terminal Controller— AC-1700-NN2 Controller. One AC-1700- NN2 Controller required for every two doors. One AC-EN32 Cabinet required for every 8-doors. Prior to installation ACS contractor shall verify with the County whether to install a RS484 module per controller or a Sielox LAN module per Controller.

F. Altronix AL600-ULX-FID (for Terminal Controllers) or Von Duprin Power Supply. One needed for every (4) Sielox Controllers, set at 12VDC.

G. Altronix AL600-ULM FID (for Door Locking devices) or Von Duprin Power Supply. One needed for every (8) access control door locks requiring 24vdc less than 500ma each. If


any low voltage electrified panic bars are to be installed contractor to verify voltage and amperage requirements and supply the power supply needed for those devices in addition to the other electric locking devices.

H. APC Smart-UPS 1000VA - XL1000VA.

12V, 7AH batteries — two (2) for each panel as required for four (4) hours — Bosch D126.

J. SS&W (Security Servers & Workstations Inc.) - WS200 Intel vPro System Raid Access Control Server Computer. Server shall be a Intel Core 2 DUOTM processor, 2.33 GHz, 1333MHz FSB, 4 MB L2 Cache, 1 GB RAM, 160GB Mirrored SATA Hot Swap Drives, DVD/RW, 1 RS232 Serial Port (up to 16), 4 USB Ports, USB Keyboard, USB Mouse, Dual Monitor Support. Installed Software: Windows 7 Pro, Paragon Disk Backup, SyAM Software System Client. Server shall have a minimum 3-year warranty parts and labor.

K. Von Duprin Panic Hardware Series #99 or #33 (as required) with electrified lever trim and Von Duprin electric power transfer unit #EPT-218 to be provided and installed by the General Contractor or Door Contractor.

L. Sielox Aegis 2 Graphics Display System Application - AC-AST

M. Sielox Aegis 2 Bosch Serial Alarm Driver — AC-SER

N. Magnetic door contacts, flush-mounted and closed loop.- Sentrol 1078CT

0. T-REX Request to Exit Motion Detectors — Bosch DS160

P. Isolation Relays (For Elevator Control — if required).

Q. CSC Access Control Composite Cable #588343 (112117-04-1RLO) This composite cable shall have 4-component cables within its jacket. 1st cable shall be a 14-2C for lock power, the 2nd cable shall be a 18-2C & a 18-4C for card reader, 3rd cable shall be a 18-4C for the door switch, and the final cable shall be a 18 -4C for REX/PIR. Power cables needed for special electrified panic bars shall be determined by the security contractor and included in the design and bid to make the system fully functional.

R. All other cables and hardware required to make the system fully functional.

S. CSC 112000 (18/2 Shielded CMP cable)

T. CSC 112100 (18/4 Shielded CMP cable)

Restroom Door Release Materials and Equipment

a. Power supply – 25VDC, 3Amp with battery backup b. Electrified Door Strike – Von Duprin c. Door button – Rutherford surface button d. Cable – 18-2C, CMP (twisted pair).


3. PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine pathway elements intended for cables. Check raceways, cable trays, and other elements for compliance with space allocations, installation tolerances, hazards to cable installation, and other conditions affecting installation.

B. Examine roughing-in for LAN and control cable conduit systems to PCs, controllers, card readers, and other cable-connected devices to verify actual locations of conduit and back boxes before device installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with recommendations in SIA CP-01.

B. Comply with TIA/EIA 606-A, "Administration Standard for Commercial Telecommunications Infrastructure."

C. Obtain detailed Project planning forms from manufacturer of access-control system; de-velop custom forms to suit Project. Fill in all data available from Project plans and specifi-cations and publish as Project planning documents for review and approval.

1. Record setup data for control station and workstations.

2. For each Location, record setup of controller features and access requirements.


Propose start and stop times for time zones and holidays, and match up access levels for doors.

4. Set up groups, facility codes, linking, and list inputs and outputs for each controller.

5. Assign action message names and compose messages.

6. Set up alarms. Establish interlocks between alarms, intruder detection, and vid-eo surveillance features.

7. Prepare and install alarm graphic maps.

8. Develop user-defined fields.

9. Develop screen layout formats.

10. Propose setups for guard tours and key control.

11. Discuss badge layout options; design badges.

12. Complete system diagnostics and operation verification.

13. Prepare a specific plan for system testing, startup, and demonstration.

14. Develop acceptance test concept and, on approval, develop specifics of the test.

15. Develop cable and asset-management system details; input data from construction documents. Include system schematics and Visio Technical Drawings in electronic format.

D. In meetings with Architect and Owner, present Project planning documents and review, adjust, and prepare final setup documents. Use final documents to set up system software.

3.3 CABLING

A. Comply with NECA 1, "Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction."

B. Install cables and wiring according to requirements in Division 28 Section "Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security."

C. Wiring Method: Install wiring in raceway and cable tray except within consoles, cabinets, desks, and counters. Conceal raceway and wiring except in unfinished spaces.

D. Wiring Method: Install wiring in raceway and cable tray except within consoles, cabinets, desks, and counters and except in accessible ceiling spaces and in gypsum board parti-tions where unenclosed wiring method may be used. Use NRTL-listed plenum cable in environmental airspaces, including plenum ceilings. Conceal raceway and cables except in unfinished spaces.


E. Install LAN cables using techniques, practices, and methods that are consistent with Cat-egory 5E rating of components and fiber-optic rating of components, and that ensure Cat-egory 6 and fiber-optic performance of completed and linked signal paths, end to end.

Boxes and enclosures containing security-system components or cabling, and which are easily accessible to employees or to the public, shall be provided with a lock. Boxes above ceiling level in occupied areas of the building shall not be considered accessible. Junction boxes and small device enclosures below ceiling level and easily accessible to employees or the public shall be covered with a suitable cover plate and secured with tamperproof screws.

G. Install end-of-line resistors at the field device location and not at the controller or panel lo-cation.

3.4 CABLE APPLICATION

A. Comply with TIA 569-B, "Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Path-ways and Spaces."

B. Cable application requirements are minimum requirements and shall be exceeded if rec-ommended or required by manufacturer of system hardware.

C. TIA 232-F Cabling: Install at a maximum distance of 50 ft..

D. TIA 485-A Cabling: Install at a maximum distance of 4000 ft..

E. Card Readers and Keypads:

1. Install number of conductor pairs recommended by manufacturer for the functions specified.

2. Unless manufacturer recommends larger conductors, install No. 22 AWG wire if maximum distance from controller to the reader is 250 ft., and install

No. 20 AWG wire if maximum distance is 500 ft..

3. For greater distances, install "extender" or "repeater" modules recommended by manufacturer of the controller.

4. Install minimum No. 18 AWG shielded cable to readers and keypads that draw 50 mA or more.

F. Install minimum No. 16 AWG cable from controller to electrically powered locks. Do not exceed 250 ft..

G. Install minimum No. 18 AWG ac power wire from transformer to controller, with a maxi-mum distance of 25 ft..

3.5 GROUNDING

A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

B. Comply with IEEE 1100, "Recommended Practice for Power and Grounding Electronic Equipment."


C. Ground cable shields, drain conductors, and equipment to eliminate shock hazard and to minimize ground loops, common-mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other im-pairments.

D. Bond shields and drain conductors to ground at only one point in each circuit.

E. Signal Ground:

1. Terminal: Locate in each equipment room and wiring closet; isolate from power system and equipment grounding.

2. Bus: Mount on wall of main equipment room with standoff insulators.

3. Backbone Cable: Extend from signal ground bus to signal ground terminal in each equipment room and wiring closet.

3.6 INSTALLATION

A. Push Buttons: Where multiple push buttons are housed within a single switch enclosure, they shall be stacked vertically with each push-button switch labeled with 1/4-inch- high text and symbols as required. Push-button switches shall be connected to the controller associated with the portal to which they are applied, and shall operate the appropriate electric strike, electric bolt, or other facility release device.

B. Install card readers, keypads, push buttons, and biometric readers.

3.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. In addition to requirements in this article, comply with applicable requirements in Divi-sion 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems" and with TIA/EIA 606-A.

B. Using software specified in "Cable and Asset Management Software" Article, develop ca-ble administration drawings for system identification, testing, and management. Use unique, alphanumeric designation for each cable, and label cable and jacks, connectors, and terminals to which it connects with the same designation. Use logical and systematic designations for facility's architectural arrangement.

C. Label each terminal strip and screw terminal in each cabinet, rack, or panel.

1. All wiring conductors connected to terminal strips shall be individually numbered, and each cable or wiring group being extended from a panel or cabinet to a building-mounted device shall be identified with the name and number of the par-ticular device as shown.

2. Each wire connected to building-mounted devices is not required to be num-bered at the device if the color of the wire is consistent with the associated wire connected and numbered within the panel or cabinet.

D. At completion, cable and asset management software shall reflect as-built conditions.

3.8 SYSTEM SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE

A. Develop, install, and test software and hardware, and perform database tests for the complete and proper operation of systems involved. Assign software license to Owner.



A. Perform tests and inspections.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representa-tive to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.

B. Tests and Inspections:

1. LAN Cable Procedures: Inspect for physical damage and test each conductor signal path for continuity and shorts. Use Class 2, bidirectional, Category 5 test-er. Test for faulty connectors, splices, and terminations. Test according to TIA/E1A 568-B.1, "Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standards - Part 1: General Requirements." Link performance for UTP cables must comply with minimum criteria in TIA/EIA 568-6.1.

2. Test each circuit and component of each system. Tests shall include, but are not limited to, measurements of power-supply output under maximum load, signal loop resistance, and leakage to ground where applicable. System components with battery backup shall be operated on battery power for a period of not less than 10 percent of the calculated battery operating time. Provide special equip-ment and software if testing requires special or dedicated equipment.

3. Operational Test: After installation of cables and connectors, demonstrate prod-uct capability and compliance with requirements. Test each signal path for end-to-end performance from each end of all pairs installed. Remove temporary connections when tests have been satisfactorily completed.

C. Devices and circuits will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.10 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to supervise and assist with startup service.

1. Complete installation and startup checks according to approved procedures that were developed in "Preparation" Article and with manufacturer's written instruc-tions.

2. Enroll and prepare badges and access cards for Owner's operators, manage-ment, and security personnel.

3.11 PROTECTION

A. Maintain strict security during the installation of equipment and software. Rooms housing the control station, and workstations that have been powered up shall be locked and se-cured with an activated burglar alarm and access-control system reporting to a central station complying with UL 1610, "Central-Station Burglar-Alarm Units," during periods when a qualified operator in the employ of Contractor is not present.

LA MIRADA LIBRARY ACCESS CONTROL

16910-14

DEMONSTRATION

3.12 ENGAGE A FACTORY-AUTHORIZED SERVICE REPRESENTATIVE TO TRAIN OWNER'S MAINTENANCE PERSONNEL TO ADJUST, OPERATE, AND MAINTAIN SECURITY ACCESS SYSTEM. SEE DIVISION 01 SECTION "DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING."

A. Develop separate training modules for the following:

1. Computer system administration personnel to manage and repair the LAN and databases and to update and maintain software,

2. Operators who prepare and input credentials to man the control station and workstations and to enroll personnel.

3. Security personnel.

4. Hardware maintenance personnel.

5. Corporate management.

END OF SECTION

LA MIRADA LIBRARY INTRUSION DETECTION 16920-1

SECTION16920

INTRUSION DETECTION


ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS

1. PART 1 GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Intrusion detection with communication links to perform monitoring, alarm, and control functions.

2. Integration of other electronic and electrical systems and equipment.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 28 Section "Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security" for cabling between master control units and field-mounted devices and control units.

2. Division 28 Section "Perimeter Security Systems" for outdoor intrusion detection devices, including lighting and communications associated with chain-link fence gates.

3. Division 28 Section "Video Surveillance" for CCTV cameras that are used as devices for video motion detection.

C. System Description and Installation Requirement

D. The intent and purpose of this system shall be to provide a security/intrusion entry alarm system in the building. All perimeter doors, roof hatches, or other external entry points shall be equipped with dedicated, concealed magnetic contact switches. Interior protection shall be provided by combination passive infrared/microwave detectors and glass break sensors located as required.

E. The alarm siren(s) shall be installed in the plenum above the keypad(s). Provide and install keypads at locations to be determined by County. Each alarm device shall report to the County Central Station as a separate point. Use point expander OctoPopit module(s) for the point expan-sion of the alarm panel and a separate enclosure(s) D8103 to house the expansion device(s). In-stall alarm cables home run from each alarm device to the panel. Appropriately sized "end of line" resistors shall be placed at the device end only.

F. Installation of modules, devices and wiring shall be in accordance with current Bosch design, in-stallation, and engineering standards. Additional power supplies, batteries, OctoPopits, OctoRe-lays, D8132 Battery Charger and associated cables shall be mounted in additional D8103 cabi-net(s). Maximum build out per D8103 or enclosure shall be 5 modules and or two (2) 12Volts - 7AH batteries.


G. The intrusion alarm cables shall be installed horizontally through the ceiling area in a neat and orderly fashion and supported by cable hangers at appropriate intervals. The cables shall be positioned at least six (6) inches from electrical equipment, electrical wiring, telephone cabling, and intercom cabling and data wires. Exposed wiring shall only be permitted above ceiling level or ten (10) feet from floor level. The installation shall comply with the County of Los Angeles Building Safety and Fire Codes. Contractor shall furnish, at his expense, all permits issued for scope of work. Contractor shall supply copies of all permits acquired.

H. The Bosch D7412/9412 GV3 or GV4 Alarm Panel and associated equipment enclosures shall be installed in the MCR room. Clearance in front of all alarm panels shall be a minimum of 36 inches. The alarm shall report to the LA County Sheriff Central Station. If required, the contractor shall be responsible for obtaining an alarm permit from the local law enforcement authority.

The Bosch Alarm Panel shall power all peripheral alarm devices for 24 hours of standby time with 5 minutes in alarm condition conforming to NFPA 72 central station requirements in the event of power failure. Bosch load calculation worksheet page 61 & 63 of document 74-07692-000-D shall reflect all security equipment component current loads, standby battery requirements and standby battery calculations. Standby power on battery back-up should be at least one (1) hour unless the building has generator power. In this case, the power receptacle circuit where the alarm panel is connected should be included on the standby generator power circuit. Additional D8132 battery charger modules and batteries shall be installed in Bosch D8103 enclosures.

J. A junction box with 120V-20Amp dedicated hard-wired circuit, identified and labeled with panel and branch circuit numbers, shall be provided for the Intrusion Alarm system Power Transformer located in the designated wall space in the MCR backboard.

K. Power transformers shall be mounted in Bosch D8004 transformer enclosures.

L. All low voltage wirings running between panels and enclosures shall be in conduit.

M. The Intrusion Alarm panels shall be grounded to the Telecoms Ground Bus Bar in the MCR with a #12AWG (solid) ground wire with green insulation. The ground wire shall be run inside a Y2 -

inch conduit.

N. The Intrusion Alarm panels shall be provided with locks and four (4) sets of keys.

0. Terminations and connections throughout the system shall employ terminal strips with rising wire clamp screws or solder terminals, all in cabinets or enclosures. Splices, Telephone punch type blocks, and electrical wire nuts are not acceptable. Although shielded cable should not be used, in cases where it is used, all cable shields should be grounded. Shields shall be grounded on one end only.

P. The alarm contractor shall be responsible for programming and testing the alarm panel in the local mode. LA County ISD FOS shall program the system to communicate with the Sheriff Central Station. The alarm contractor shall furnish DACC Systems Engineer with the completed Bosch programming sheets and As-Built (8W x 11") drawings(s) that indicate each device/point location identified to reflect 16 character idle text in programming on not less than 12 point text on floor plan prior to ISD FOS inspection, tests and programming of the system to communicate with the Sheriff Central Station. The alarm contractor shall submit As-Built drawings as outlined in paragraph 1.5, D 5.0 above.

Q. The following Security zones shall be programmed:

Zone 1 — Staff Entrance only

Zone 2 — Staff Area Zone 3 — Public Entrances


R. View Point status shall be configured in all Keypads or as designated by the DACC Systems Engi-neer.

S. The alarm contractor shall be an authorized and current direct Bosch/Radionics Dealer. The con-tractor must provide proof of dealership with Bosch/Radionics, INC. as well as verification of prior experience with Bosch/Radionics Controllers and System design, Detection Systems and have ex-perience with programming system features. The installer must provide proof of training via a valid training certificate prior to any work being performed. Certificate must have been issued more than six (6) months and less than five (5) years prior to installation date. Proof of dealership must be attached to this quotation.

T. The system shall be armed and disarmed manually by authorized DACC staff or on-site security staff.

U. The alarm contractor shall provide hands on training to County staff in the operation of the system. A roster of attendees shall be documented.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CCTV: Closed-circuit television.

B. PIR: Passive infrared.

C. RFI: Radio-frequency interference.

D. UPS: Uninterruptible power supply.

E. Control Unit: System component that monitors inputs and controls outputs through various circuits.

F. Master Control Unit: System component that accepts inputs from other control units and may also perform control-unit functions. The unit has limited capacity for the number of protected zones and is installed at an unattended location or at a location where it is not the attendant's primary function to monitor the security system.

G. Monitoring Station: Facility that receives signals and has personnel in attendance at all times to respond to signals. A central station is a monitoring station that is listed.

H. Protected Zone: A protected premises or an area within a protected premises that is provided with means to prevent an unwanted event.

Standard Intruder: A person who weighs 100 lb or less and whose height is 60 inches or less; dressed in a long-sleeved shirt, slacks, and shoes.

J. Standard-Intruder Movement: Any movement, such as walking, running, crawling, rolling, or jumping, of a "standard intruder" in a protected zone.

K. Systems Integration: The bringing together of components of several systems containing interacting components to achieve indicated functional operation of combined systems.

L. Zone. A defined area within a protected premises. It is a space or area for which an intrusion must be detected and uniquely identified. The sensor or group of sensors must then be assigned to perform the detection, and any interface equipment between sensors and communication must link to master control unit.

(3)



A. Product Data: Components for sensing, detecting, systems integration, and control, including di-mensions and data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail assemblies of standard components that are custom assembled for specific application on this Project.

Functional Block Diagram: Show single-line interconnections between components in-cluding interconnections between components specified in this Section and those fur-nished under other Sections. Indicate methods used to achieve systems integration. In-dicate control, signal, and data communication paths and identify programmable logic controllers networks and control interface devices and media to be used. Describe char-acteristics of network and other data communication lines.

a. Indicate methods used to achieve systems integration.

b. Indicate control, signal, and data communication paths and identify PLCs, networks, control interface devices, and media to be used.

c. Describe characteristics of network and other data communication lines.

d. Describe methods used to protect against power outages and transient voltages including types and ratings of isolation and surge suppression devices used in data, communication, signal, control, and ac and dc power circuits.

2. Raceway Riser Diagrams: Detail raceway runs required for intrusion detection and for systems integration. Include designation of devices connected by raceway, raceway type and size, and type and size of wire and cable fill for each raceway run.

3. UPS: Sizing calculations.

4. Site and Floor Plans: Indicate final outlet and device locations, routing of raceways, and cables inside and outside the building. Include room layout for master control-unit con-sole, terminal cabinet, racks, and UPS.

5. Master Control-Unit Console Layout: Show required artwork and device identification.

6. Device Address List: Coordinate with final system programming.

7. System Wiring Diagrams: Include system diagrams unique to Project. Show connections for all devices, components, and auxiliary equipment. Include diagrams for equipment and for system with all terminals and interconnections identified.

8. Details of surge-protection devices and their installation.

9. Sensor detection patterns and adjustment ranges.

C. Equipment and System Operation Description: Include method of operation and supervision of each component and each type of circuit. Show sequence of operations for manually and auto-matically initiated system or equipment inputs. Description must cover this specific Project; manu-facturer's standard descriptions for generic systems are unacceptable.

D. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.

E. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required.



A. Qualification Data: For Installer.

B. Field quality-control reports.

C. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.

D. Other Information Submittals:

1. Test Plan and Schedule: Test plan defining all tests required to ensure that system meets technical, operational, and performance specifications within 60 days of date of Contract award.

2. Examination reports documenting inspections of substrates, areas, and conditions.

3. Anchor inspection reports documenting inspections of built-in and cast-in anchors.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For intrusion detection system to include in emergency, opera-tion, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Data for each type of product, including features and operating sequences, both automatic and manual.

2. Master control-unit hardware and software data.


A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective cover-ing for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Intrusion Detection Devices: Furnish quantity equal to five percent of the number of units of each type installed, but no fewer than one of each type.

2. Fuses: Three of each kind and size.

3. Tool Kit: Provide six sets of tools for use with security fasteners, each packaged in a compartmented kit configured for easy handling and storage.

4. Security Fasteners: Furnish no fewer than 1 box for every 50 boxes or fraction thereof, of each type and size of security fastener installed.


A. Installer Qualifications:

1. An employer of workers, at least one of whom is a technician certified by the National Burglar & Fire Alarm Association.

2. Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project.


B. Intrusion Detection Systems Integrator Qualifications: An experienced intrusion detection equip-ment supplier and Installer who has completed systems integration work for installations similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site test-ing.


E. Control Units, Devices, and Communications with Monitoring Station: Listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency for compliance with SIA CP-01.

F. FM Global Compliance: FM-Approved and -labeled intrusion detection devices and equipment.

G. Comply with NFPA 70,


A. Environmental Conditions: Capable of withstanding the following environmental conditions without mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of operating capability:

1. Altitude: Sea level to 4000 feet.

2. Master Control Unit: Rated for continuous operation in an ambient of 60 to 85 deg F and a relative humidity of 20 to 80 percent, noncondensing.

3. Interior, Controlled Environment: System components, except master control unit, in-stalled in air-conditioned interior environments shall be rated for continuous operation in ambients of 65 deg F dry bulb and 40 to 60 percent relative humidity, noncondensing.

1 .10 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace components of intrusion detection devices and equipment that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

2. PART 2 PRODUCTS


A. All materials and equipment shall be new, unused and manufactured within eighteen months prior to installation. Where applicable, all materials and equipment shall be listed by Underwriters La-boratories.


A. Manufacturers' names and model numbers are used herein only as a means of establishing stand-ards of quality and performance. Comparable equipment of standard manufacture and established reputation, which meets the requirements outlined above, may be submitted to the DACC Systems Engineer for approval. Equipment of the following manufacturers may be used if it meets or exceeds parameters of the specified equipment.


B. Intrusion Alarm - Bosch

C. Door/Window Sensors — Sentrol

D. Glass Break Sensors — Honeywell (Not in Contract)

E. Photo Electric Beam Motion Detectors — Bosch Detection Systems/Honeywell

F. Cable — Superior Essex, Belden, West Penn, Berk-Tek, General Cable, Panduit

G. Uninterruptible Power Supply System- APC


A. Digital keypad — Bosch model D1255 Alpha IV.

B. Alarm panel — Bosch model D7412/9412 GV3 or GV4, RAM IV or greater software.

C. Passive infrared/microwave detector (surface-mounted) — Bosch DS970 (Long Range).

D. Passive infrared/microwave detector (surface-mounted) — Bosch DS950 (Med. Range).

E. Passive infrared/microwave detector (surface-mounted) — Bosch DS9360 (360P).

F. Passive infrared/microwave detector (flush-mounted) — Honeywell 995 (Long or Wide range)

G. Passive infrared/microwave detector (surface or flush-mounted) - Honeywell IS- 280CM (3609).

H. Passive infrared/microwave detector (surface or flush-mounted) — Honeywell DT6360STC (360ri) — For high ceiling 8 — 16 feet high.

Glass break sensor— Honeywell FG1625F.

J. Siren/Speaker — Sentrol MPI36.

K. Magnetic door contact switch, flush mount — Sentrol model 1078CT.

L. Magnetic door contact switch, surface mount, non-exposed wiring — Sentrol 10421W Series

M. Magnetic door contact switch, surface mount, exposed wiring — Sentrol 2505 Series

N. Magnetic door contact switch, floor mount (high security) — Sentrol model 2707A.

0. Overhead Door Magnetic Contacts (surface/floor mount with armored cable —

P. GE model 2202

Q. Transformer enclosure — Bosch D8004.

R. Non-fire enclosure — Bosch D8103.

S. 12V, 7AH batteries —two (2) Bosch D126 required for Intrusion Alarm Panel.

T. Power Transformer — Bosch D1640.


U. Keypad back boxes — Bosch D56.

V. Aux relay — Bosch 0136.

W. Phone jack, modular— Bosch D166/RJ31X

X. Battery charger— Bosch D8132.

Y. OctoPopit eight zone expander — Bosch D81280.

Z. OctoRelay — Bosch D8129.

AA. 12/24 Vdc, 2.5 Amp power supply w/ battery — Altronix AL300ULX

BB. aa. Alarm cable — plenum (CMP) rated, stranded, PVC insulated, shielded, 18 gauge minimum or larger, two (2) pair twisted wire for keypad, glass break sensors and passive infrared / microwave detectors and door contacts - West Penn 253244B, CSC 112000 and CSC 112100.

CC. bb. Shielded wire shall be required if Bosch noise immunity design thresholds will be exceeded.

DD. cc. All other cables and/or hardware required to ensure the system is fully functional at optimum level.

2.4 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM

A. Description: Hard-wired, modular, microprocessor-based controls, intrusion sensors and detection devices, and communication links to perform monitoring, alarm, and control functions.

B. Supervision: System components shall be continuously monitored for normal, alarm, supervisory, and trouble conditions. Indicate deviations from normal conditions at any location in system. Indication includes identification of device or circuit in which deviation has occurred and whether deviation is an alarm or malfunction.

1. Alarm Signal: Display at master control unit and actuate audible and visual alarm devic-es.

2. Trouble Condition Signal: Distinct from other signals, indicating that system is not fully functional. Trouble signal shall indicate system problems such as battery failure, open or shorted transmission line conductors, or control-unit failure.

3. Supervisory Condition Signal: Distinct from other signals, indicating an abnormal condi-tion as specified for the particular device or control unit.

C. System Control: Master control unit shall directly monitor intrusion detection units and connecting wiring.

D. System Control: Master control unit shall directly monitor intrusion detection devices, control units associated with perimeter detection units, and connecting wiring in a multiplexed distributed control system or as part of a network.

E. System shall automatically reboot program without error or loss of status or alarm data after any system disturbance.


F. Operator Commands:

1. Help with System Operation: Display all commands available to operator. Help com-mand, followed by a specific command, shall produce a short explanation of the purpose, use, and system reaction to that command.

2. Acknowledge Alarm: To indicate that alarm message has been observed by operator.

3. Place Protected Zone in Access: Disable all intrusion-alarm circuits of a specific protect-ed zone. Tamper circuits may not be disabled by operator.

4. Place Protected Zone in Secure: Activate all intrusion-alarm circuits of a protected zone.

5. Protected Zone Test: Initiate operational test of a specific protected zone.

6. System Test: Initiate system-wide operational test.

7. Print reports.

G. Timed Control at Master Control Unit: Allow automatically timed "secure" and "access" functions of selected protected zones.

H. Automatic Control of Related Systems: Alarm or supervisory signals from certain intrusion detection devices control the following functions in related systems:

1. Switch selected lights.

2. Shift elevator control to a different mode.

3. Open a signal path between certain intercommunication stations.

4. Shift sound system to "listening mode" and open a signal path to certain system speak-ers.

5. Switch signal to selected monitor from CCTV camera in vicinity of sensor signaling an alarm.

Printed Record of Events: Print a record of alarm, supervisory, and trouble events on system printer. Sort and report by protected zone, device, and function. When master control unit receives a signal, print a report of alarm, supervisory, or trouble condition. Report type of signal (alarm, supervisory, or trouble), protected zone description, date, and time of occurrence. Differentiate alarm signals from other indications. When system is reset, report reset event with the same information concerning device, location, date, and time. Commands shall initiate the reporting of a list of current alarm, supervisory, and trouble conditions in system or a log of past events.

J. Response Time: Two seconds between actuation of any alarm and its indication at master control unit.

K. Circuit Supervision: Supervise all signal and data transmission lines, links with other systems, and sensors from master control unit. Indicate circuit and detection device faults with both protected zone and trouble signals, sound a distinctive audible tone, and illuminate an LED. Maximum per-missible elapsed time between occurrence of a trouble condition and indication at master control unit is 20 seconds. Initiate an alarm in response to opening, closing, shorting, or grounding of a signal or data transmission line.


L. Programmed Secure-Access Control: System shall be programmable to automatically change status of various combinations of protected zones between secure and access conditions at scheduled times. Status changes may be preset for repetitive, daily, and weekly; specially scheduled operations may be preset up to a year in advance. Manual secure-access control stations shall override programmed settings.

M. Manual Secure-Access Control: Coded entries at manual stations shall change status of associated protected zone between secure and access conditions.

2.5 SYSTEM COMPONENT REQUIREMENTS

A. Compatibility: Detection devices and their communication features, connecting wiring, and master control unit shall be selected and configured with accessories for full compatibility with the following equipment:

Door hardware specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware."

2. Door hardware specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware (Scheduled by Describing Products)."

3. Elevators specified in Division 14 Section "Electric Traction Elevators."

4. Elevators specified in Division 14 Section "Hydraulic Elevators."

5. Lighting controls specified in Division 26 Section "Lighting Control Devices."

6. Lighting controls specified in Division 26 Section "Network Lighting Controls."

7. Intercom and program systems specified in Division 27 Section "Intercommunications and Program Systems."

8. Public address and mass notification systems specified in Division 27 Section "Public Address and Mass Notification Systems."

9. Access control system specified in Division 28 Section "Access Control."

10. Fire alarm system specified in Division 28 Section "Digital, Addressable Fire-Alarm System."

11. Fire alarm system specified in Division 28 Section "Zoned (DC Loop) Fire-Alarm System."

12. Perimeter security system specified in Division 28 Section "Perimeter Security Systems."

13. Video surveillance system specified in Division 28 Section "Video Surveillance."

B. Surge Protection: Protect components from voltage surges originating external to

equipment housing and entering through power, communication, signal, control, or sensing leads. Include surge protection for external wiring of each conductor entry connection to components.

1. Minimum Protection for Power Lines 120 V and More: Auxiliary panel suppressors complying with requirements in Division 26 Section "Transient-Voltage Suppression for Low-Voltage Electrical Power Circuits."


2. Minimum Protection for Communication, Signal, Control, and Low-Voltage Power Lines: Listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency for compliance with NFPA 731.

C. Intrusion Detection Units: Listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency for compliance with UL 639.

D. Interference Protection: Components shall be unaffected by radiated RFI and electrical induction of 15 Wm over a frequency range of 10 to 10,000 MHz and conducted interference signals up to 0.25-V rms injected into power supply lines at 10 to 10,000 MHz.

E. Tamper Protection: Tamper switches on detection devices, control units, annunciators, pull boxes, junction boxes, cabinets, and other system components shall initiate a tamper-alarm signal when unit is opened or partially disassembled and when entering conductors are cut or disconnected. Master control-unit alarm display shall identify tamper alarms and indicate locations.

Self-Testing Devices: Automatically test themselves periodically, but not less than once per hour, to verify normal device functioning and alarm initiation capability. Devices transmit test failure to master control unit.

G. Antimasking Devices: Automatically check operation continuously or at intervals of a minute or less, and use signal-processing logic to detect blocking, masking, jamming, tampering, or other operational dysfunction. Devices transmit detection of operational dysfunction to master control unit as an alarm signal.

H. Addressable Devices: Transmitter and receivers shall communicate unique device identification and status reports to master control unit.

Remote-Controlled Devices: Individually and remotely adjustable for sensitivity and individually monitored at master control unit for calibration, sensitivity, and alarm condition.

2.6 ENCLOSURES

A. Interior Sensors: Enclosures that protect against dust, falling dirt, and dripping noncorrosive liquids.

B. Interior Electronics: NEMA 250, Type 12.

2.7 SECURE AND ACCESS DEVICES


B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product

indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Bosch Security Systems, Inc.

2. Corby Industries, Inc.

3. Crow Electronic Engineering, Inc.

4. DAQ Electronics, Inc.

5. Digital Security Controls Ltd.; a business unit of Tyco Safety Products.


6. Edwards Signaling & Security Systems; part of GE Security.

7. Honeywell International Inc.; Honeywell Security.

8. Visonic Inc.

C. Keypad and Display Module: Arranged for entering and executing commands for system-status changes and for displaying system-status and command-related data.

D. Key-Operated Switch: Change protected zone between secure and access conditions.

2.8 DOOR AND WINDOW SWITCHES



1. Aleph America Corporation.

2. General Electric Company; GE Security, Inc.

3. George Risk Industries.


5. Honeywell International Inc.; Honeywell Video Systems.

6. Optex Inc.

7. Potter Electric Signal, LLC.

C. Description: Balanced-magnetic switch, complying with UL 634, installed on frame with integral overcurrent device to limit current to 80 percent of switch capacity. Bias magnet and minimum of two encapsulated reed switches shall resist compromise from introduction of foreign magnetic fields.

D. Flush-Mounted Switches: Unobtrusive and flush with surface of door and window frame.

E. Overhead Door Switch: Balanced-magnetic type, listed for outdoor locations, and having door-mounted magnet and floor-mounted switch unit.

F. Remote Test: Simulate movement of actuating magnet from master control unit.

2.9 PIR SENSORS










7. Visonic Inc.

C. Listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency for compliance with SIA PIR-01.

D. Description: Sensors detect intrusion by monitoring infrared wavelengths emitted from a human body within their protected zone and by being insensitive to general thermal variations.

1. Wall-Mounted Unit Maximum Detection Range: 125 percent of indicated distance for individual units and not less than 50 feet.

2. Ceiling-Mounted Unit Spot-Detection Pattern: Full 360-degree conical.

3. Ceiling-Mounted Unit Pattern Size: 84-inch diameter at floor level for units mounted 96 inches above floor; 18-foot diameter at floor level for units mounted 25 feet above floor.

E. Device Performance:

1. Sensitivity: Adjustable pattern coverage to detect a change in temperature of 2 deg F or less, and standard-intruder movement within sensor's detection patterns at any speed between 0.3 to 7.5 fps across two adjacent segments of detector's field of view.

2. Test Indicator: LED test indicator that is not visible during normal operation. When visible, indicator shall light when sensor detects an intruder. Locate test enabling switch under sensor housing cover.

3. Remote Test: When initiated by master control unit, start a test sequence for each detector element that simulates standard-intruder movement within sensor's detection patterns, causing an alarm.

2.10 MICROWAVE INTRUSION DETECTORS (INTERIOR)


B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product

indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

Bosch Security Systems, Inc.





5. Visonic Inc.

C. Device Performance: Microwave transmitter establishes an electromagnetic field in an adjustable

detection pattern and detects intrusion by monitoring changes in that pattern.

Sensitivity: Adjustable, able to detect standard-intruder movement within sensor's detection pattern at any speed between 0.3 to 7.5 fps. Sensor sensitivity adjustments shall be accessible only when sensor housing is removed, and sensors shall comply with 47 CFR 15.

2. Activation Indicator: LED indicator shall not be visible during normal operation. Indicator shall light when sensor detects a standard intruder. Locate test-enabling switch under sensor housing cover.

3. Remote Test: When initiated by master control unit, start a test sequence for each detector element that simulates standard-intruder movement within sensor's detection patterns, causing an alarm.

2.11 SENSORS






C. Listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency for compliance with SIA GB-01.

D. Description: A sensor control unit and piezoelectric crystal sensor elements that are designed to be rigidly mounted to structure being protected.

E. Device Performance: Detects high-frequency vibrations generated by use of such tools as oxyacetylene torches, oxygen lances, high-speed drills and saws, and explosives that penetrate a structure while not responding to any other mechanical vibration.

1. Circular detection pattern, with at least a 72-inch radius on protected structure.

2. Hookup Cable: Factory installed, not less than 72 inches.

3. Control Unit: Integral with sensor housing or in a separate assembly, locally adjustable by control under housing cover.

4. Glass-Break Simulator: A device to induce frequencies to protected glass pane that simulate breaking glass without causing damage to glass.

2.12 MICROWAVE-PIR DUAL-TECHNOLOGY SENSORS







4. Visonic Inc.

C. Description: Single unit combining a sensor that detects changes in microwave signals and a PIR sensor that detects changes in ambient level of infrared emissions caused by standard-intruder movement within detection pattern.

D. Listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency for compliance with SIA PIR-01. E. Device Performance: An alarm is transmitted when either sensor detects a standard

intruder within a period of three to eight seconds from when the other sensor detects a standard intruder.

1. Minimum Detection Pattern: A room 20 by 30 feet.

2. PIR Sensor Sensitivity: Adjustable pattern coverage to detect a change in temperature of 2 deg F or less, and standard-intruder movement within sensor's detection patterns at any speed between 0.3 to 7.5 fps across two adjacent segments of detector's field of view.

3. Microwave Sensor Sensitivity: Adjustable, able to detect standard-intruder movement within sensor's detection pattern at any speed between 0.3 to 7.5 fps. Sensor sensitivity adjustments shall be accessible only when sensor housing is removed, and sensors shall comply with 47 CFR 15.

4. Activation Indicator: LED indicator shall not be visible during normal operation. Indicator shall light when sensor detects a standard intruder. Locate test enabling switch under sensor housing cover.

5, Remote Test: When initiated by master control unit, start a test sequence for each detector element that simulates standard-intruder movement within sensor's detection patterns, causing an alarm.

2.13 MASTER CONTROL UNIT




2. DAQ Electronics, Inc.

3. Digital Security Controls, Inc.; a business unit of Tyco Safety Products.




6. Honeywell International Inc.; Honeywell Video Systems.

7. Visonic Inc. C. Description: Supervise sensors and detection subsystems and their connecting communication

links, status control (secure or access) of sensors and detector subsystems, activation of alarms and supervisory and trouble signals, and other indicated functions.

1. System software and programs shall be held in flash electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), retaining the information through failure of primary and secondary power supplies.

2. Include a real-time clock for time annotation of events on the event recorder and printer.

3. Addressable initiation devices that communicate device identity and status.

4. Control circuits for operation of mechanical equipment in response to an alarm.

D. Console Controls and Displays: Arranged for interface between human operator at master control

unit and addressable system components including annunciation and supervision. Display alarm, supervisory, and component status messages and the programming and control menu.

1. Annunciator and Display: LCD, one line(s) of 16 characters, minimum.

2. Keypad: Arranged to permit entry and execution of programming, display, and control commands.

3. Control-Unit Network: Automatic communication of alarm, status changes, commands, and other communications required for system operation. Communication shall return to normal after partial or total network interruption such as power loss or transient event. Total or partial signaling network failures shall identify the failure and record the failure at the annunciator display and at the system printer.

4. Field Device Network: Communicate between the control unit and field devices of the system. Communications shall consist of alarm, network status, and status and control of field-mounted processors. Each field-mounted device shall be interrogated during each interrogation cycle.

5. Operator Controls: Manual switches and push-to-test buttons that do not require a key to operate. Prevent resetting of alarm, supervisory, or trouble signals while alarm or trouble condition persists. Include the following:

a. Acknowledge alarm.

b. Silence alarm.

c. System reset.

d. LED test.

6. Timing Unit: Solid state, programmable, 365 days.


7. Confirmation: Relays, contactors, and other control devices shall have auxiliary contacts that provide confirmation signals to system for their on or off status. Software shall interpret such signals, display equipment status, and initiate failure signals.

8. Alarm Indication: Audible signal sounds and an LED lights at master control unit identifying the addressable detector originating the alarm. Annunciator panel displays a common alarm light and sounds an audible tone.

9. Alarm activation sounds a siren.

E. Protected Zones: Quantity of alarm and supervisory zones as indicated, with

capacity for expanding number of protected zones by a minimum of 25 percent.

F. Power Supply Circuits: Master control units shall provide power for remote power-consuming detection devices. Circuit capacity shall be adequate for at least a 25 percent increase in load.

G. UPS: Comply with Division 26 Section "Static Uninterruptible Power Supply." UPS shall be sized to provide a minimum of six hours of master control-unit operation.

H. Cabinet: Lockable, steel enclosure arranged so operations required for testing, normal operation, and maintenance are performed from front of enclosure. If more than a single cabinet is required to form a complete control unit, provide exactly matching modular enclosures. Accommodate all components and allow ample gutter space for field wiring. Identify each enclosure by an engraved, laminated, phenolic-resin nameplate. Lettering on enclosure nameplate shall not be less than 1 inch high. Identify, with permanent labels, individual components and modules within cabinets.

Transmission to Monitoring Station: A communications device to automatically transmit alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals to the monitoring station, operating over a standard voice grade telephone leased line. Comply with UL 1635,

J. Printout of Events: On receipt of signal, print alarm, supervisory, and trouble events. Identify zone, device, and function. Include type of signal (alarm, supervisory, or trouble) and date and time of occurrence. Differentiate alarm signals from all other printed indications. Also print system reset event, including same information for device, location, date, and time. Commands initiate the printing of a list of existing alarm, supervisory, and trouble conditions in the system and a historical log of events.

2.14 AUDIBLE AND VISUAL ALARM DEVICES



1. Alarm Controls Corporation.

2. Cooper Wheelock.

3. Edwards Signaling & Security Systems; part of GE Security.




C. Bell: 10 inches in diameter, rated to produce a minimum sound output of 84 dB at 10 feet from master control unit.

1. Enclosure: Weather-resistant steel box equipped with tamper switches on cover and on back of box.

D. Klaxon Weatherproof Motor-Driven Hooter: UL listed, rated to produce a minimum sound output of 120 dB at 3 feet, plus or minus 3 dB, at a frequency of 470 Hz. Rated for intermittent use: two minutes on and five minutes off.

1. Designed for use in industrial areas and in high-noise, severe-weather marine environments.

E. Siren: 30-W speaker with siren driver, rated to produce a minimum sound output of

103 dB at 10 feet from master control unit.

1. Enclosure: Weather-resistant steel box with tamper switches on cover and on back of box.

F. Strobe: Xenon light complying with UL 1638, with a clear polycarbonate lens.

1. Light Output: 115 cd, minimum.

2. Flash Rate: 60 per minute.

2.15 SECURITY FASTENERS

A. Operable only by tools produced for use on specific type of fastener by fastener manufacturer or other licensed fabricator. Drive system type, head style, material, and protective coating as required for assembly, installation, and strength.

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

C. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Acument Global Technologies North America.

2. Safety Socket LLC.

3. Tamper-Pruf Screws.

D. Socket Flat Countersunk Head Fasteners:

1. Heat-treated alloy steel, ASTM F 835.

2. Stainless steel, ASTM F 879, Group 1 CW.

E. Socket Button Head Fasteners:

1. Heat-treated alloy steel, ASTM F 835.


F. Socket Head Cap Fasteners:


1. Heat-treated alloy steel, ASTM A 574.


G. Protective Coatings for Heat-Treated Alloy Steel:

1. Zinc chromate, ASTM F 1135, Grade 3 or Grade 4, for exterior applications and interior applications where indicated.

2. Zinc phosphate with oil, ASTM F 1137, Grade I, or black oxide unless otherwise indicated.

3. PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of intrusion detection.

Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations of intrusion detection connections before intrusion detection installation.

C. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of intrusion detection.

D. Inspect built-in and cast-in anchor installations, before installing intrusion detection, to verify that anchor installations comply with requirements. Prepare inspection reports.

Remove and replace anchors where inspections indicate that they do not comply with requirements. Reinspect after repairs or replacements are made.

2. Perform additional inspections to determine compliance of replaced or additional anchor installations. Prepare inspection reports.

E. For material whose orientation is critical for its performance as a ballistic barrier, verify installation orientation.

F. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 SYSTEM INTEGRATION

A. Integrate intrusion detection system with the following systems and equipment:

1. Electronic door hardware.

2. Network lighting controls.

3. Intercommunications and program systems.

4. Public address and mass notification systems.

5. Access control.

6. Fire-alarm system.

7. Perimeter security system,


8. Video surveillance.

3.3 SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Comply with UL 681 and NFPA 731.

B. Equipment Mounting: Install master control unit on finished floor with tops of cabinets not more than 72 inches above the finished floor.

1. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

C. Install wall-mounted equipment, with tops of cabinets not more than 72 inches above the finished floor.

1. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

3.4 WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Wiring Method: Install wiring in metal raceways according to Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems." Conceal raceway except in unfinished spaces and as indicated. Minimum conduit size shall be 1/2 inch. Control and data transmission wiring shall not share conduit with other building wiring systems.

B. Wiring Method: Install wiring in metal raceways according to Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems,"except in accessible indoor ceiling spaces and in interior hollow gypsum board partitions where cable may be used. Conceal raceways and wiring except in unfinished spaces and as indicated. Minimum conduit size shall be 1/2 inch. Control and data transmission wiring shall not share conduit with other building wiring systems.

C. Wiring Method: Cable, concealed in accessible ceilings, walls, and floors when possible.

D. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points. Use lacing bars and distribution spools. Separate power-limited and non-power-limited conductors as recommended in writing by manufacturer. Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to sides and back of enclosure. Connect conductors that are terminated, spliced, or interrupted in any enclosure associated with intrusion system to terminal blocks. Mark each terminal according to system's wiring diagrams. Make all connections with approved crimp-on terminal spade lugs, pressure-type terminal blocks, or plug connectors.

E. Wires and Cables:

1. Conductors: Size as recommended in writing by system manufacturer unless otherwise indicated.

2. 120-V Power Wiring: Install according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables" unless otherwise indicated.

3. Control and Signal Transmission Conductors: Install unshielded, twisted-pair cable unless otherwise indicated or if manufacturer recommends shielded cable, according to Division 28 Section "Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security."

4. Data and Television Signal Transmission Cables: Install according to Division 28 Section "Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security."


F. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures.

G. Install power supplies and other auxiliary components for detection devices at control units unless otherwise indicated or required by manufacturer. Do not install such items near devices they serve.

H. Identify components with engraved, laminated-plastic or metal nameplate for master control unit and each terminal cabinet, mounted with corrosion-resistant screws. Nameplates and label products are specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

3.5 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with identification requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Install instructions frame in a location visible from master control unit.

3.6 GROUNDING

A. Ground the master control unit and associated circuits; comply with IEEE 1100. Install a ground wire from main service ground to master control unit.

B. Ground system components and conductor and cable shields to eliminate shock hazard and to minimize ground loops, common-mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other impairments.

C. Signal Ground Terminal: Locate at main equipment rack or cabinet. Isolate from power system and equipment grounding. Provide 5-ohm ground. Measure, record, and report ground resistance.

D. Install grounding electrodes of type, size, location, and quantity indicated. Comply with installation requirements in Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."


A. Pretesting: After installation, align, adjust, and balance system and perform complete pretesting to determine compliance of system with requirements in the Contract Documents. Correct deficiencies observed in pretesting. Replace malfunctioning or damaged items with new ones and retest until satisfactory performance and conditions are achieved. Prepare forms for systematic recording of acceptance test results.

1. Report of Pretesting: After pretesting is complete, provide a letter certifying that installation is complete and fully operable; include names and titles of witnesses to preliminary tests.

B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

C. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

D. Perform tests and inspections.


1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.

E. Tests and Inspections: Comply with provisions in NFPA 731, Ch. 9, "Testing and Inspections."

1. Inspection: Verify that units and controls are properly labeled and interconnecting wires and terminals are identified.

2. Test Methods: Intrusion detection systems and other systems and equipment that are associated with detection and accessory equipment shall be tested according to Table "Test Methods" and Table "Test Methods of Initiating Devices."

Documentation: Comply with provisions in NFPA 731, Ch. 4, "Documentation."

G. Tag all equipment, stations, and other components for which tests have been satisfactorily completed.

3.8 ADJUSTING

A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to three visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose. Visits for this purpose shall be in addition to any required by warranty.

3.9 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain the intrusion detection system. Comply with documentation provisions in NFPA 731, Ch. 4, "Documentation and User Training."

END OF SECTION

LA MIRADA LIBRARY VIDEO SUVEILLANCE 16930-1

SECTION 16930

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE


ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS 1. PART 1 GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes a video surveillance system consisting of cameras, digital video recorder, data transmission wiring, and a control station with its associated equipment.

B. Video surveillance system shall be integrated with monitoring and control system specified in Division 28 Section "Intrusion Detection, Access Control," which specifies systems integration.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. AGC: Automatic gain control.

B. BNC: Bayonet Neill-Concelman - type of connector.

C. BM/: Black and white.

D. CCD: Charge-coupled device.

E. FTP: File transfer protocol.

F. IP: Internet protocol.

G. LAN: Local area network.

H. MPEG: Moving picture experts group.

I. NTSC: National Television System Committee.

J. PC: Personal computer.

K. PTZ: Pan-tilt-zoom.

L. RAID: Redundant array of independent disks.

M. TCP: Transmission control protocol - connects hosts on the Internet.

N. UPS: Uninterruptible power supply.

0. WAN: Wide area network.



A. Seismic Performance: Video surveillance system shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified."


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include dimensions and data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For video surveillance. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

2. Functional Block Diagram: Show single-line interconnections between components for signal transmission and control. Show cable types and sizes.

3. Dimensioned plan and elevations of equipment racks, control panels, and consoles. Show access and workspace requirements.

4. UPS: Sizing calculations.

5. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Equipment List: Include every piece of equipment by model number, manufacturer, serial number, location, and date of original installation. Add pretesting record of each piece of equipment, listing name of person testing, date of test, set points of adjustments, name and description of the view of preset positions, description of alarms, and description of unit output responses to an alarm.


A. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For video surveillance, cameras, camera-supporting equipment, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.




B. Field quality-control reports.

C. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For cameras, power supplies, infrared illuminators, monitors, videotape recorders, digital video recorders, video switches, and control-station components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:


1. Lists of spare parts and replacement components recommended to be stored at the site for ready access.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Comply with NECA 1.

C. Comply with NFPA 70.

D. Electronic data exchange between video surveillance system with an access-control system shall comply with SIA TVAC.


A. Environmental Conditions: Capable of withstanding the following environmental conditions without mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of operating capability:

Control Station: Rated for continuous operation in ambient temperatures of 60 to 85 deg F and a relative humidity of 20 to 80 percent, noncondensing.

2. Interior, Controlled Environment: System components, except central-station control unit, installed in air-conditioned interior environments shall be rated for continuous operation in ambient temperatures of 65 deg F dry bulb and 40 to 60 percent relative humidity, non-condensing. Use NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosures.

1 .10 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replacecomponents of cameras, equipment related to camera operation, and control-station equipment that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion.

2. PART 2 PRODUCTS



B. System Description and Installation Requirement C. The communication contractor shall furnish and install a Closed Circuit Television (CCTV) system. The CCTV

system shall consist of fixed cameras, Digital Video Recorder (DVR) and DVR storage, monitors, matrix video switcher, keyboards, power supplies, uninterruptible power supply (UPS), cabling and associated equipment. The CCTV system shall view various areas within and surrounding areas of the building. The video from the CCTV system shall be displayed on monitors located at the location to be determined in a split screen configuration. A keyboard at this location will allow the users to select any camera full screen, the split screen image of all cameras, the sequence of all cameras, and any other configuration requested by the County. The matrix switcher, DVR, DVR storage, DVR monitor, DVR keyboard, camera power supplies, and UPS shall be located and rack mounted in the MCR room. The DVR shall be connected to the County LAN/WAN computer network so that the DVR video can be viewed live and recordings played back from the DACC Headquarters facility in Long Beach, CA. using the existing client software. The existing client software is the American Dynamics Intellex Network Client.

D. The Communications Contractor shall furnish and install a complete and fully functional CCTV system. The


Communications Contractor shall furnish and install any and all materials whether or not specified to provide a complete and fully functional CCTV system. The Communications Contractor shall configure all settings and programming of the equipment including but not limited to camera titles, presets, recording schedules, and frame rates. The Communications Contractor shall coordinate with the DACC Systems Engineer in the system settings and configuration.

E. The Communications Contractor shall meet or exceed all Federal, State, and local building codes including but not limited to the National Electric Code and Fire Codes. The Communications Contractor shall install all materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and specifications. The Communications Contractor shall install all materials in accordance with professional standards including EINTIA standards.

F. The Communications Contractor and its subcontractors shall be an authorized manufacturer dealer/reseller and manufacturer's certified installer of the CCTV system equipment. The Contractor and subcontractors shall submit manufacturer's certification documentation at the time of bid submittal.

G. Cabling — The Communications Contractor shall furnish and install all cabling for the CCTV system. The Communications Contractor shall furnish and install all cabling supports as per NEC and EIA/TIA requirements. Cable support shall be independent from ceiling and other equipment supports.

H. Cabling installed in the interior of the building shall be plenum rated. Any cabling installed exterior to the building shall be installed in and protected with weatherproof and watertight conduit and enclosures.

The Communications Contractor shall furnish and install one each coax cable from each camera to the CCTV system in the MCR. The Communications Contractor shall furnish and install one each coax cable from each monitor to the CCTV system in the MCR. The Communications Contractor shall furnish and install three piece crimp type BNC connectors on the coax cables.

J. The Communications Contractor shall install one each low voltage cable from each camera to the camera power supply. Camera power supply shall be located in the MCR. The Communications Contractor shall install control cabling from each PTZ camera to the video matrix switcher and controller system.

K. Cameras - The camera locations are shown on the plans. The Communications Contractor shall verify camera locations at the site. The Communications Contractor shall design, furnish and install cameras and mounts. The Communications Contractor shall adjust the camera lenses and settings to obtain the required views. The Communications Contractor shall coordinate with the County project manager and end user to determine camera view. The Communications Contractor shall readjust the camera lenses and settings as necessary to obtain alternate views as requested by LA County. The Communications Contractor shall connect the cameras to the video inputs of the DVR. Pan/Tilt/Zoom dome camera control protocol shall be SensorNet. Camera control cabling shall be individual home runs from each of the PTZ dome cameras to the camera controller hardware.

L. Camera power supplies — The Communications Contractor shall furnish and install the camera power supply in MCR. The Communications Contractor shall mount and securely fasten the power supply to the wall. The Communications Contractor shall connect the cameras to the camera power supplies. The Communications Contractor shall connect the camera power supplies to the UPS unit.

M. Digital Video Recorder (DVR) — The Communications Contractor shall furnish and install a DVR and DVR storage in the MCR room. The DVR shall be networked into the County LANM/AN system. The contractor shall furnish and install all core and viewing software on computers as identified by the DACC Systems Engineer. The cameras shall be viewed and controlled over the network from remote PCs. The video shall be recorded and viewed live at 2CIF resolution, with a minimum of 7.5 images per second for each camera. The system shall use Active Content Compression Technology. The video storage shall be for 30 days on the internal storage of the DVR and extended storage modules as necessary to provide the 30 day storage requirement. The video shall be recorded continuously during normal business hours and on motion after normal business hours. Should an event be recorded from motion detection, the recording shall have a minimum of five minutes recording before the motion occurrence and five minutes of recording after the motion occurrence. The DVR shall send an alert message via email and text page to staff as designated by the DACC Systems Engineer. The Communications Contractor shall connect the video outputs of the cameras to the camera inputs of the DVR. The Communications Contractor shall connect the DVR to the County LAN/WAN network. The Communications Contractor shall furnish and install cabling to connect to the County LAN/WAN network. Contractor shall coordinate with the County network engineer to interface and connect the DVR to the County


LAN/WAN network. The Communications Contractor shall ensure that all DVR functions are accessible and operable remotely from the DACC Headquarters facility in Long Beach, CA. The Communications Contractor shall connect the DVR to the UPS unit. The Communications Contractor shall program and configure all settings and parameters of the DVR. Contractor shall configure the network client software at the remote location to access the DVR via the LAN/VVAN network. The Communications Contractor shall coordinate with the County Project Manager and end user to determine configuration parameters.

N. The Communications Contractor shall configure the video monitor output of the DVR to display a 4x4 split screen display of all cameras. The Communications Contractor shall furnish, install, and connect cabling from the video monitor output of the DVR to a camera input of the matrix switcher. The Communications Contractor shall connect the looping camera outputs of the DVR to the camera inputs of the matrix video switcher. The Communications Contractor shall have the system certified in writing by the DVR manufacturer that the system has been installed correctly and is fully functional. The Communications Contractor shall provide five copies of the certification to the DACC Systems Engineer.

0. Matrix video switcher — The Communications Contractor shall furnish and install a matrix video switcher in the MCR room. The Communications Contractor shall connect the camera looping video outputs of the DVR to the camera inputs of the matrix switcher. The Communications Contractor shall connect the looping outputs of the matrix switcher to the camera inputs of the multiplexer. The Communications Contractor shall connect the monitor output of the multiplexer to a camera input of the matrix switcher. The Communications Contractor shall connect the monitor outputs of the matrix switcher to the video inputs of monitors located at the circulation desks. The Communications Contractor shall furnish and install a matrix switcher keyboard controller at each circulation desk and in the video equipment rack.

P. The Communications Contractor shall furnish and install a video equipment rack cabinet to house the DVR, DVR storage, matrix video switcher, and associated equipment. The video cabinet shall have front and rear rack rails for mounting 19" rack mount equipment. The DVR shall be supported at the front and rear of the unit. The video cabinet shall have locking front and rear doors, vertical power strip with circuit breaker and surge protection, bottom panel, and vented top panel. The cabinet shall have a pull out keyboard and mouse shelf for the DVR and a second pull out shelf for the camera controller. The cabinet shall have appropriate air circulation to properly ventilate and cool the equipment housed within the cabinet. The cabinet shall have 77" of vertical rack space. The cabinet shall be properly grounded, securely anchored to the floor, and seismically secured. Four (4) sets of cabinet keys will be provided to the County.

Q. Monitors — The Communications Contractor shall furnish and install a desktop mounted 17" LCD monitor at the designated location. The Communications Contractor shall furnish and install a rack mounted VGA monitor in the MCR. The Communications Contractor shall connect the VGA monitor to the DVR monitor output. The Communications Contractor shall connect the monitor outputs of the matrix switcher to the monitors at the designated location. The Communications Contractor shall connect the DVR, DVR storage, and matrix switcher monitors to the UPS unit.

R. The Communications Contractor shall install the camera power supplies in MCR nearest the camera location. If the distance between the camera and MCR exceeds the manufacturer's recommendation for low voltage cable distance for the gauge of wire specified, then the Communications Contractor shall furnish and install the appropriate gauge of low voltage cable as recommended by the camera manufacturer to accommodate for the cable distance.

S. The Communications Contractor shall furnish and install the UPS unit in the MCR. The UPS shall be sized to provide a minimum of two hours of full load run time in the event of power failure. The Communications Contractor shall connect the camera power supply, DVR, DVR storage, matrix switcher, keyboards, and VGA monitor to the UPS. The UPS unit shall be installed in the rack using the four post mounting method. The Communications Contractor shall configure all settings of the CCTV system including all parameters of the cameras, DVR, DVR storage, video matrix switcher, and associated hardware and software. The Communications Contractor shall coordinate with the general contractor and County project manager for the installation schedule and to deliver a fully functional system. Also the Communications Contractor shall coordinate with the appropriate County IT staff to properly configure the DVR and network for CCTV system use over the County LAN/WAN network. The Communications Contractor shall also coordinate with the DACC Systems Engineer to define the required views for each camera.

T. The installation shall comply with ALL applicable National Electric Codes, Building, and Fire


Codes. The Communications Contractor shall apply section 3.5.1 items a through d. with regard to the low voltage cabling for the CCTV system.

U. The Communications Contractor shall provide hands-on training to LA County staff at a date and time to be determined by the County in the operation of the system. A roster of attendees shall be documented.

V. Material and Equipment

1. Fixed Color Camera — Panasonic WV-CW504 series with appropriate varifocal or fixed auto iris lens as required to provide the required camera view.

2. Power Supply (Fixed Cameras) — Pelco MCS16-10S (for multiple cameras), Pelco TF2000 (for individual cameras).

3. Power Supply (PTZ dome cameras) — Pelco WCS 1 - 4

5. DVR — American Dynamics Intellex Ultra ADD600ULP150

6. Extended DVR storage — American Dynamics RAID storage system

7. Dell quiet key PC keyboard.

8. Viewing software — American Dynamics Network Client ADDSNCVMKUL

9. Policy Software — American Dynamics Policy Manager ADDSPM12UUL

10. Policy Manager Server Computer — Dell Server Computer to exceed computer requirements as defined by Policy Software manufacturer.

11. Intellex Policy Manager Training — American Dynamics ADSWPMTC

12. Professional Services Certification — American Dynamics Pro Sery Cert

13. Keyboard Controller — American Dynamics line of keyboard controllers compatible with American Dynamics line of matrix switchers.

14. Matrix Switcher — American Dynamics line of matrix switchers and accessories.

15. LCD color monitor — American Dynamics ADMNM1LCD17

16. LCD monitor rack mount kit — American Dynamics ADMNLCDRKMNT

17. Multiplexer — Pelco MX4016 CD

18. Coax cable — WestPenn 25815

19. BNC connectors — WestPenn CN-BM73-30

20. PTZ dome low voltage cable - WestPenn 25227B

21. Fixed camera low voltage cable —WestPenn 25225B

22. PTZ dome control cable — Belden 88442

23. Matrix Switcher Keyboard cable — Belden 88102

24. Cable - General Cable Gen Speed 6000 Cat 6 CMP (Plenum)


25. Miscellaneous Connectors — as required. All faceplates shall be electrical ivory.

26. Video cabinet — Middle Atlantic WRK series with accessories as required.

27. Pan/Tilt/Zoom dome camera Housing (outdoor) — American Dynamics ADSDUHOC with associated American Dynamics mount required to install the camera and housing.

28. Pan/Tilt/Zoom dome camera Housing (indoor) — American Dynamics line of indoor housings and mounts for use with Ultra domes.

29. Fixed camera mounts — Entire line of Panasonic mounts and adapters for use with the WV-CW504 series cameras.

30. Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) – APC

31. Miscellaneous materials — All materials necessary to furnish and install a complete and fully functional

system.

2.2 SIGNAL TRANSMISSION COMPONENTS

A. Cable: Coaxial cable elements have 75-ohm nominal impedance. Comply with requirements in Division 28 Section "Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security."

B. Video Surveillance Coaxial Cable Connectors: BNC type, 75 ohms. Comply with requirements in Division 28 Section "Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security."

3. PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine pathway elements intended for cables. Check raceways and other elements for compli-ance with space allocations, installation tolerance, hazards to camera installation, and other conditions affecting installation.

B. Examine roughing-in for LAN, WAN, and IP network before device installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 WIRING

A. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems."

B. Wiring Method: Install cables in raceways unless otherwise indicated.

1. Except raceways are not required in accessible indoor ceiling spaces and attics.

2. Except raceways are not required in hollow gypsum board partitions.

3. Conceal raceways and wiring except in unfinished spaces.

C. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Provide and use lacing bars and distribution spools.

D. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: For power and control wiring, use numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A-486B.


E. For LAN connection and fiber-optic and copper communication wiring, comply with Division 27 Sections "Communications Backbone Cabling" and "Communications Horizontal Cabling."

F. Grounding: Provide independent-signal circuit grounding recommended in writing by manufacturer.

3.3 VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Install cameras and infrared illuminators level and plumb.

B. Install cameras with 84-inch- minimum clear space below cameras and their mountings. Change type of mounting to achieve required clearance.

C. Set pan unit and pan-and-tilt unit stops to suit final camera position and to obtain the field of view required for camera. Connect all controls and alarms, and adjust.

D. Install power supplies and other auxiliary components at control stations unless otherwise indicat-ed.

E. Install tamper switches on components indicated to receive tamper switches, arranged to detect unauthorized entry into system-component enclosures and mounted in self-protected, inconspicuous positions.

F. Avoid ground loops by making ground connections only at the control station.

1. For 12- and 24-V dc cameras, connect the coaxial cable shields only at the monitor end.

G. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals according to Division 26 Section "Identi-fication for Electrical Systems."



B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

Perform tests and inspections.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.

D. Tests and Inspections:

1. Inspection: Verify that units and controls are properly installed, connected, and labeled, and that interconnecting wires and terminals are identified.

2. Pretesting: Align and adjust system and pretest components, wiring, and functions to verify that they comply with specified requirements. Conduct tests at varying lighting levels, including day and night scenes as applicable. Prepare video-surveillance equipment for acceptance and operational testing as follows:

a. Prepare equipment list described in "Informational Submittals" Article.

b. Verify operation of auto-iris lenses.

c. Set back-focus of fixed focal length lenses. At focus set to infinity, simulate nighttime lighting conditions by using a dark glass filter of a density that produc-es a clear image. Adjust until image is in focus with and without the filter.


d. Set back-focus of zoom lenses. At focus set to infinity, simulate nighttime light-ing conditions by using a dark glass filter of a density that produces a clear im-age. Additionally, set zoom to full wide angle and aim camera at an object 50 to 75 feet away. Adjust until image is in focus from full wide angle to full telephoto, with the filter in place.

e. Set and name all preset positions; consult Owner's personnel.

f. Set sensitivity of motion detection. Connect and verify responses to alarms.

h. Verify operation of control-station equipment.

3. Test Schedule: Schedule tests after pretesting has been successfully completed and sys-tem has been in normal functional operation for at least 14 days. Provide a minimum of 10 days' notice of test schedule.

4. Operational Tests: Perform operational system tests to verify that system complies with Specifications. Include all modes of system operation. Test equipment for proper opera-tion in all functional modes.

E. Video surveillance system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose. Tasks shall in-clude, but are not limited to, the following:

Check cable connections.

2. Check proper operation of cameras and lenses. Verify operation of auto-iris lenses and adjust back-focus as needed.

3. Adjust all preset positions; consult Owner's personnel.

4. Recommend changes to cameras, lenses, and associated equipment to improve Owner's use of video surveillance system.

5. Provide a written report of adjustments and recommendations.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Clean installed items using methods and materials recommended in writing by manufacturer.

B. Clean video-surveillance-system components, including camera-housing windows, lenses, and monitor screens.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain video-surveillance equipment.

END OF SECTION

G0031MASTER KEYNOTE LIST

DIVISION 06: WOOD AND PLASTICS 06.01 1/4" x 1/4" (TYP. U.O.N.) STAINLESS STEEL "U" CHANNEL REVEAL / TRIM 06.02 9-PLY, 12mm (±1/2"), U.O.N., THICK STAINED AND CLEAR COATED PREMIUM GRADE A MAPLE VENEER (AT EXPOSED FACES) PLYWOOD, EASED EDGES WHERE

EXPOSED. COUNTERSINK ALL FASTENERS AT EXPOSED SURFACES AND FILL AND REFINISH ALL FASTENER HOLES TO MATCH ADJACENT. STAINED TO MATCH WILSONART 7061-60 NATURAL PEAR LAMINATE, TYP. U.O.N.

06.03 13-PLY, 18mm (±3/4"), U.O.N., THICK STAINED AND CLEAR COATED PREMIUM GRADE A MAPLE VENEER (AT EXPOSED FACES) PLYWOOD, EASED EDGES WHERE EXPOSED. COUNTERSINK ALL FASTENERS AT EXPOSED SURFACES AND FILL AND REFINISH ALL FASTENER HOLES TO MATCH ADJACENT. STAINED TO MATCH WILSONART 7061-60 NATURAL PEAR LAMINATE, TYP. U.O.N.

06.04 18-PLY, 24mm (±1 1/8"), U.O.N., THICK STAINED AND CLEAR COATED PREMIUM GRADE A MAPLE VENEER (AT EXPOSED FACES) PLYWOOD, EASED EDGES WHERE EXPOSED. COUNTERSINK ALL FASTENERS AT EXPOSED SURFACES AND FILL AND REFINISH ALL FASTENER HOLES TO MATCH ADJACENT. STAINED TO MATCH WILSONART 7061-60 NATURAL PEAR LAMINATE, TYP. U.O.N.

06.05 BRUSHED STAINLESS STEEL: 18 GA. AT ALL BASES, 18 GA. AT ALL COUNTERTOPS, 20 GA. AT ALL VERTICAL PANELS OVER MDF, TYP. U.O.N. 06.06 WILSONART 4935-38 BERRY FIZZ WITH AEON FINISH, TYP. U.O.N., OVER 3/4" (MIN., U.O.N.) PLYWOOD OR MDF 06.07 WILSONART 7949K-18 ASIAN NIGHT WITH AEON FINISH, TYP. U.O.N., OVER 3/4" (MIN., U.O.N.) PLYWOOD OR MDF 06.08 DRAWER, LOCKABLE, TYPICAL U.O.N. 06.09 CABINET, LOCKABLE, TYPICAL U.O.N. 06.10 1 3/4" THICK, 3-PLY PARTICLEBOARD W/ PREMIUM GRADE A VENEER (U.O.N.) ON BOTH FACES. VERTICAL AND BOTTOM EDGES BANDED WITH 3/4" THICK SOLID

HARDWOOD, TYP. U.O.N. TOP BAND SHALL BE 3/4” THICK (U.O.N.) SOLID HARDWOOD EXTERNAL BAND WITH 1/4' x 1/4” S.S. REVEAL PER KEYNOTE 06.01 ROUTED IN THE BAND FACE AND BOTH ENDS. EASE ALL EXPOSED EDGES. PROVIDE S.S. BASE PER KEYNOTE 06.05 EXCEPT AT HARDWOOD EDGE BANDS.

06.11 12mm THICK AVONITE STUDIO COLLECTION SOLID SURFACE, COLOR AMBER GLASS K3-8560. EASE ALL EXPOSED EDGES. 06.12 3/4" x 1 3/4" (U.O.N.) THICK SOLID HARDWOOD WITH ALL EXPOSED EDGES EASED: GRADE A MAPLE STAINED TO MATCH WILSONART 7061-60 NATURAL PEAR

LAMINATE, TYP. U.O.N. 06.13 (E) 2x4 WOOD STUD FRAMING @ 16" O.C. 06.14 3" Ø STAINLESS STEEL GROMMET THROUGH COUNTERTOP FOR CABLES / WIRE. PROVIDE AT ALL CUSTOM CASEWORK. VERIFY LOCATIONS W/OWNER'S REP.

PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. 06.15 ADJUSTABLE WHITE MELAMINE SHELF 06.16 2 1/2" WIDE POWDER COATED STEEL CABLE CHANNEL 06.17 3/4" PAINTED EXTERIOR GRADE PLYWOOD 06.18 ANODIZED ALUM. LOUVERS. COORDINATE VENTILATION REQUIREMENTS W/EQUIPMENT MANUF. 06.19 BOOK SHELVING UNIT END PANEL 06.20 BOOK SHELVING UNIT CANOPY: PROVIDE AT ALL END PANELS, AND MATCH WIDTH OF END PANEL 06.21 WILSONART 7951K-18 ASIAN SUN WITH AEON FINISH, TYP. U.O.N., OVER 3/4" (MIN., U.O.N.) PLYWOOD OR MDF 06.22 LOUIS AND CO. MODEL DHCGD30HRSB CASTERS W/BRAKE

NO SCALE

MASTER KEYNOTE

LIST

project no. issue date scale

drawing title

REVISIONS

drawing number

3341 Helms Avenue Culver City, CA 90232 Telephone 310 508 9390 Facsimile 310 873 3740 e-mail: [email protected]

La M

irada

Library

13

800

La M

irada

Driv

e La

Mira

da, C

A 9

0638

2014_04

as noted

1

2

3

4

5

6

architect's stamp

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

engineer's stamp

architect

engineer

2/24/16

C 31193

10-31-17 RENEWAL DATE

ER

IK

CH I A -K O N G

MA

R

ST

AT

E

O F C A L I F OR

NI

A

LIC

E

N S E D A R C H I TE

CT

for public architecture

ADDENDUM TO BIDDERS 03 25 FEBRUARY 2016

DIVISION 12: FURNISHINGS 12.01 not used 12.02 MECHOSHADE MANUALLY OPERATED ROLLING WINDOW SHADING SYSTEM WITH BLACKOUT FABRIC AND FASCIA AND END CAPS, DOOR FRAME MOUNTED.

FABRIC SHALL BE CUT TO FIT WITHIN DOOR FRAMING 12.03 MECHOSHADE MANUALLY OPERATED ROLLING WINDOW SHADING SYSTEM WITH 3% OPEN 1500 SERIES SOLAR CONTROL FABRIC, RECESSED OR SURFACE

MOUNTED PER INTERIOR ELEVATIONS. FABRIC SHALL BE CUT TO FIT WITHIN DOOR FRAMING WHERE DOOR FRAME MOUNTED. PROVIDE ANOD. ALUM. FASCIA AND END CAPS AT ALL SURFACE MOUNTED SHADE CONDITIONS

12.04 not used 12.05 MECHOSHADE TOP DOWN RECESSED MOTORIZED ROLLING WINDOW SHADING SYSTEM WITH 3% OPEN 1500 SERIES SOLAR CONTROL FABRIC. NOTE THAT

SWITCHING DIAGRAM ON ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS IS SCHEMATIC; CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR COORDINATING CONTROL WIRING WITH SHADE MANUFACTURER TO ACHIEVE SWITCHING LAYOUT AS SHOWN ON DRAWINGS.

12.06 MECHOSHADE TOP DOWN WALL OR CEILING SURFACE MOUNTED MOTORIZED ROLLING WINDOW SHADING SYSTEM WITH BLACKOUT FABRIC. NOTE THAT SWITCHING DIAGRAM ON ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS IS SCHEMATIC; CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR COORDINATING CONTROL WIRING WITH SHADE MANUFACTURER TO ACHIEVE SWITCHING LAYOUT AS SHOWN ON DRAWINGS. PROVIDE ANOD. ALUM. FASCIA AND END CAPS AT ALL SURFACE MOUNTED SHADE CONDITIONS

12.07 not used 12.08 not used 12.09 MECHOSHADE WALL MOUNTED MANUAL BOTTOM UP ROLLING WINDOW SHADING SYSTEM WITH 3% LIGHT TRANSMISSION FABRIC AND CEILING MOUNTED TOP

RETURN ROLLER. PROVIDE ANOD. ALUM. FASCIA AND END CAPS TO CREATE SILL AND HEAD POCKETS

DIVISION 15: MECHANICAL/PLUMBING 15.01 GAS RISER: SEE PLUMBING 15.02 HI-LO DISABLED ACCESSIBLE DRINKING FOUNTAIN: SEE PLUMBING 15.03 FLOOR DRAIN: SEE PLUMBING 15.04 FLOOR SERVICE SINK: CECO 871 28" x 28" WITH B71-2" CAULK DRAIN WITH FLAT CHROME STRAINER 15.05 WATER HEATER: SEE PLUMBING 15.06 FLOOR SINK 15.07 STORMWATER DOWNPIPE / DRAINAGE PIPE: SEE PLUMBING AND CIVIL 15.08 RETURN AIR GRILL: SEE MECH 15.09 SUPPLY AIR DUCT: SEE MECH 15.10 PACKAGE UNIT: SEE MECH. (DASHED LINE INDICATES MANUF. RECOMMENDED CLEARANCE AROUND UNIT, WHERE OCCURS) 15.11 SUPPLY AIR GRILL/DIFFUSER: SEE MECH. 15.12 SINK: SEE PLUMBING 15.13 GUTTER DRAIN 15.14 HOSE BIB: SEE PLUMBING. PROVIDE STAINLESS STEEL LOCKABLE RECESSED ENCLOSURE, TYP. U.O.N. AT ALL WALL MOUNTED LOCATIONS 15.15 CONCEALED STORM DRAINAGE DOWNPIPE (DIAGRAMMATIC ROUTE) 15.16 PREFABRICATED EQUIPMENT CURB BY HVAC EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER. PROVIDE CUSTOM SLOPES AS REQUIRED TO ACHIEVE ROOFING MANUF.

REQUIRED FLASHING CLEARANCE ABOVE FINISH ROOFING SURFACE. 15.17 EXHAUST FAN: SEE MECH. 15.18 not used 15.19 REMOTE ACTUATOR FOR HVAC DAMPER: PROVIDE 1 1/2" Ø OPENING WITH 2" X 4" METAL COVER PLATE SCREWED TO FINISH SURFACE 15.20 not used 15.21 PIPE / DUCT PENETRATION THROUGH ROOF: SEE MECH / PLUMBING 15.22 ROOF RECEPTOR DRAIN: SEE PLUMBING 15.23 ROOF / OVERFLOW / SCUPPER DRAIN: SIZE PER PLUMBING AND PER ARCH. DETAIL 15.24 ROOF MOUNTED CONDENSING UNIT: SEE MECHANICAL 15.25 GAS METER: SEE CIVIL AND PLUMBING 15.26 BACKFLOW PREVENTER AS NOTED 15.27 EXHAUST DUCT WITH ROOF JACK 15.28 FIRE SPRINKLER PIPE, WHERE OCCURS 15.29 DRY WELL: SEE PLUMBING 15.30 GAS PIPING: SEE PLUMBING

DIVISION 02: SITE CONSTRUCTION 02.01 DETECTABLE WARNING PANEL BY DETECTABLE WARNING SYSTEMS. MODEL: REDI-MAT OR APPROVED EQUAL. COLOR: YELLOW. PATTERN: IN-LINE / SQUARE

DIVISION 03: CONCRETE 03.01 REINFORCED CONCRETE SLAB. REINFORCE WITH #4 @ 16" EA. WAY, TYP. U.O.N.PROVIDE STEEL TROWELED FINISH AND SEALER WHERE EXPOSED. 03.02 REINFORCED CONCRETE FOOTING: SEE STRUCTURAL, TYP. U.O.N. 03.03 REINFORCED CONCRETE GRADE BEAM: SEE STRUCTURAL 03.04 REINFORCED CONCRETE PEDESTAL/ENCASEMENT: SEE STRUCTURAL. PATCH AND SACK WHERE EXPOSED. PROVIDE SAWCUT CONTROL JOINTS AS

INDICATED. 03.05 REINFORCED CONCRETE HOUSEKEEPING PAD: SEE ALSO ELECTRICAL 03.06 REINFORCED CONCRETE CURB / EDGE OF SLAB: SEE STRUCTURAL. REINFORCEMENT SHALL BE 1-#4 CONT. UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. PATCH AND SACK

WHERE EXPOSED. PROVIDE SAWCUT CONTROL JOINTS AS INDICATED. 03.07 REINFORCED CONCRETE STEM WALL. REINFORCEMENT SHALL BE #4 @ 16" O.C. EACH WAY UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. LIGHT SANDBLAST FINISH WHERE

EXPOSED. PROVIDE SAWCUT CONTROL JOINTS AS INDICATED. PROVIDE INTEGRAL DAVIS COLORS PEBBLE 641, MIN. SRI = 39. 03.08 VAPOR RETARDER AND GRANULAR FILL 03.09 not used 03.10 not used 03.11 REBAR AS NOTED

DIVISION 04: MASONRY 04.01 (E) SPLIT FACED AND PRECISION 4" TALL, 8" THICK CMU. COLOR: ANGELUS SANDSTONE. REMOVE ALL REMAINING OUTLET BOXES, PIPES, ETC., AND REPOINT

AND REPAIR WHERE REQUIRED 04.02 SPLIT FACED 4" TALL, 8" THICK CMU. COLOR: ANGELUS SANDSTONE OR EQUAL TO MATCH (E) AS CLOSELY AS POSSIBLE. PROVIDE FACE BLOCKS OR ENTIRE

BLOCKS AS REQUIRED.

DIVISION 05: METALS 05.01 PTD. STEEL PLATE. PAINTED AND HOT DIPPED GALVANIZED AT EXTERIOR LOCATIONS. SEE STRUCT. WHERE APPLIES. 05.02 ANCHOR AS NOTED 05.03 WELDED WIRE FABRIC, SIZE PER DRAWINGS. COLD GALVANIZED / METALIZED IN SHOP 05.04 PTD. STEEL TUBE, SEE STRUCT.: COLOR BY ARCHITECT. HOT DIPPED GALVANIZED AT EXTERIOR LOCATIONS. PROVIDE CAPS WHERE ENDS ARE EXPOSED.

NOTE THAT ALL EXPOSED STEEL IS TO BE CONSIDERED ARCHITECTURALLY EXPOSED STEEL (AESS) AND SHALL HAVE ALL TOLERANCES MINIMIZED. REMAINING GAPS ARE TO BE FILLED AND PAINTED TO PROVIDE A FULLY WEATHERTIGHT ENVELOPE.

05.05 PTD. STEEL COLUMN, SEE STRUCT.: COLOR BY ARCHITECT. HOT DIPPED GALVANIZED AT EXTERIOR LOCATIONS. NOTE THAT ALL EXPOSED STEEL IS TO BE CONSIDERED ARCHITECTURALLY EXPOSED STEEL (AESS) AND SHALL HAVE ALL TOLERANCES MINIMIZED. REMAINING GAPS ARE TO BE FILLED AND PAINTED TO PROVIDE A FULLY WEATHERTIGHT ENVELOPE.

05.06 PTD. STEEL BEAM / PERLIN, SEE STRUCT.: COLOR BY ARCHITECT. HOT DIPPED GALVANIZED AT EXTERIOR LOCATIONS. NOTE THAT ALL EXPOSED STEEL IS TO BE CONSIDERED ARCHITECTURALLY EXPOSED STEEL (AESS) AND SHALL HAVE ALL TOLERANCES MINIMIZED. REMAINING GAPS ARE TO BE FILLED AND PAINTED TO PROVIDE A FULLY WEATHERTIGHT ENVELOPE.

05.07 PTD. STEEL CHANNEL, SEE STRUCT.: COLOR BY ARCHITECT. HOT DIPPED GALVANIZED AT EXTERIOR LOCATIONS. NOTE THAT ALL EXPOSED STEEL IS TO BE CONSIDERED ARCHITECTURALLY EXPOSED STEEL (AESS) AND SHALL HAVE ALL TOLERANCES MINIMIZED. REMAINING GAPS ARE TO BE FILLED AND PAINTED TO PROVIDE A FULLY WEATHERTIGHT ENVELOPE.

05.08 PTD. STEEL ANGLE, SEE STRUCT.: COLOR BY ARCHITECT. HOT DIPPED GALVANIZED AT EXTERIOR LOCATIONS 05.09 METAL ROOF DECK PER STRUCT.: PAINTED WHERE EXPOSED. 05.10 LIGHTGAUGE METAL FURRING 05.11 2" x 4" METAL STUD WALL: 16 GAUGE MIN. 05.12 2" x 6" METAL STUD WALL: 16 GAUGE MIN. 05.13 METAL STUD KICKERS/BRACING: SEE 1F/A801 (SIMILAR) 05.14 LIGHTGAUGE METAL BOX HEADER: 16 GA. MIN. SEE 1B/A801 05.15 STEEL CHANNEL JOISTS: SIZE AND SPACING PER 2/A802 05.16 BENT PLATE: SEE STRUCT. 05.17 not used 05.18 not used 05.19 PTD. HOT DIPPED GALVANIZED ORNAMENTAL STEEL 05.20 16 GA. (MIN.) METAL BACKING: SEE 9/A802 05.21 STEEL CANTILEVER SHELVING UNIT: SEE SCHEDULE. COLOR: BY ARCHITECT

DIVISION 07: THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07.01 R-30 (MINIMUM, LONG TERM THERMAL RESISTANCE) POLYISOCYANURATE RIGID INSULATION BY ROOFING MANUF. 07.02 "SECUROCK" GLASS-MAT COVER BOARD BY US GYPSUM, 3/8" MECHANICALLY FASTENED TO METAL ROOF DECK AT LOW SLOPE CONDITIONS AND 5/8"

THICK AT VERTICAL CONDITIONS. 07.03 FIBERGLASS BATT INSULATION (R19 MIN.), TYPICAL AT ALL EXTERIOR WALLS AND AT ALL WALLS AND CEILINGS SEPARATING CONDITIONED FROM

UNCONDITIONED SPACES. 07.04 FIBERGLASS BATT INSULATION (R13 MIN). PROVIDE ACOUSTIC INSULATION AT ALL INTERIOR RESTROOM WALLS, TYP. AND AT ALL GYPSUM BOARD FINISH

CEILINGS WITH HVAC DUCTWORK ABOVE. 07.05 ROOF CRICKET: MODIFIED BITUMEN ROOFING OVER TAPERED RIGID INSULATION. MIN. SLOPE 1/2" PER LIN. FT. U.O.N. 07.06 PRESSURE TREATED WOOD NAILER OR 16 GA. MIN. GALVANIZED BENT METAL "Z" OR "C" NAILER, SHAPED TO DRAIN AT PARAPET CAP CONDITIONS AND

WHERE NOTED. SIZE PER ROOFING MANUFACTURER RECOMMENDATIONS. PROVIDE AT EVERY ROOFING EDGE AND AT EVERY ROOFING PENETRATION, AS REQUIRED BY ROOFING MANUFACTURER, WHETHER SPECIFICALLY NOTED OR NOT IN DETAILS. NOT REQUIRED AT PARAPETS OR WHERE LEAD FLASHING IS PROVIDED. ALL NAILERS SHALL BE SECURELY ANCHORED TO METAL ROOF DECK TO RESIST A MINIMUM FORCE OF 300 LBS. PER LINEAL FOOT, PER FACTORY MUTUAL DATA SHEET 1-49.

07.07 MODIFIED BITUMEN MEMBRANE ROOFING BY SIPLAST. ICC ESR # 1713 07.08 (E) BUILT UP ROOFING ASSEMBLY TO REMAIN 07.09 MEMBRANE FLASHING BY ROOFING MANUF: PROVIDE SPECIFIC MEMBRANE RECOMMENDED BY MANUFACTURER FOR APPLICATION. FASTEN TO ROOFING

MEMBRANE AND/OR SUBSTRATE PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS. 07.10 24 GA. MIN. GALVANIZED SHEET METAL OVERFLOW SCUPPER, PRIMED AND PAINTED WHERE EXPOSED. HEM ALL EXPOSED EDGES. 07.11 20 GA. MIN. GALVANIZED SHEET METAL, PRIMED AND PAINTED WHERE EXPOSED. HEM ALL EXPOSED EDGES. 07.12 22 GA. MIN. STAINLESS STEEL FLASHING.HEM ALL EXPOSED EDGES. 07.13 FIRE RESISTIVE SELF-EXPANDING FOAM 07.14 MEMBRANE BOOT BY ROOFING MANUF. FOR PIPE PENETRATIONS THROUGH ROOF. PROVIDE STAINLESS STEEL HOSE CLAMP AS RECOMMENDED BY

ROOFING MANUFACTURER. 07.15 CONTINUOUS SEALANT: PROVIDE BACKER ROD AS NECESSARY. COLOR BY ARCHITECT. FIRE RATED WHERE REQUIRED. 07.16 not used 07.17 not used 07.18 not used 07.19 SELF-EXPANDING FOAM INSULATION, FIRE RATED WHERE REQUIRED. PROVIDE THROUGHOUT TO COMPLETELY SEAL ENTIRE BUILDING ENVELOPE AT

GAPS BETWEEN STRUCTURAL MEMBERS. 07.20 4" x 15" (TYP,. UON), THROUGH-PARAPET OVERFLOW SCUPPER 07.21 WATER RESISTIVE AIR BARRIER: VAPRO-SHIELD WRAPSHIELD RS VAPOR PERMEABLE MEMBRANE WITH 3mm DRAINAGE CAVITY

DIVISION 08: DOORS AND WINDOWS 08.01 ARCADIA TC470 SERIES 2 1/4" X 4 1/2" OFFSET CAPTURED GLAZED STOREFRONT SYSTEM FOR 1" GLASS (TYP. UON) WITH CLASS I AB-5 MEDIUM BRONZE

FINISH. ALL GLAZING SHALL BE PER KEYNOTE 08.05 UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. PROVIDE STEEL REINFORCING AS REQUIRED TO MEET DESIGN PRESSURE AND APPLICABLE LOCAL CODES. PROVIDE FACE CAPS AT ALL HORIZONTAL FRAMING AND AT VERTICAL FRAMING U.O.N.

08.02 7/16" THICK (NOMINAL) LAMINATED GLASS WITH 65% TRANSLUCENT (U.O.N.) PVB LAMINATING FILM. ALL LAMINATED GLAZING SHALL MEET TEST REQUIREMENTS OF UBC STANDARD 24-2, PART 1 (ANSI Z97.1, SAFETY GLAZING TEST). PROVIDE 20 GA. STAINLESS STEEL 1/4" X 1/4" U-CHANNEL FRAME WITH MITRED CORNERS AROUND ENTIRE PERIMETER.

08.03 ARCADIA A400 SERIES 1 3/4" X 4" CENTER GLAZED SYSTEM FOR 1/4" GLASS (TYP. UON) WITH CLASS I AB-5 MEDIUM BRONZE FINISH. ALL GLAZING SHALL BE PER KEYNOTE 08.07 UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.

08.04 ARCADIA WS 512 HD SERIES HEAVY DUTY WIDE STILE ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEM FOR 1" GLASS (TYP. UON) WITH CLASS I AB-5 MEDIUM BRONZE FINISH. ALL GLAZING SHALL BE PER KEYNOTE 08.05 UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. PROVIDE CONCEALED CLOSER.

08.05 INSULATED GLAZING UNIT: 1/4" (MIN.) TEMPERED CLEAR GLASS, 1/2" AIR SPACE, 3/16" CLEAR FLOAT GLASS, TRANSPARENT PVB LAMINATING PLASTIC, 3/16" CLEAR FLOAT GLASS. ALL LAMINATED GLAZING SHALL MEET TEST REQUIREMENTS OF UBC STANDARD 24-2, PART 1 (ANSI Z97.1, SAFETY GLAZING TEST, TYPICAL. SEE 3/G002 FOR GLAZING PERFORMANCE CRITERIA

08.06 not used 08.07 MONOLITHIC 3/8" CLEAR UNTINTED AND UNCOATED TEMPERED GLASS. GLAZING SHALL MEET TEST REQUIREMENTS OF UBC STANDARD 24-2, PART 1 (ANSI

Z97.1, SAFETY GLAZING TEST), TYPICAL. 08.08 INSULATED SPANDREL GLAZING UNIT: 1/4" (MIN.) TEMPERED CLEAR GLASS WITH OPAQUE WHITE FACTORY-APPLIED, FIRE-FUSED CERAMIC FRIT PAINT,

ON #2 SURFACE, 1/2" AIR SPACE, 3/16" CLEAR FLOAT GLASS, TRANSPARENT PVB LAMINATING PLASTIC, 3/16" CLEAR FLOAT GLASS. ALL LAMINATED GLAZING SHALL MEET TEST REQUIREMENTS OF UBC STANDARD 24-2, PART 1 (ANSI Z97.1, SAFETY GLAZING TEST, TYPICAL. SEE 3/G002 FOR GLAZING PERFORMANCE CRITERIA

08.09 HOLLOW METAL DOOR FRAME OR DOOR. PAINT IN COLOR PT-2, TYP. U.O.N. 08.10 ROLLING GRILLE: PROVIDE METAL FASCIA AND METAL BOTTOM HOOD BY GRILLE MANUF., BOTH FINISHED TO MATCH GRILLE. PROVIDE ACCESS PANELS

FOR MOTOR ACCESS AND FOR EMERGENCY CHAIN HOIST ACCESS: COORDINATE FINAL SIZE AND LOCATION WITH MANUFACTURER 08.11 MOTORIZED SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM BY STANLEY ACCESS TECHNOLOGIES. MODEL: DURA-GLIDE 3000 DUAL SLIDE WITH TRANSOM. HAND: PER DRAWINGS.

FRAME FINISH: CLASS I MEDIUM BRONZE FINISH TO MATCH STOREFRONT FRAMING. ACTIVATION SYSTEM: STANDARD SU-050 MICROWAVE BASED MOTION DETECTORS AT EACH SIDE AND STAN-GUARD ACTIVE INFRARED PRESENCE DETECTOR OVER THRESHOLD (WIDE PATTERN). OPTIONS: KEYED ON-OFF OPERATION SWITCH; DUAL SCHLAGE PRIMUS LOCKING CYLINDER; FULL PANIC DEVICE; 6" DEEP JAMBS, SILLS, AND HEADERS THROUGHOUT. PROVIDE WIDE STILES. ALL GLAZING SHALL BE PER KEYNOTE 08.05 UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. (ADDITIVE ALTERNATE 03)

08.12 STAINLESS STEEL LOCKABLE ACCESS PANEL 08.13 not used 08.14 6 MIL THICK (MIN.) ANTI GRAFITTI FILM 08.15 SLIDING ALUMINUM FRAMED BIFOLD DOOR SYSTEM: ARCADIA SERIES 8000 DOOR WITH DUAL GLAZING PER KEYNOTE 08.05. PROVIDE 10" KICKPLATE,

CLASS I AB-5 MEDIUM BRONZE FINISH THROUGHOUT. (ADDITIVE ALTERNATE 02). 08.16 45% (VISIBLE LIGHT TRANSMITTANCE) TRANSLUCENT FILM 08.17 MULTI-SLIDE ALUMINUM FRAMED DOOR SYSTEM: ARCADIA SERIES 2820 WITH MONOLITHIC GLAZING PER KEYNOTE 08.07. PROVIDE 10" KICKPLATE AND

CLASS I AB-5 MEDIUM BRONZE FINISH THROUGHOUT. COMPLY WITH APPLICABLE ACCESSIBILITY REQUIREMENTS AT THRESHOLD. 08.18 not used 08.19 (E) ROOF ACCESS HATCH TO BE PROTECTED IN PLACE AND PAINTED 08.20 3/16" MIN. ALUM. BREAK METAL W/ COUNTERSUNK S.S. #8 SCREWS @ 15" O.C., TYP. U.O.N. CLASS I AB-5 MEDIUM BRONZE FINISH, TYP. U.O.N. 08.21 not used 08.22 DOOR HARDWARE: SEE SCHEDULE 08.23 not used 08.24 SOLATUBE 290 DSe SELF-MOUNTED SKYLIGHT WITH DUAL GLAZED DOME WITH "CLASSIC VUSION" LENS AND DUAL GLAZED TRANSITION BOX. PROVIDE

TUBE ADAPTORS AS REQUIRED TO LOCATE OPENINGS AS INDICATED ON PLANS. LARR# 25251. (ADDITIVE ALTERNATE 01). 08.25 [same as 08.02]

DIVISION 10: SPECIALTIES 10.01 not used 10.02 2A-10BC FIRE EXTINGUISHER IN SEMI-RECESSED STAINLESS STEEL LOCKABLE CABINET WITH TEMPERED GLASS. PROVIDE FULLY RECESSED CABINET WHERE

INDICATED ON PLANS 10.03 MARKER BOARD 10.04 FABRIC COVERED TACK BOARD 10.05 LOCKABLE BULLETIN BOARD CABINET 10.06 LOCKABLE AND ILLUMINATED DISPLAY CABINET: CLARIDGE 390 SERIES 10.07 WALL MOUNTED COAT RACK 10.08 METAL LOCKERS WITH METAL BASE AND SLOPED TOP. PROVIDE 1% OF LOCKERS, BUT NOT LESS THAN 1 LOCKER, FOR DISABLED USE. 10.09 WALL CLOCK 10.10 CURBSIDE BOOK RETURN BY KINGSLEY LIBRARY EQUIPMENT COMPANY. ANCHOR TO CONCRETE SLAB, WHERE OCCURS. 10.11 FABRIC UNDER SINK PLUMBING COVER 10.12 not used 10.13 not used 10.14 POLE MOUNTED TRAFFIC CONTROL SIGN 10.15 (E) POLE MOUNTED PARKING SIGN 10.16 CUT CLEAR ANODIZED OR DARK BRONZE ANODIZED ALUMINUM LETTERS, HELVETICA FONT, TYP. U.O.N. SIZE PER DRAWINGS 10.17 SIGNAGE PER SCHEDULE 10.18 not used 10.19 LOCATION FOR FUTURE WALL MOUNTED TELEVISION/VCR RACK TO BE PROVIDED BY OWNER. PROVIDE BACKING AND ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS AS

REQUIRED. COORDINATE WITH OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE FOR MODEL TO BE INSTALLED AND REQUIREMENTS. 10.20 TOILET ACCESSORY 10.21 CAST BRONZE COMMEMORATIVE PLAQUE 10.22 ALUMINUM CORNER GUARD 10.23 not used 10.24 not used 10.25 CHAIR RAIL: LBI / BOYD ARMOR WALL WALL GUARD, MODEL: NUTREE, 1 1/2" x 5 1/2", NT-690-05, COLOR WEATHERWOOD. PROVIDE ALL END CAPS, BUTT JOINT

CONNECTORS, INSIDE AND OUTSIDE CORNERS, AND ALL CUSTOM LENGTHS AS REQUIRED FOR LAYOUT AS SHOWN ON DRAWINGS. 10.26 ART-HANGING SYSTEM: STAS PICTURE HANGING SYSTEMS CLIPRAIL PRO SYSTEM IN WHITE, INCLUDING CLIPS, RAILS, AND 59" LONG STAINLESS STEEL

CABLES @ 36" O.C. WITH ADJUSTABLE ZIPPER PRO HOOKS. PROVIDE ALL END CAPS, BUTT JOINT CONNECTORS, INSIDE AND OUTSIDE CORNERS, AND ALL CUSTOM LENGTHS AS REQUIRED FOR LAYOUT AS SHOWN ON DRAWINGS.

10.27 CLASS I CLEAR ANODIZED ALUMINUM EXTRUSION

DIVISION 11: EQUIPMENT 11.01 MOTORIZED PROJECTION SCREEN: 144" WIDE x 81" TALL 11.02 BOOK THEFT DETECTION SYSTEM 11.03 EQUIPMENT TO BE INSTALLED AND PROVIDED AS PART OF A SEPARATE CONTRACT (NIC) 11.04 3M SELFCHECK SYSTEM V-SERIES MODEL 7420. RECESS EQUIPMENT WHEREVER POSSIBLE. COORDINATE ALL ELECTRICAL AND SPACE REQUIREMENTS WITH

RELATED TRADES 11.06 DOMESTIC TYPE OVEN/RANGE 11.07 REFRIGERATOR/FREEZER. COORDINATE ICEMAKER WITH PLUMBING 11.08 MICROWAVE OVEN 11.09 RANGE HOOD. WIRE TO WALL SWITCH MOUNTED AT ACCESSIBLE HEIGHT 11.10 not used 11.11 FIXTURES, FURNISHINGS, AND/OR EQUIPMENT TO BE INSTALLED AND PROVIDED AS PART OF THIS CONTRACT

DIVISION 16: ELECTRICAL 16.01 (E) 2 x 4 FLUORESCENT TROFFER FIXTURE TO REMAIN. RE-WIRE AS REQUIRED FOR A FULLY FUNCTIONING AND OPERATING SYSTEM. REPLACE ALL

DAMAGED LENSES WITH SIMILAR TO MATCH EXISTING 16.02 SURFACE MOUNTED LIGHT FIXTURE (WET LABELED AT EXTERIOR LOCATIONS). LOCATE ELECTRICAL BOX AS REQUIRED FOR CODE COMPLIANT ACCESS. 16.03 RECESSED LIGHT FIXTURE (WET LABELED AT EXTERIOR LOCATIONS). LOCATE ELECTRICAL BOX AS REQUIRED FOR CODE COMPLIANT ACCESS. 16.04 PENDANT LIGHT FIXTURE (WET LABELED AT EXTERIOR LOCATIONS). LOCATE ELECTRICAL BOX AS REQUIRED FOR CODE COMPLIANT ACCESS. 16.05 UNDERSLAB CONDUIT: SEE ELECTRICAL 16.06 UNDERFLOOR ELECTRICAL JUNCTION BOX WITH CARPET RING: SEE ELECTRICAL 16.07 UNDERFLOOR ELECTRICAL DUCT: SEE ELECTRICAL 16.08 WIRELESS ACCESS POINT: SEE ELECTRICAL 16.09 SEISMIC CABLE BRACING: 1/16"Ø NYLON COATED AIRCRAFT CABLE WITH LOOP/SLEEVE CONNECTORS. FASTEN TO WALLS WITH EYE TYPE LAG SCREWS INTO

SOLID STUDS OR BACKING. PROVIDE A "CLASSIC" MODEL TURNBUCKLE BYJOHNSON ARCHITECTURAL HARDWARE AT EACH CABLE RUN FOR ADJUSTMENT. 16.10 SELF-ILLUMINATING EXIT SIGN, FLAG TYPE WHERE INDICATED 16.11 CCTV CEILING MOUNTED CAMERA: PROVIDE 3/4" CONDUIT TO MCR 16.12 PLASTIC ELECTRICAL BOXES, CONDUIT, SLEEVES, AND ALL OTHER APPURTANANCES WITHIN 36" OF THEFT DETECTION UNIT 16.13 IN-FLOOR ELECTRICAL BOX: PROVIDE BRASS COVER PLATE WITH TOP SURFACE MOUNTED FLUSH TO FINISH FLOOR 16.14 IN-GRADE LIGHT FIXTURE 16.15 not used 16.16 ELECTRICAL BOX AS REQUIRED FOR CODE COMPLIANT ACCESS. WHERE SHOWN AT FINISH CEILING LEVEL, PROVIDE SECONDARY STRUCTURE FOR

SUSPENSION FROM BUILDING STRUCTURE ABOVE AND SEISMIC BRACING AS REQUIRED. PROVIDE COVER PLATES AND/OR ESCUTCHEON PLATES BY FIXTURE MANUFACTURER.

16.17 not used 16.18 not used 16.19 ELECTRICAL DEVICE AS NOTED: SEE ELEC. 16.20 PHOTOCELL: SWITCHING PER ELECTRICAL 16.21 ROOF MOUNTED AV ANTENNA: 3/4" CONDUIT TO MCR. INSTALL PER STANDARD PENETRATION DETAILS 16.22 ALUM. RACEWAY BASE AND COVER: WIREMOLD AL 2000 OR AL5200 AS REQUIRED BY WIRE QUANTITY. PROVIDE RECEPTACLES AS REQUIRED 16.23 JUNCTION BOX WITH WET-LABELED STAINLESS STEEL COVER FOR FUTURE SECURITY CAMERA. PROVIDE ONE 3/4"Ø CONDUIT HOMERUN TO MAIN

COMMUNICATIONS ROOM. 16.24 RECESSED (TYP., U.O.N.) SPEAKER: SEE TELECOM DRAWINGS 16.25 not used 16.26 LEGRAND WIRE MANAGEMENT OR LOW VOLTAGE EQUIPMENT, AS NOTED.

DISABLED ACCESSIBLITY KEYNOTES DA.01 60" x 60" (MIN.) LEVEL LANDING DA.02 DISABLED ACCESSIBLE PATH OF TRAVEL: 5% MAX. SLOPE WITH 2% MAX. CROSS SLOPE DA.03 48" x 48" (MIN.) LEVEL LANDING DA.04 72" x (WIDTH OF RAMP) (MIN) LEVEL LANDING DA.05 30" x 48" LEVEL FORWARD APPROACH FLOOR SPACE DA.06 60" DIAMETER LEVEL FLOOR SPACE FOR TURNING CIRCLE DA.07 60" x 54" PULL SIDE ACCESSIBLE CLEARANCE

DIVISION 09: FINISHES 09.01 PTD. 5/8" XGB. PROVIDE J-MOLD AND CONT. CAULK AT ALL EXPOSED EDGES. PROVIDE CORNER REINFORCEMENT AT ALL EXPOSED OUTSIDE

CORNERS. PROVIDE LEVEL 5 FINISH AND PROJECTION SCREEN PAINT PER KEYNOTE 09.26. 09.02 DALTILE COLORBODY UNPOLISHED 6" x 12" COVE BASE AND COVE BASE OUTCORNER PORCELAIN TILE: UNITY, COLOR GRIGIO P402 09.03 SHERWIN WILLIAMS PAINT. COLOR AS NOTED 09.04 PAINTED 7/8" THICK SAND FINISH EXTERIOR CEMENT PLASTER WITH INTEGRAL COLOR COAT OVER METAL LATHE OVER VAPROSHIELD WRAPSHIELD

RS WATER RESISTIVE AIR BARRIER WITH 3mm DRAINAGE CAVITY, OVER 5/8" USG "SECUROCK" GLASS-MAT EXTERIOR SHEATHING. 09.05 ALUM. FURRING CHANNEL BY TRESPA 09.06 UNPAINTED ALUM. FRY REGLET DRYWALL REVEAL: 1/4" REVEAL, TYP. U.O.N. 09.07 CEMENTITIOUS BACKERBOARD 09.08 PTD. 5/8" USG SHEETROCK® BRAND FIRECODE® X GYPSUM SHEATHING PANELS, MOISTURE RESISTANT AT ALL AREAS EXPOSED TO WATER.

PROVIDE J-MOLD AND CONT. CAULK AT ALL EXPOSED EDGES. PROVIDE CORNER REINFORCEMENT AT ALL EXPOSED OUTSIDE CORNERS. PROVIDE LEVEL 4 FINISH TYP. U.O.N. PAINT IN COLOR PT-1, TYP. U.O.N.

09.09 DALTILE COLORBODY UNPOLISHED 12" x 12" PORCELAIN FIELD TILE: UNITY, COLOR GRIGIO P402 09.10 DAL GLAZED RITTENHOUSE SQUARE WALL TILE 3" x 6" x 5/16": COLOR X735 ALMOND SEMI GLOSS WITH 210 ANTIQUE WHITE GROUT. PROVIDE A-3361

COVE BASE TO MATCH. 09.11 DALTILE CAPRICE 5/16" MOSAIC GLASS ACCENT TILE, COLOR WHISPER ICE F165 09.12 5/8" US GYPSUM "SECUROCK" GLASS-MAT EXTERIOR SHEATHING PANELS, WITH LAMINATED SHEET METAL SHEAR PANEL, WHERE OCCURS (SEE

STRUCT.) 09.13 DALTILE COLORBODY PORCELAIN 12" x 24" FLOOR TILE: UNITY, COLOR AVORIO P400, UNPOLISHED, TYP. U.O.N. 09.14 DALTILE COLORBODY PORCELAIN 12" x 24" FLOOR TILE: UNITY, COLOR AVORIO P400, TEXTURED 09.15 RUBBER WALL BASE BY ROPPE CORPORATION. MODEL TS, BASE HEIGHT: 4". COLOR: 118 PEACOCK. PROFILE: 70 09.16 ARMSTRONG ACOUSTICAL CEILING PANEL: 24" X 24" OPTIMA VECTOR 3904 IN ARMSTRONG PRELUDE XL HEAVY DUTY SUSPENDED CEILING GRID 09.17 ARMSTRONG ACOUSTICAL CEILING PANEL: 24" X 24" DUNE 1774 ANGLED TEGULAR IN ARMSTRONG PRELUDE XL HEAVY DUTY SUSPENDED CEILING

GRID 09.18 "EUROSPAN" WALL/CEILING ACOUSTICAL PANELING BY WALL TECHNOLOGY. PROVIDE 1" THICK FIBERGLASS BATT INSULATION WITH NEOPRENE

FACING BEHIND. 09.19 CLEAR ANODIZED ALUMINUM, UNPAINTED, EXTERIOR PLASTER REVEAL. 1/2" REVEAL, TYP. U.O.N. 09.20 ARCHITECTURAL COMPONENTS GROUP, INC. ENCORE SERIES I CLEAR COATED WOOD CEILING. VENEER SHALL BE CHERRY STAINED TO MATCH

WILSONART WILD CHERRY 7054 LAMINATE. COORDINATE WITH MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL, AND PLUMBING, AND PROVIDE CODE-REQUIRED ACCESS PANELS CLAD WITH WOOD FINISH FOR ALL DEVICES

09.21 (E) EXTERIOR CEMENT PLASTER TO BE CLEANED, PRIMED AND PAINTED 09.22 (E) ACOUSTICAL CEILING PANELS AND GRIDS TO BE PROTECTED IN PLACE. PROVIDE SIMILAR PANELS TO REPLACE DAMAGED (E) PANELS. MODIFY

PANELS AS REQUIRED FOR NEW DEVICES AND PENETRATIONS 09.23 FORBO MARMOLEUM REAL TILE, FIELD COLOR: 3219 SPA 09.24 FORBO MARMOLEUM VIVACE TILE, ACCENT COLOR: 3423 PAINTERS PALETTE 09.25 FORBO STATIC DISSIPATIVE TILE: COLOREX SD 150222 NIAGARA 09.26 GOO SYSTEMS SCREEN GOO PROJECTION SCREEN PAINT: REFERENCE WHITE PAIR 115 (2.0L) - SKU# 6367 09.27 DALTILE COLORBODY UNPOLISHED 6" x 12" COVE BASE AND COVE BASE OUTCORNER PORCELAIN TILE: UNITY, COLOR AVORIO P400 09.28 24" x 24" MODULAR CARPET TILE: TANDUS CANDOR 04792, COLOR, CARIBE 73717, INSTALLED IN VERTICAL ASHLAR PATTERN. PROVIDE BRASS

TRANSITION STRIP FASTENED TO SUBFLOOR AT ALL JOINTS TO DISSIMILAR FINISH FLOORING MATERIALS: 1/4" MAX. CHANGE IN FINISH FLOOR ELEVATION.

09.29 24" x 24" MODULAR CARPET TILE: TANDUS CANDOR 04792, COLOR, OPEN OCEAN 73706, INSTALLED IN VERTICAL ASHLAR PATTERN. PROVIDE BRASS TRANSITION STRIP FASTENED TO SUBFLOOR AT ALL JOINTS TO DISSIMILAR FINISH FLOORING MATERIALS: 1/4" MAX. CHANGE IN FINISH FLOOR ELEVATION.

09.30 METAL CORNER REINFORCEMENT, ROUNDED WHERE NOTED. PROVIDE PLASTIC CORNER REINFORCEMENT WITHIN 18" RADIUS OF BOOK DETECTION UNIT

09.31 METAL "J" OR "L" MOLDING AND CAULK. PROVIDE PLASTIC MOLDINGS WITHIN 18" RADIUS OF BOOK DETECTION UNIT 09.32 (E) GYP. BD. : REPAIR AND TAPE AS REQUIRED TO MAINTAIN (E) FIRE RESISTIVE ASSEMBLY. PROVIDE SELF EXPANDING 1-HOUR FIRE RESISTIVE

FOAM AT ALL PENETRATIONS

1

N

SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" 1


drawing title

REVISIONS

drawing number


La M

irada

Library

13

800

La M

irada

Driv

e La

Mira

da, C

A 9

0638

2015_01

as noted

1

2

3

4

5

6

architect's stamp

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

engineer's stamp

architect

engineer

2/24/16

C 31193


ER

IK

CH I A -K O N G

MA

R

ST

AT

E

O F C A L I F OR

NI

A

LIC

E


CT



1

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

A DCB HGFE

2A401

1A401

3A401

4A401

5A401

E E E E E E

2'-8" 3'-4"

16'-8

"

1

1

1

REMOVE ALL (E) WINDOW / PANEL ASSEMBLIES, TYP.(E) MASONRY WALL TO BE PROTECTED IN PLACE, TYP.

REMOVE PORTION OF (E) MASONRY WALL

DEMOLITION FLOOR PLAN A200

DEMOLITION FLOOR PLAN

(E) DOORS AND WINDOWS TO BE REMOVED (ADDITIVE ALTERNATE 03)

REMOVE (E) DOOR / FRAME ASSEMBLIES, AS INDICATED

3—

FOR ADD ALT. 03

2—

FOR ADD ALT. 02

N

2ADDITIVE ALTERNATE 03: PARTIAL DEMOLITION PLANSCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0"

N

3ADDITIVE ALTERNATE 03: PARTIAL DEMOLITION PLANSCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0"

LOBBY101

5

4

COMMUNITY126

8

7

6

(E) MASONRY WALL TO BE REMOVED (ADDITIVE ALTERNATE 02)

REMOVE ALL (E) WINDOW / PANEL ASSEMBLIES, TYP.

REMOVE (E) DOOR / FRAME ASSEMBLIES, AS INDICATED

(E) DOOR / FRAME ASSEMBLIES TO BE PROTECTED IN PLACEREMOVE (E) SURFACE MOUNTED LIGHT FIXTURE, TYP. FOR 6

REMOVE (E) DOOR FRAME

REMOVE (E) DRYWALL

REMOVE (E) MORTAR AND SLOPED CMU TO PROVIDE CLEAN OPENING FOR CMU FILL

REMOVE (E) MORTAR AND SLOPED CMU TO PROVIDE CLEAN OPENING FOR CMU FILL

N

SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" 1


drawing title

REVISIONS

drawing number


La M

irada

Library

13

800

La M

irada

Driv

e La

Mira

da, C

A 9

0638

2015_01

as noted

1

2

3

4

5

6

architect's stamp

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

engineer's stamp

architect

engineer

2/24/16

C 31193


ER

IK

CH I A -K O N G

MA

R

ST

AT

E

O F C A L I F OR

NI

A

LIC

E


CT



1

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

A DCB HGFE

2A401

1A401

3A401

4A401

5A401

1

5'-1

"8'

-6"

5'-7

"4'

-0"

3'-9

"4'

-4"

3'-1

0"4'

-3"

10'-6

"10

'-0"

8'-1

0"4'

-8"

5'-1

0"13

'-0"

2'-6

"5'

-10"

9'-8

"5'

-10"

10'-3

"3'

-1"

5'-0

"

18" MIN.

18" MIN.

4'-1" :48" MIN.

5'-2

"3'

-4"

22"

8'-6

"2'

-4"

2'-2

"2'

-6"

20'-1

0"13

'-4"

3'-9" 14'-8" 8'-7" 2'-6" 8'-6" 11'-9" 5'-0" 5'-0" 8'-8" 5'-10" 10'-0" 10'-6" 5'-2" 20'-5"

13'-7

"20

'-9"

10'-6

"5'

-0"

5'-8

"24

'-0"

4'-6

"

17'-5" 18" 8'-1" 10'-6"

28"7"3'-0"5'-1"

3'-7" 22"8"22" 7'-9" 4'-7" 5'-10" 10'-0" 10'-6" 5'-1"

48'-2" 3'-7" 10'-7" 1'-6" 4'-1" 8'-1" 9'-9" 9'-0" 5'-1"

6'-4"21"24"16'-11"

30'-1"CL THEFT DETECTOR UNIT

14" :

12"

MIN

.

21" :

18" M

IN.

2'-2

" : 1

8" M

IN.

2'-1

0"6'

-0"

13'-3" 9'-7"

12"

12"

9A802

TYP.

TYP.

11A802

DIMENSION PLAN A202

DIMENSION PLAN

11A802 TYP.

C

ATYP.

B TYP.

B TYP.

BTYP.

B TYP.

A TYP.

A TYP.

ATYP.

A TYP.

A TYP.

A TYP.

A TYP.

TYP.

11A802

F

F

E

E

E

ATYP.

(E) WALLS AND FINISHES TO REMAIN

1-HOUR FIRE RESISTIVE CONSTRUCTION

A 4”

N

SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" 1


drawing title

REVISIONS

drawing number


La M

irada

Library

13

800

La M

irada

Driv

e La

Mira

da, C

A 9

0638

2015_01

as noted

1

2

3

4

5

6

architect's stamp

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

engineer's stamp

architect

engineer

2/24/16

C 31193


ER

IK

CH I A -K O N G

MA

R

ST

AT

E

O F C A L I F OR

NI

A

LIC

E


CT



1

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

A DCB HGFE

2A401

1A401

3A401

4A401

5A401

4'-9

1 2"3'

-8" T

YP

.

4'-1 12"

4'-8" 4'-8" 4'-8"

4'-3

"

3'-8" TYP.5'-2" 5'-2"

4'-1

1 2"

5A601

9A601

7A601

8A601

3—

FOR ADD ALT. 03

2—

FOR ADD ALT. 02

09.04

09.21 TYP.

09.21 TYP.

11.02 KEY SWITCH BOX

11.02MODEL 3902

11.02AREA CLEAR OF METAL

10.02

10.02

10.02

10.02

11A807

TYP.4

A803

4A803

05.21 TYP.

05.21 FILLER, TYP.05.21 FILLER, TYP.

15.15RELOCATED PER PLUMBING

04.01TYP.

04.02TYP.

04.02TYP.

1

1

09.08REPLACE (E) AS REQUIRED

09.08REPLACE (E) AS REQUIRED

1

1

1 2 3

4

5

6

78

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23 24

E1

E2

E3 E4

E5

E6

25

1 2 3

4

5

6

7 8 9 10 11

12

13

14 15 16 17 18

4

30

E

S

W

N 2A602

E

S

W

N 2A602

E

S

W

N 3A602

E

S

W

N 7A602

E

S

W

N 7A602

E

S

W

N 4A602

E

S

W

N 5A602

E

S

W

N 8A602

5A602

E

S

W

N 9A602

E

S

W

N 2A603

E

S

W

N 1A603

E

S

W

N 3A603

E

S

W

N 4A603

1A301

5A301

6A301

2A301

3A301

4A301

E

S

W

N 1A604

E

S

W

N 2A604

3A604

5A603

LOBBY101

MARKETPLACE103

FRIENDS104

MEN106

WOMEN107

KITCHENETTE108

STORAGE109

A / V110

STORAGE111

GROUP STUDY112

GROUP STUDY113

TEEN MULTIPURPOSE125

COMMUNITY126

ADULT SHELVING128

ADULT TECH129

ADULT READING130

CORRIDOR132

CHILD SHELVING116

FAMILY PLACE117

LOUNGE118

DELIVERY119

MEN121

WOMEN120

WORKROOM122

CLM123

MCR124

HOMEWORK114

CHILD READING115

FAMILY 105

CSD102

CUSTODIALE201

ELECTRICALE204

MECHANICALE203

ELECTRICALE202

COPIER131

HALLWAY127

FLOOR PLAN A203

FLOOR PLAN

N

2ADDITIVE ALTERNATE 02: PARTIAL FLOOR PLANSCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0"

N

3ADDITIVE ALTERNATE 03: PARTIAL FLOOR PLANSCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0"

COMMUNITY126

LOBBY101

5

4

8

7

6

05.08 ADD ALT. 02, PER STRUCT.05.06 ADD ALT. 02, ABOVE, PER STRUCT.

08.11 ADD ALT. 03

08.15 ADD ALT. 02

08.04 ADD ALT. 02

08.09 BASE BID

27 ADD ALT. 03

26 ADD ALT. 02

08.01 BASE BID

22 ADD ALT. 03

23 ADD ALT. 03

N

SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" 1


drawing title

REVISIONS

drawing number


La M

irada

Library

13

800

La M

irada

Driv

e La

Mira

da, C

A 9

0638

2015_01

as noted

1

2

3

4

5

6

architect's stamp

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

engineer's stamp

architect

engineer

2/24/16

C 31193


ER

IK

CH I A -K O N G

MA

R

ST

AT

E

O F C A L I F OR

NI

A

LIC

E


CT



1

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

A DCB HGFE

2A401

1A401

3A401

4A401

5A401

EEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

EEEEEEEE

E

E

E

EEE

E

EEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE

E

E

EE

EE

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

EEEEEEEE

E

E

E

E E E

EEEE E E

EEEE E E

E

E

E

A

A +12' AFF

A+11' AFF

A+11'-9" AFF

A

+12'

AFF

16.02 TYP.

08.24ADD ALT. 01, TYP.

16.24 TYP.

16.20 TYP.

08.24 TYP. ADD ALT. 01

16.03 TYP.09.16 TYP.

12.0312.0312.03

12.02TYP. @EACH DOOR

08.12 TYP.

15.27 SEE MECH

06.09UPPER, TYP.

16.02 TYP.

16.04 BOTT. @ 8', TYP.

16.04 BOTT. @ 8', TYP.16.04BOTT. @ 8', TYP.

06.09UPPER, TYP.

16.02TYP.

16.04 BOTT. @ 8', TYP.

08.24TYP. ADD ALT. 01

16.04CYLINDER BOTT. @ 9', TYP.

11.01 SURFACE MTD.

5A803

16.04TYP.

16.04TYP.

16.04 TYP.16.04TYP.

16.04BOTT. @ 10', TYP.

16.04BOTT. @ 9', TYP.

16.04BOTT. @ 10', TYP.

16.04TYP.

16.04 BOTT. @ 8', TYP. FOR 3

16.04 TYP.

09.08BOTT. @ 11', TYP.

09.08 BOTT. @ 11', TYP.

09.08BOTT. @ 9', TYP.

09.08BOTT. @ 8', TYP.

12.03

12.0312.03 12.03 12.03 12.03

12.03

12.06

12.03

12.03

09.16 TYP.

12.03

12.03

3—

FOR ADD ALT. 03

2—

FOR ADD ALT. 02

16.24 TYP.

12.02 AT DOOR

12.06 AT WINDOW

09.08 BOTT. @ 8'

09.08BOTT. @ 8', TYP.09.08 BOTT. @ 9', TYP.

16.04 BOTT. @ 10', TYP.

09.08

09.18

16.04 BOTT. @ 10', TYP.

09.21 TYP.

09.21 TYP.

09.21 TYP.

09.08BOTT. @ 8', TYP.

16.24 TYP.

15.11@ 10'-3", TYP.

3A803

09.08BOTT. @ 11', TYP.

11A802

TYP.11

A802TYP.

11A802

11A802SIM.

11A802

11A802

11A802

11A802

11A802

11A802

09.22TYP.

12.03TYP. @TRANSOM

16.04 BOTT. @ 8', TYP.

16.04 BOTT. @ 8', TYP.

09.18 SEAM7

A806TYP.

7A806 TYP.

09.18 SEAM

9A803

09.22 TYP.

16.01 TYP.

16.08 TYP.

16.24 TYP.

16.24 TYP.

16.24 TYP.

16.10 TYP.

09.20TYP.

16.24 TYP.

16.11

09.08 TYP. ABOVE 9'-0" AFF

09.08 TYP. ABOVE 9'-0" AFF

10A803TYP.

09.08 TYP. ABOVE 9'-0" AFF10

A803TYP.

NO CLG.

REFLECTED CEILING PLAN A501

REFLECTED CEILING PLAN

NOTES 1. ALL LIGHT FIXTURES AND MECHANICAL DUCTS AND

DIFFUSERS SHALL BE SUPPORTED DIRECTLY FROM THE STRUCTURE ABOVE OR BE AN APPROVED DESIGN-BUILD SECONDARY STRUCTURE COMPOSED OF CHANNEL STRUT FRAMING ELEMENTS.

EXCEPTIONS: - DUCTS AND DIFFUSERS OVER 20 LBS. AND/OR SUPPORTING

TRIBUTARY DUCT LOADS SHALL BE SUPPORTED DIRECTLY FROM THE STRUCTURE.

2. CHANNEL STRUT SECONDARY STRUCTURE SHALL BE

PROVIDED WHERE REQUIRED TO MOUNT ELECTRICAL BOXES THAT COMPLY WITH APPLICABLE CODES

3. LIGHT FIXTURES SHALL UTILIZE MOUNTING BRACKETS AND

ASSEMBLIES BY THE LIGHTING MANUF. SUPPORT DETAILS TO BE REVIEWED AND APPROVED BY ARCHITECT.

4. LATERAL BRACING COMPLIANCE FOR SUSPENDED CEILING

SYSTEMS MAY ALSO BE OBTAINED BY PLACING TWO LATERAL WIRES IN ONE PLANE WITHIN 2" MAX. OF THE CROSS RUNNER AND TWO LATERAL WIRES IN THE OPPOSITE PLANE WITHIN 2" MAX. OF THE SAME CROSS RUNNER.

5. ALL LIGHTS ARE TO BE CENTERED IN THE SPACE THEY

SERVE UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED 6. ALL CEILING-INSTALLED ACOUSTICAL INSULATION SHALL BE

1" THICK FIBERGLASS BATT, 1 1/2 LB. DENSITY, W/NEOPRENE COATING PAINTED EITHER WHITE OR BLACK, PER ARCHITECT'S DIRECTION.

7. ALL EXPOSED STRUCTURAL STEEL IS TO BE PRIMED AND

PAINTED. ALL ITEMS VISIBLE THROUGH FINISHES SHALL BE PAINTED FLAT BLACK.

8. ALL ALUMINUM ELEMENTS SHALL BE ELECTRICALLY

SEPARATED FROM ALL STEEL ELEMENTS (EXCEPTION: HOT DIPPED GALVANIZED STEEL OR STAINLESS STEEL.)

9. REFER TO SHEET A806 FOR TYPICAL SUSPENDED CEILING

REQUIREMENTS. 10. ALL PENDANT FIXTURES SHALL COMPLY WITH CBC TABLE

16A-0, FOOTNOTE 25. 11. ALL GYP. SHEATHING AT HORIZONTAL SOFFITS AND/OR

EAVES SHALL BE 5/8" GLASS MAT SECUROCK BY USG. 12. PROVIDE BOXED HEADER BACKING FOR ALL CEILING

MOUNTED EQUIPMENT. REFER TO 1B/A801. 13. PROVIDE REMOVEABLE ACCESS PANELS WITH FINISH TO

MATCH ADJACENT AT ALL WOOD CEILINGS WHERE REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE CODES.

14. ALL LIGHT FIXTURES SHALL BE SEISMICALLY BRACED

AGAINST SWAY AS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE CODES. 15. SEE A205 FOR APPROX. TUBULAR SKYLIGHT DOME

LOCATIONS. PROVIDE TUBES AND ELBOWS AS REQUIRED TO ACHIEVE DIFFUSER LOCATIONS AS INDICATED ON THIS PLAN. (ADD. ALT. 01)

CEILING RETURN AIR REGISTER/GRILLE: FINISH TO MATCH ADJACENT FIN. SURFACE

CEILING EXHAUST AIR REGISTER/GRILLE: FINISH TO MATCH ADJACENT FIN. SURFACE

CEILING SUPPLY AIR DIFFUSER: FINISH TO MATCH ADJACENT FIN. SURFACE

WALL MOUNTED CLOCK

LEGEND

LED RECESSED DIRECT/INDIRECT TROFFER

LED TASK LIGHT FIXTURE. MOUNTING HEIGHT: UNDER UPPER CABINETS

LED PENDANT CYLINDER FIXTURE

FLUORESCENT PENDANT LENSED TROFFER

LED PENDANT: BOTT. @ 8'-0" AFF

LED RECESSED DIRECT DOWNLIGHT

WALL/ CEILING MOUNTED EXIT SIGN, SINGLE FACE. SEE LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE.CEILING MOUNTED EXIT SIGN, DIRECTIONAL DOUBLE FACE. SEE LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE.

TUBULAR SKYLIGHT GRID MOUNTED DIFFUSER (ADD ALT. 01)

TUBULAR SKYLIGHT CIRCULAR DIFFUSER: MOUNT @ 12" BELOW FIN. CEILING, TYP. THROUGHOUT (ADD ALT. 01)

CEILING RECESSED P.A. SPEAKER. SEE E-4.1 AND E-4.4 FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

WALL RECESSED P.A. SPEAKER. SEE E-4.1 AND E-4.4 FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

CEILING MOUNTED PHOTOCELL

(E) FLUORESCENT TROFFER TO REMAIN

EXTERIOR SURFACE MOUNTED FIXTURE

E

(E) CAN FIXTURE TO REMAIN

CEILING MOUNTED CCTV CAMERA

A CEILING MOUNTED WIRELESS ACCESS POINT

A WALL MOUNTED WIRELESS ACCESS POINT

CEILING RECESSED A.V. SPEAKER. SEE E-4.1 AND E-4.4 FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

E

GR1

12.06 ADD ALT. 02

N

2ADDITIVE ALTERNATE 02: PARTIAL REFLECTED CEILING PLAN

SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0"

19 20 2112.02 ADD ALT. 02

12.06 ADD ALT. 02

25 ADD ALT. 02 (HIGH)

26 ADD ALT. 02

N

3SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0"

LOBBY101

5

4

8

7

08.01 ADD ALT. 03

ADDITIVE ALTERNATE 03: PARTIAL REFLECTED CEILING PLAN

24 ADD ALT. 03

22 ADD ALT. 03

23 ADD ALT. 03

27 ADD ALT. 02 (LOW)

28

29

1 HOUR FIRE RESISTIVE ENVELOPE AT FINISH CEILING: ALL PENETRATIONS SUCH AS LIGHT FIXTURES AND LOW VOLTAGE DEVICES SHALL BE ENCASED SO AS TO PRESERVE A CONTINUOUS FIRE RESISTIVE ENVELOPE. SEE 9/A803

1

1

1

DELIVERY119

LOBBY101

MARKETPLACE103

FRIENDS104

MEN106

WOMEN107

STORAGE109

A / V110

STORAGE111

GROUP STUDY112

GROUP STUDY113

TEEN MULTIPURPOSE125

COMMUNITY126

ADULT SHELVING128

ADULT TECH129

ADULT READING130

CHILD SHELVING116

FAMILY PLACE117

LOUNGE118

MEN121

WOMEN120

WORKROOM122

CLM123

MCR124

HOMEWORK114

CHILD READING115

FAMILY 105

CSD102

CUSTODIALE201

ELECTRICALE204

MECHANICALE203

ELECTRICALE202

HALLWAY127

CORRIDOR132

COPIER131

KITCHENETTE108

13 24

B C D

BCD

1 32 4

C D

C

A603

NOTES: 1. SLOPE FINISH FLOORS

AT 1/4" PER LINEAL FOOT TOWARDS FLOOR DRAINS.

2. PROVIDE ADEQUATE BACKING AT ALL GRAB BAR, FIXTURE LOCATIONS, AND TOILET PARTITIONS.

3. ALL WALL FINISH MATERIALS, SCREEDS, ETC. SHALL CONTINUE AROUND CORNERS TO ELEVATION FACES NOT SHOWN

4. PROVIDE CONTINUOUS SOLID FURRING / BACKING BETWEEN PAINTED WALLS AND ALL TOILET ACCESSORIES SUCH AS MIRRORS

5. PROVIDE SURFACE MOUNTED RACEWAYS PER KEYNOTE 16.22 AT ALL EXPOSED WIRING AT (E) CMU WALLS


drawing title

REVISIONS

drawing number


2015_01

as noted

1

2

3

4

5

6

architect's stamp

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

engineer's stamp

architect

engineer

2/24/16


C 31193


ER

IK

CH I A -K O N G

MA

R

ST

AT

E

O F C A L I F OR

NI

A

LIC

E


CT

La M

irada

Library

13

800

La M

irada

Driv

e La

Mira

da, C

A 9

0638


45

EAST

21

SOUTH

WESTNORTH

a s k u s

NORTH

EAST

WEST

SOUTH

EAST

EXIT

EXIT

WEST

NORTHSOUTH

WESTEASTNORTHSOUTH

c u s t o m e r s e r v i c e

SOUTH

EXIT

09.15 TYP.

09.08 TYP.

09.15 TYP.

09.08 TYP.

09.15 TYP.

09.15 TYP.

09.15TYP.

11A807

TYP.

09.15TYP.

11A807

TYP.

09.08 TYP.

09.15 TYP.

09.27TYP.

4A803

4A803

09.27 TYP.

09.27 TYP.

09.27TYP.

5A703

09.15TYP.09.15TYP.

09.08 PT-409.08 PT-4

09.08 PT-4

09.08 PT-4

09.08 PT-3

09.08 PT-3

4A807

TYP.

5A807 TYP.

6A807TYP.

TYP. 10A803

TYP. 10A803

TYP. 10A803

FIN. FL.

BOT. OF FIXTURE +8'-0"

10'-0

"

FIN. FL.

BOT. OF SOFFIT +9'-0"

10'-3

"

7'-0

"

12'-0

"

9'-0

"

3'-0

"

13'-8

"

12'-6

"

10'-0

"

9'-0

"

10'-0

"

10'-0

"

1

1

1

1

1

06.20TYP.

05.21 TYP.

06.19TYP.

16.04 TYP.

16.04 CABLE, TYP.

16.04 TYP.

10.16 ROD HUNG FROM SOFFIT PAINT RODS WHITE

09.06TYP.

12.03 TYP.

12.03 TYP.

09.08 TYP.16.24 TYP. 16.08 TYP.

09.18TYP.

06.20 TYP.

06.20 TYP.

06.19 TYP.

06.19 TYP.

06.20 TYP.

06.19TYP.

06.20TYP.

10.17TYP.05.21TYP.

06.19 TYP.

16.04TYP.

16.04CABLE, TYP.

09.08TYP.

09.18 TYP.

06.20TYP.10.09TYP.

15.11TYP.

10.17TYP.

09.08

09.18

16.04TYP.

16.04CABLE, TYP.

09.08

09.18

16.04 TYP.

16.04 CABLE, TYP.

10.17TYP.10.17TYP.

10.17TYP.

09.18

10.17 TYP.10.17 TYP.

10.06 ROUGH WALL OPENING

10.06 4'-0" TALL

05.21FILLER, TYP.

06.20TYP.

05.21TYP.

10.25 TYP. 10.17 TYP.

08.09TYP.

08.09TYP.

08.09TYP.

06.19 TYP.

04.01 TYP.

04.01 TYP.

04.01 TYP.

09.20 TYP.09.20 TYP.

15.11TYP.

15.11TYP.

09.15 TYP.

10.09TYP.

16.10TYP.

04.02TYP.

04.02TYP.

04.02TYP.

04.02 SHOWN SHADED

INTERIOR ELEVATIONS

4SCALE 1/4"=1' - 0"

2SCALE 1/4"=1' - 0"

CORRIDOR 132 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS

25 3

21 22

1

1

19

30

TEEN MULTIPURPOSE 125 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS

14

13

3SCALE 1/4"=1' - 0"

HALLWAY 127 AND LOBBY 101 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS1SCALE 1/4"=1' - 0"

CHILD SHELVING 116, FAMILY PLACE 117, CHILD READING 115 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS5SCALE 1/4"=1' - 0"CSD 102 INT. ELEVS.

A604

NOTES: 1. SLOPE FINISH FLOORS

AT 1/4" PER LINEAL FOOT TOWARDS FLOOR DRAINS.

2. PROVIDE ADEQUATE BACKING AT ALL GRAB BAR, FIXTURE LOCATIONS, AND TOILET PARTITIONS.

3. ALL WALL FINISH MATERIALS, SCREEDS, ETC. SHALL CONTINUE AROUND CORNERS TO ELEVATION FACES NOT SHOWN

4. PROVIDE CONTINUOUS SOLID FURRING / BACKING BETWEEN PAINTED WALLS AND ALL TOILET ACCESSORIES SUCH AS MIRRORS

5. PROVIDE SURFACE MOUNTED RACEWAYS PER KEYNOTE 16.22 AT ALL EXPOSED WIRING AT (E) CMU WALLS


drawing title

REVISIONS

drawing number


2015_01

as noted

1

2

3

4

5

6

architect's stamp

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

engineer's stamp

architect

engineer

2/24/16


C 31193


ER

IK

CH I A -K O N G

MA

R

ST

AT

E

O F C A L I F OR

NI

A

LIC

E


CT

La M

irada

Library

13

800

La M

irada

Driv

e La

Mira

da, C

A 9

0638

ADDENDUM TO BIDDERS 03 25 FEBRUARY 2016DEFGH

5678

87654

HGFE

EXIT

EXIT

EXIT

EXIT

EXITEXIT

NORTHWEST

EAST

SOUTH

WEST

a s k u s

F.E

.

F.E

.

F.E

.

SOUTH

NORTH

EAST

NORTH

EAST

10.17 TYP.

09.15 TYP.

10.25TYP.

10.26RECESSED, TYP.

10.17 TYP.

16.20TYP.

11.01 SURFACE MTD.

16.20TYP.

12.06 AT WINDOW12.06

12.02 AT DOOR

04.01 TYP.

10.25 TYP.

09.15 TYP.

10.25 TYP.

10.25TYP.

10.26TYP.

10.26RECESSED, TYP. 10.26SURFACE MOUNTED

10.17 TYP.

09.08 PT-3

09.08 TYP.

09.08 TYP.

09.08PT-4 09.08PT-4

06.19 TYP.

06.20 TYP.

10.17TYP.

06.19 TYP.

06.20 TYP.

09.08 TYP.

09.22 TYP.

09.18 TYP.

12.06 AT WINDOW

12.02 AT DOORS

09.15 TYP.

09.15TYP.

09.15 TYP.

10.02

10.02

11.02KEY SWITCH BOX

10.17

10.17 TYP.

10.02

06.19 TYP.06.20 TYP.

09.18 TYP.

09.08 PT-4

09.08 TYP.09.08 TYP.

09.08 TYP.

09.18 TYP.

10.17 TYP.10.17 TYP.10.17 TYP.

15.11TYP. 15.11TYP.

15.11TYP.16.08 TYP.

10.09TYP.

15.11TYP.

10.09TYP.

10.09TYP.

10.17 TYP.

10.17 TYP.

15.11TYP.

16.08 TYP.

16.08 TYP.16.24 TYP.

09.15 TYP.

15.11TYP.

12.03 TYP.

09.15 TYP.

04.02TYP.

2'-6

"

SPEAKER 10'-0" AFF, TYP. CL

7'-2

"

2'-2

"

2'-0

"

4'-0

"

4'-0

"

10'-0

"

4'-0

"

8'-0

"

11'-0

"

ALIGN

11'-0

"

8'-6

"10

'-0"

7'-0

" 9'-0

"

11'-0

"

11'-9

"

12'-0

"

CL

11A807

TYP.

08.04

08.03

08.04

08.03

11A807

10A807

8A807

9A807

4A807

TYP.

4A807

TYP.

5A807 TYP.

6A807TYP.

TYP. 10A803

1

2

SCALE 1/4"=1' - 0"

SCALE 1/4"=1' - 0"

COMMUNITY 126 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS

INTERIOR ELEVATIONS

8

28

7

9 10

ADULT TECH 129, ADULT READING 130, ADULT SHELVING 128, MARKETPLACE 103 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS

4

6

29

11

NOTE: SEE 5/A301 FOR ELEVATION ASSOCIATED WITH ADD. ALT. 02

8910

11

12

12

OPEN TO BEYOND

23 1716 241815 20

19 22

3SCALE 1/4"=1' - 0"COPIER 131 INT. ELEVS.

1 11

A803

1

4 2

DETAILS

SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0"TYP. ROLLING GRILL SECTION

5SCALE: 1" = 1'-0"

A/V EQUIPMENT NICHE

6TYP. SCREED @ PLASTERSCALE: 6" = 1'-0" 3


drawing title

REVISIONS

drawing number


2015_01

as noted

1

2

3

4

5

6

architect's stamp

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

engineer's stamp

architect

engineer

2/24/16


C 31193


ER

IK

CH I A -K O N G

MA

R

ST

AT

E

O F C A L I F OR

NI

A

LIC

E


CT

La M

irada

Library

13

800

La M

irada

Driv

e La

Mira

da, C

A 9

0638

2015_01

as noted

7TYP. SEMI - RECESSED DISPLAY CASESCALE: 6" = 1'-0"

8

9

10


VARIESSEE PLAN

SCALE: 3" = 1'-0"TYP. SECURITY GRILL JAMBS

FULL OR PARTIAL HEIGHT INTERIOR METAL STUD WALL

WALL TYPE A

PLUMBING CHASE WALLWALL TYPE B

TYP. CURB AND SILL AT EXTERIOR WALLSCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0"

EXTERIOR CEMENT PLASTER WALLWALL TYPE C

SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0"TYP. WALL TYPES

D FURRED CMU WALL SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0"

TYP. STAFF RESTROOM WALLSCALE: 3" = 1'-0"

R13 INSULATION, TYP.

PTD. WATERPROOF 5/8" XGB

BRIDGING

5/8" CEMENTITIOUS BACKERBOARD

BOND COAT

CERAMIC TILE WAINSCOT

SEE INTERIOR ELEVATIONS

METAL STUD WALL. SEE STRUCTURAL

FULL HEIGHT INTERIOR WOOD STUD WALL, 1 HOUR FIRE RATED PER UL U305

WALL TYPE E

ASSEMBLY CONSISTS OF: GYPSUM BOARD - 5/8 IN. THICK GYPSUM BOARD APPLIED VERTICALLY OR HORIZONTALLY. - SHEETROCK® ULTRALIGHT FIRECODE X GYPSUM PANELS WOOD STUDS - NOM. 2 BY 4 IN. WOOD STUDS SPACED 16 IN. OC MAX, EFFECTIVELY FIRESTOPPED GYPSUM BOARD - 5/8 IN. THICK, 2 FT WIDE GYPSUM BOARD, TONGUE AND GROOVE EDGE, APPLIED HORIZONTALLY TO ONE SIDE OF THE ASSEMBLY - SHEETROCK BRAND FIRECODE CORE GYPSUM SHEATHING (TYPE X)

FULL HEIGHT INTERIOR METAL STUD WALL, 1 HOUR FIRE RATED PER UL U419

WALL TYPE F

ASSEMBLY CONSISTS OF: GYPSUM BOARD - 5/8 IN. THICK GYPSUM BOARD APPLIED VERTICALLY OR HORIZONTALLY. - SHEETROCK® ULTRALIGHT FIRECODE X GYPSUM PANELS STEEL STUDS - 3-5/8 IN. WIDE MIN., 25 GAUGE STEEL STUDS @ MAX 24 IN. OC GYPSUM BOARD - 5/8 IN. THICK EXTERIOR REGULAR GYPSUM SHEATHING APPLIED VERTICALLY OR HORIZONTALLY - SHEETROCK® ULTRALIGHT FIRECODE X GYPSUM PANELS

NOTES: 1. BASED ON REPORT # AER-09038. COMPLY WITH ALL APPLICABLE REQUIREMENTS 2. WRAP ALL LIGHT FIXTURES AND OTHER PENETRATIONS TO MAINTAIN 1-HOUR ASSEMBLY 3. SEE MECH FOR FIRE DAMPER REQUIREMENTS

1-HOUR FIRE RESISTIVE FINISH CEILING ASSEMBLYSCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0"

SCALE: 3" = 1'-0"TYP. XGB FINISH OVER (E) CMU

07.04 ACOUSTICAL, TYP.

09.08 TYP.

09.07 TYP. AT ALL WALL TILE

05.04 BRACING, WHERE OCCURS

05.12 TYP.

07.04 WHERE NOTED

05.12 TYP.

09.08 TYP., U.O.N.

TYP. 1GA801

07.04

05.12 TYP.

09.08 TYP., U.O.N.

04.01

07.04 WHERE NOTED

06.13 TYP.

09.08 TYP., U.O.N.

07.04 WHERE NOTED

05.12 TYP.

09.08 TYP., U.O.N.

2'-0

"

3'-0"

6"6"

6"

24.00

12

2" M

IN.

4"1"

ALIGN, TYP.

14 12"

18"

6"10

'-0" C

LEA

R O

PE

NIN

G H

EIG

HT

19"

2"

AS REQ'D

2"

1"

1"

+9'-0" AFF

VARIES: +6" ABOVE FIN. CEILING

VARIES: FIN. CEILING SEE REFLECTED CEILING PLANS

1

STEEL BRACING, WHERE OCCURS. SEE STRUCTURAL PLANS

05.10 16 GA. MIN. "Z" GIRT W/2" MIN. VERTICAL LEGS AND 1" HORIZONTAL LEG, @ 24" O.C. MAX. INSTALL UPPER VERTICAL LEG TOWARDS WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE TO FACILITATE DRAINAGE, TYP.

07.23 TYP.

07.21 TYP.09.12 TYP.09.08 TYP.05.12 TYP.

07.03 TYP. @ ALL EXT. WALLS

09.04 TYP.

NOTES: 1. PROVIDE BACKING AS REQUIRED FOR ATTACHMENT OF FIXTURES, CASEWORK, ETC. 2. EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR WALL FINISHES MAY DIFFER; SEE EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR ELEVATIONS

MEETING ROOM

108

ELEC POWER/DATA BOX FOR PROJECTOR CONNECTION4" METAL STUDS ACCEPTABLE

METAL STUD WALL, 6" TYP. U.O.N.

5/8" XGB, TYP.

CORNER REINFORCEMENT, TYP.

CONT. 16 GA. TRACK

CONT. LIGHTGAUGE ANGLE, TYP. 4" METAL STUD BRACING ACCEPTABLE

METAL STUD KICKERS, 6" TYP. U.O.N.

7/8" EXTERIOR CEMENT PLASTER

EXPANSION JOINT, TYP. AT ALL PAVEMENT TO EXTERIOR WALL CONDITIONS

FOUNDATION SCREED

FIBERGLASS BATT INSULATION (R19 MIN.)

METAL STUD WALL

5/8" TYPE "X" GYP. BD.

CONC. SLAB PER STRUCT.CONCRETE CURB

SLOPE TO DRAIN: 1/4" PER LIN. FT., TYP. U.O.N.

FINISH SURFACE

EXT. GYP. SHEATHING

WATER RESISTIVE AIR BARRIER WITH DRAINAGE CAVITY

VAPOR RETARDER AND GRANULAR FILL PER STRUCT. AND GEOTECH REPORT,

TYP. AT ALL INTERIOR SLABS ON GRADE

24 GA. CONT. S.S. COUNTERFLASHING, TYP. AT ENTIRE BUILDING PERIMETER

CEMENTITIOUS SEALER, TYP. AT ALL EXPOSED CONCRETE

24 GA. CONT. S.S. J-MOLDING, TYP. AT ALL EXT. GYP. SHEATHING

S.S. J-MOLDING

NOTE: 1. FASTEN EXT. SHEATHING BD. TO CONCRETE CURBS USING APPROPRIATE CONCRETE SCREWS BY TAPCON OR EQUAL.

ALUM. PLASTER SCREED, UNPAINTED

EXT. GYP. SHEATHING

PTD. EXT. CEM. PLASTER

FINISH FLOOR

EMERGENCY HAND CHAIN (STORED ABOVE ACCESS PANEL)

GUIDE TRACK BY GRILL MANUF.

WOOD FIN. CLG.

CLEAR ANOD. ALUM. BREAK METAL

1/8" THICK CLEAR ANOD. ALUM. BREAK METAL CHANNEL: FASTEN TO MOTORIZED GRILL STEEL END PLATES W/#10 SMS.

PROVIDE SLOTS AS SHOWN AT ALUM. CHANNEL END PLATES TO ALLOW FOR REMOVAL. ALIGN W/ WOOD CEILING

1" RIGID INSULATION WITH GALV. Z CHANNELS

WATER RESISTIVE AIR BARRIER

CORNER REINF., TYP.

CONT. SEALANT AND BACKER ROD, TYP.

16 GAUGE "U" CHANNEL, AS REQUIRED: SEE DETAIL ABOVE

SECURITY GRILL JAMB

ANGLES BY GRILL MANUF., TYP.

STRUCT. STEEL

PTD. XGB, TYP.

SECURITY GRILL JAMB

CORNER REINF., TYP.


16 GAUGE"U" CHANNEL, AS REQUIRED: SEE DETAIL TO LEFT

ANGLES BY GRILL MANUF.

STRUCT. STEEL

CONDITION AT C.3 - 4SCALE: 3" = 1'-0"

N

CONDITION AT C.3 - 5SCALE: 3" = 1'-0"

RIGID INSULATION

S.S. COUNTER FLASHING

WATER RESISTIVE AIR BARRIER

FOUNDATION SCREED

PTD. XGB, TYP.

ACOUSTICAL INSULATION

WOOD TRIM BY DISPLAY CASE MANUF.

ILLUMINATED DISPLAY CASE

DOUBLE STUD FRAMING AT JAMBS

FLAT FRAME W/ 1 3/8" METAL WALL STUDS @ 12" O.C.

PTD. XGB, TYP.


1" USG SHEETROCK BRAND GYPSUM LINER PANELS

6"x16GA CHANNEL JOISTS @ 16" O.C.

5/8" USG SHEETROCK FIRECODE C CORE GYPSUM PANELS

USG STEEL C-H STUD SPANNING HORIZONTALLY 24" O.C.

USG STEEL J-RUNNER

PTD. XGB, TYP.

7/8" HAT CHANNEL(E) CMU: MAY BE PRECISION OR SPLIT FACED, TYP.


NOTE: DETAIL SIMILAR AT JAMB CONDITION